The URL can be used to link to this page

Specifications - (Volume II of V) OFFICE COPY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS for the construction of the '1 ✓o 11 D urham Advan,s = eo k. - 40/4, 6 a , Wastewater ISI Oiy '1 ''+ f - 1 �M r � � �� Treatment Facility ..,..:.„. ,.:t. ..,_... .... ¢ �--- -'mac- �'+n�' . Phase 5B1 Headworks Improvements Project No. 6410 - ,.., _. _ . � t- _ I M r , Cr --? CleanWater Services # Aii,., . * --,..„. , i k ' ''' -**4* .t . ,. -. Volume II of V �� ' . Y� Divisions 2 thru 10 — Technical Specifications iirY TiMARiI Apprise Conditionally Appro d .» e 6i Po 9111 . dta 1!0 83 d s rl Nl�1 jf1: • r PENMI� NS?, rocs 1 los Latter to; Follow ( ``s' � � Job +;�- ... 4 C Y . For information regarding this project, contact: - 4 Lynne Chicoine, (503) 872 -4527 , : 4 CH2MHILL `�,» ... ifa June 2010 CLEAN WATER SERVICES TUALATIN, OREGON ' BIDDING REQUIREMENTS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS " for the construction of the DURHAM ADVANCED WASTEWATER TREATMENT FACILITY 1 PHASE 5B1 HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENTS Project No. 6410 **** 1 * * ** 1 ' CH2M HILL Corvallis, Oregon 1 June 2010 Project No. 391538 Project Copy No. . ' I . ' DURHAM PHASE 5B1 I SECTION 00007 • SEALS PAGE I PART I — PROCUREMENT REQUIREMENTS O . PART 2 —CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS 3— SPECIFICATIONS .. . ‘ ,,c.,% sa . 1 DIVISION:01 -GENERAL REQUIREMENTS N I G / 4' • - 4 ,4. "; /1/k s , • • •k: C, I ' EXPIRES:4:2- I PART 3 — SPECIFICATIONS • DIVISION-02 - SITE CONSTRUCTION - I 0 11 € • 4, , 1 f V I C. C't G I LEXPIRESW , 4/ aesz I I PART 3— SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 03 -.CONCRETE --- ' ' Ti 4 1 I i I . -0' 0 17.0 0 trm"PN • I LANE. v . LARATION DATE 12/31 - 0 I - • II CVO/391538A SEALS PAGE • JUNE 2010 00007 - 1 111, I • DURHAM PHASE 5B1 . :R4 e ,. PART 3 - SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 04— MASONRY CT < i0 ? ROIC4r 15977 I I l e , • Ry LANE. FEXPIRATFON DATE, - ‘Til7n4 ..... PART 3 - SPECIFICATIONS _ I DIVISION 05-- NIETAIS .. , , I 4 ,>,,. 15977 . 1' 4 - Illt 0 GO ' rs, ill c) -EXPIRATION DATE : 12/31/1W - I • .. PART 3- SPECIFICATIONS I DIVISION 06 — WOOD AND PLASTICS I 4 '''' 6 444 4.101 E. CA t: I IP 249 0 4, pCOMIALUS, OtiEGON:,,, I li g OF t%"' . i I SEALS PAGE CVO/391538A 1 00007 : JUNE 2010 I I DURHAM PHASE 581 1 , PART 3 — SPECIFICATIONS I • DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION I Azz JOHN E. CAVE ag D....4 # 2429 I . o • c p CORVALLIS, OREGON , - ,0 A ASZ2t, ip I 41' OF I PART 3— SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION OK-DOORS AND , WINDO , WS 1 • 4 4 I 'N • 414,7 JOIIIN E.. ,C;AVE I 04 #2429 c p CORVALLIS, OREGON -...,, f-‘) • 1,- I PART 3 — SPECIFICATIONS I DIVISION 09 - FINISHES I 4% . Z si. .<61)4e, I 461. # 2429 4, 3 t p CORVALLIS, OREGON I 40' 4 •S.I.N' I I I CVO/391538A SEALS PAGE JUNE 2010 00007 -3 I • , DURHAM PHASE 5B1 PART 3 - SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION'10 - SPECIALTIES 01 4p JOHN E. CAVE t0g1 # 2429 0 • pCORVALLIS, OREGON. c14V" 1 3% PART 3- SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT A.•? G 4 '.Z 1 t?' 49 4 311 \ V4 4 " Al OREGON 8 .2 ‹co - VAR. 1 EXP 4/30/1Z PART 3- SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION PROitiej • . ORE • N v D lo Itc.P;i4; „pt. )ce rga /gr.-, i SEALS PAGE CVO/391538A 00007 - 4 JUNE 2010 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 I PART 3 - SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL — ExP ( PART 3 - SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL CT RI • c.cc,$),PRop44-0 u.cf -- 7I826PE 1 . ) riv)4 73 . 1 ' "i'EG N / 1/4 - PA- 011 [11P I RATIO 11 DATE END OF SECTION CVO/391538A SEALS PAGE JUNE 2010 00007 - 5 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 I CLEAN WATER SERVICES ' DURHAM PHASE 5B1 - HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT TABLE OF CONTENTS VOLUME I ' DIVISION 0 - BIDDING REQUIREMENTS, CONTRACT FORMS, AND CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT SECTION TITLE NO. 00030 ADVERTISEMENT TO BID 00100 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 00300 BID FORMS 00500 AGREEMENT ' 00610 PERFORMANCE BOND 00620 PAYMENT BOND 00700 GENERAL CONDITIONS 00800 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 1 00810 OREGON PREVAILING WAGE RATES DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION TITLE NO. 01110 SUMMARY OF WORK ' 01140 WORK RESTRICTIONS 01292 SCHEDULE OF VALUES ' 01324 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE 01329 SAFETY PLAN 01330 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01350 SPECIAL PROCEDURES 01352 ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES 01410 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS CVO/391538A TABLE OF CONTENTS JUNE 2010 00060 - 1 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 I 01424 ABBREVIATIONS 01450 QUALITY CONTROL 01455 SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS SUPPLEMENT: CONTRACTOR'S STATEMENT OF ' RESPONSIBILITY 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01505 MOBILIZATION 01530 PROTECTION OF EXISTING FACILITIES 01532 SITE CONDITIONS SURVEYS 01535 SETTLEMENT MONITORING 01555 SITE ACCESS AND STORAGE 01560 TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS 01570 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL 01600 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01612 SEISMIC ANCHORAGE AND BRACING 01614 WIND DESIGN CRITERIA 01640 MANUFACTURERS' SERVICES SUPPLEMENT: OUTLINE OF TRAINING SESSION 01732 CUTTING AND PATCHING ' 01738 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 01756 TESTING, TRAINING, AND FACILITY STARTUP , SUPPLEMENT: STARTUP AND PERFORMANCE EVALUATION FORM SUPPLEMENT: EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER'S CERTIFICATE OF INSTALLATION SUPPLEMENT: CWS ELECTRICAL, INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL STARTUP STANDARD PROCEDURES 01770 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES , 01782 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA SUPPLEMENT: EQUIPMENT DATA SHEET ' SUPPLEMENT: SAMPLE EQUIPMENT DATA SHEET I TABLE OF CONTENTS CVO/391538A 00060 - 2 JUNE 2010 1 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 I VOLUME - II - I DIVISION 2 - SITEWORK SECTION TITLE . I NO. 02200 SITE CLEARING I 02240 DEWATERING 02260 SHORING I 02315 EXCAVATION 02316 _ FILL AND BACKFILL . I 02319 SUBGRADE PREPARATION 02320 TRENCH BACKFILL I 02370 SOIL STABILIZATION 02533 MANHOLES I 02631 CATCH BASINS 02632 STORM DRAIN, SANITARY SEWER, AND DRAINAGE PIPING 01/ 02632 -03 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) DATA SHEET 02632 -05 REINFORCED CONCRETE DATA SHEET I 02710 AGGREGATE BASE COURSES 02771 CURBS, GUTTERS, AND SIDEWALKS I 02772 ASPHALT PAVING 02821 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES I DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE I SECTION NO. TITLE • I 0310 CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES 0 03210 REINFORCING STEEL I 03251 CONCRETE JOINTS AND ACCESSORIES 03300 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE I 03355 CONCRETE FINISHING 03370 CONCRETE CURING 1 CVO/391538A TABLE OF CONTENTS JUNE 2010 00060 - 3 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 1 03400 PRECAST CONCRETE 03600 NONSHRINK GROUTING ' SUPPLEMENT: 24 -HOUR EVALUATION OF NONSHRINK GROUT TEST FORM AND GROUT TESTING PROCEDURES 03720 REPAIR OF VERTICAL AND OVERHEAD CONCRETE SURFACES 03722 REPAIR OF HORIZONTAL CONCRETE SURFACES ' 03740 CRACK REPAIR EPDXY INJECTION GROUTING 1 DIVISION 4 - MASONRY SECTION NO. TITLE 04230 CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT 1 DIVISION 5 - METALS SECTION NO. TITLE 05050 WELDING SUPPLEMENT: WELDING AND NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING , TABLE 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS ' 05520 METAL RAILINGS 05530 METAL GRATINGS ' 05810 EXPANSION JOINT COVER ASSEMBLIES • 1 DIVISION 6 - WOOD PLASTIC COMPOSITES SECTION , NO. TITLE 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY 1 1 TABLE OF CONTENTS CVO/391538A 00060 - 4 JUNE 2010 I DURHAM PHASE 5B1 I DIVISION 7 - THERMAL I SECTION NO. TITLE I 07530 ETHYLENE- PROPYLENE - DIENE- MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING 07620 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM I . 07700 ROOF SPECIALTIES AND ACCESSORIES 07900 JOINT SEALANTS I DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS I SECTION NO. TITLE I 08001 DOOR AND HARDWARE SCHEDULE SUPPLEMENT: DOOR AND HARDWARE SCHEDULE I SUPPLEMENT: DOOR TYPES SUPPLEMENT: DOOR FRAME TYPES 08002 RELIGHT SCHEDULE SUPPLEMENT: RELIGHT SCHEDULE SUPPLEMENT: RELIGHT TYPES I . 08110 METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08333 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS I 08710, DOOR HARDWARE 08800 ' GLAZING I 08950 TRANSLUCENT PANEL SKYLIGHT ASSEMBLIES DIVISION 9 - FINISHES I SECTION NO. TITLE 09000 SCHEDULES FOR FINISHES I SUPPLEMENT: INTERIOR FINISH SCHEDULE I CVO/391538A TABLE OF CONTENTS 111 JUNE 2010 00060 - 5 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 •1 09900 PAINTING AND COATING SUPPLEMENT: ' PAINT SYSTEM DATA SHEET (PSDS) PAINT PRODUCT DATA SHEET (PPDS) , DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES ' SECTION NO. TITLE 10400 SIGNAGE SUPPLEMENT: SIGNAGE FOR EXISTING PANELS AND EQUIPMENT SUPPLEMENT: SIGN SCHEDULE 10520 PORTABLE FIRE AND SAFETY EQUIPMENT 10999 MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES VOLUME III DIVISION 11- EQUIPMENT SECTION NO. TITLE 11211 HORIZONTAL SPLIT -CASE CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS SUPPLEMENT: HORIZONTAL SPLIT -CASE CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS EQUIPMENT SIGNAGE SUPPLEMENT: NPW PUMP 3 DATA SHEET 11282 FABRICATED SLIDE GATES SUPPLEMENT: FABRICATED SLIDE GATES EQUIPMENT SIGNAGE SUPPLEMENT: SLIDE GATE SCHEDULE 11322 CYCLONE SEPARATOR AND GRIT WASHER SUPPLEMENT: CYCLONE SEPARATOR AND GRIT WASHER ' EQUIPMENT SIGNAGE SUPPLEMENT: GRIT CLASSIFIER 1 AND 2 INDUCTION MOTOR DATA SHEET TABLE OF CONTENTS CVO/391538A 00060 - 6 JUNE 2010 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 ■ 11331 MULTIPLE RAKE BAR SCREENS SUPPLEMENT: MULTIPLE RAKE BAR SCREENS EQUIPMENT SIGNAGE ' 11340 SCREW -TYPE SCREENINGS WASHER COMPACTOR SUPPLEMENT: SCREW -TYPE SCREENINGS WASHER COMPACTOR EQUIPMENT SIGNAGE ' SUPPLEMENT: VULCAN INDUSTRIES, INC., SCOPE OF SUPPLY, SECTION 11340, SCREW TYPE SCREENINGS ' WASHER COMPACTOR WITH LUMP SUM PRICE 11400 HOT WATER GENERATOR SYSTEM SUPPLEMENT: HOT WATER GENERATOR SYSTEM EQUIPMENT SIGNAGE DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION ' SECTION NO. TITLE 13400 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS SUPPLEMENT: OPERATIONAL READINESS TESTING ' (ORT - PART 1) SUPPLEMENT: INSTRUMENTATION CALIBRATION SHEET - SAMPLE SUPPLEMENT: PERFORMANCE ACCEPTANCE TEST SHEET SUPPLEMENT: INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL COMPONENTS EQUIPMENT SIGNAGE SUPPLEMENT: NEW PLC 1/0 SUPPLEMENT: EXISTING PLC -3 I/O TO BE REMOVED OR RE -USED / RE- CONNECTED 13530 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL COMPONENTS ' SUPPLEMENT: INSTRUMENT LIST 13532 PANELS, ENCLOSURES, AND PANEL COMPONENTS SUPPLEMENT: CONTROL PANEL SCHEDULE 13533 PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER HARDWARE SUPPLEMENT: PLC EQUIPMENT LIST CVO/391538A TABLE OF CONTENTS JUNE 2010 00060 - 7 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 1 13540 CONTROL LOOP DESCRIPTIONS SUPPLEMENT: SCREENINGS SYSTEM OVERVIEW AND ' SEQUENCING SUPPLEMENT: INFLUENT UPWELL LEVEL SUPPLEMENT: SCREENINGS CHANNEL INLET AND OUTLET GATES SUPPLEMENT: BAR SCREENS ' SUPPLEMENT: SLUICE TROUGH SUPPLEMENT: HOT WATER GENERATION SYSTEM SUPPLEMENT: WASHER/COMPACTOR ISOLATION GATES SUPPLEMENT: SCREENINGS WASHER/COMPACTOR ' SUPPLEMENT: GRIT SYSTEM OVERVIEW AND MASTER CONTROL I SUPPLEMENT: GRIT BASIN PISTA UNITS SUPPLEMENT: AIR SCOUR VALVES SUPPLEMENT: WATER SCOUR VALVES SUPPLEMENT: GRIT PUMPS SUPPLEMENT: GRIT CLASSIFIERS SUPPLEMENT: CROSS CONVEYOR SUPPLEMENT: ODOR CONTROL FAN 1 SUPPLEMENT: HEADWORKS BUILDING MAKEUP AIR UNIT SUPPLEMENT: HEADWORKS BUILDING ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING SUPPLEMENT: NON - POTABLE WATER PUMPS SUPPLEMENT: NON - POTABLE WATER STRAINER 13550 PACKAGE CONTROL SYSTEMS DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL SECTION NO. TITLE 15060 PIPING SUPPORT SYSTEMS 15085 MECHANICAL INSULATION 1 15100 PLUMBING PIPING AND ACCESSORIES I TABLE OF CONTENTS CVO/391538A 00060 - 8 JUNE 2010 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 I 15200 PROCESS PIPING- GENERAL 1 15200 -01 CEMENT - MORTAR -LINED DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS DATA SHEET ' 15200 -03 CARBON STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS GENERAL SERVICE DATA SHEET 15200 -04 CAST IRON SOIL PIPE (CISP) AND FITTINGS DATA SHEET ' 15200 -08 STAINLESS STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS - GENERAL SERVICE DATA SHEET 15200 -10 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE AND FITTINGS DATA SHEET ' 15200 -13 COPPER AND COPPER ALLOY PIPE, TUBING, AND FITTINGS DATA SHEET 15200 -19 HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE (HDPE) PIPE DATA SHEET 15200 -23 ACID - RESISTANT POLYPROPYLENE WASTE AND VENT PIPE AND FITTINGS DATA SHEET ' 15202 PROCESS VALVES AND OPERATORS SUPPLEMENT: PROCESS VALVES AND OPERATORS EQUIPMENT SIGNAGE SUPPLEMENT: POWER OPERATED VALVE SCHEDULE I SUPPLEMENT: SELF - REGULATED VALVE SCHEDULE 15205 PROCESS PIPING SPECIALTIES SUPPLEMENT: PROCESS PIPING SPECIALTIES EQUIPMENT ' SIGNAGE 15830 HVAC SUPPLEMENT: HVAC EQUIPMENT SIGNAGE 15850 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS 1 15890 DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES 15892 FOUL AIR DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES 15950 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 15955 PROCESS PIPING LEAKAGE TESTING • CVO/391538A TABLE OF CONTENTS JUNE 2010 00060 - 9 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 • DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL I SECTION TITLE NO. 16010 ELECTRICAL WORK, GENERAL 16015 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 1 16050 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16060 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 16080 COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 16120 CONDUCTORS I 16130 RACEWAY AND BOXES 16220 LOW - VOLTAGE AC INDUCTION MOTORS 16288 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES 16310 SECONDARY SUBSTATIONS SUPPLEMENT: SECONDARY SUBSTATIONS EQUIPMENT SIGNAGE 16340 MEDIUM - VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR SUPPLEMENT: MEDIUM- VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR EQUIPMENT SIGNAGE 16412 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES SUPPLEMENT: AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH EQUIPMENT ' SIGNAGE 16431 PROTECTIVE DEVICE STUDIES 16440 LOW- VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL SUPPLEMENT:. LOW- VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL EQUIPMENT SIGNAGE 16442 PANELBOARDS SUPPLEMENT: PANELBOARDS EQUIPMENT SIGNAGE , 16455 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE UNITS 1 1 1 TABLE OF CONTENTS CVO/391538A 00060 - 10 JUNE 2010 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 16460 LOW- VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS SUPPLEMENT: LOW - VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS EQUIPMENT SIGNAGE 16500 LIGHTING VOLUME IV DRAWINGS VOLUME V • DESIGN DETAILS END OF SECTION 1 1 1 1 CVO/391538A TABLE OF CONTENTS JUNE 2010 00060 - 11 • DURHAM PHASE 5B1 SECTION 02200 SITE CLEARING PART 1 GENERAL ' 1.01 DEFINITIONS ' A. Interfering or Objectionable Material: Trash, rubbish, and junk; vegetation and other organic matter, whether alive, dead, or decaying; topsoil. ' B. Clearing: Removal of interfering or objectionable material lying on or protruding above ground surface. ' C. Grubbing: Removal of vegetation and other organic matter including stumps, buried logs, and roots greater than 2 -inch caliper to a depth of 6 inches below subgrade. ' D. Scalping: Removal of sod without removing more than upper 3 inches of topsoil. ' E. Stripping: Removal of topsoil remaining after applicable scalping is completed. F. Project Limits: Areas, as shown or specified, within which Work is to be performed. 1.02 SUBMITTALS ' A. Action Submittals: Drawings clearly showing clearing, grubbing, and stripping limits. ' 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Obtain Engineer's approval of staked clearing, grubbing, and stripping limits, ' prior to commencing clearing, grubbing, and stripping. 1.04 SCHEDULING AND SEQUENCING A. Prepare Site only after adequate erosion and sediment controls are in place. Limit areas exposed uncontrolled to erosion during installation of temporary erosion and sediment controls to maximum of 0.1 acre. CVO/391538A SITE CLEARING JUNE, 2010 02200 - 1 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 PART 2 PRODUCTS NOT ED (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Clear, grub, and strip areas actually needed for waste disposal, borrow, or Site improvements within limits shown or specified. B. Do not injure or deface vegetation that is not designated for removal. 3.02 LIMITS A. As follows, but not to extend beyond Project limits. 1. Excavation 5 feet beyond top of cut slopes. 2. Fill: a. Clearing and Grubbing: 5 feet beyond toe of permanent fill 111 b. Stripping and Scalping: 2 feet beyond toe of permanent fill. 3. Waste Disposal: a. Clearing: 5 feet beyond perimeter. I b. Scalping and Stripping: Not required. c. Grubbing: Around perimeter as necessary for neat finished appearance. 4. Other Areas: As shown. B. Remove rubbish, trash, and junk from entire area within Project limits. 3.03 CLEARING A. Clear areas within limits shown or specified. B. Fell trees so that they fall away from facilities and vegetation not designated for removal. C. Cut stumps not designated for grubbing to within 6 inches of ground surface. D. Cut off shrubs, brush, weeds, and grasses to within 2 inches of ground surface. 3.04 GRUBBING A. Grub areas within limits shown or specified. 3.05 SCALPING A. Do not remove sod until after clearing and grubbing is completed and 1 resulting debris is removed. 1 SITE CLEARING CVO/391538A 02200 - 2 JUNE 2010 DURHAM PHASE 5B 1 B. Scalp areas within limits shown or -s ecified - - -- - - - P p 3.06 STRIPPING A. Do not remove topsoil until after scalping is completed. ' B. Strip areas within limits to minimum depths shown or specified. Do not remove subsoil with topsoil. ' C. Stockpile strippings, meeting requirements of Section 02316, Fill and Backfill, for topsoil, separately from other excavated material. ' 3.07 SALVAGE ' A. Sod with commercial value may be sold to Contractor's*benefit. Promptly remove from Project Site. 3.08 DISPOSAL A. Clearing and Grubbing Debris: 1. Dispose of debris offsite. 2. Burning of debris onsite will not be allowed. 3. Woody debris may be chipped. Chips may be sold to Contractor's benefit or used for landscaping onsite as mulch or uniformly mixed with topsoil, provided that resulting mix will be fertile and not support ' combustion. Maximum dimensions of chipped material used onsite shall be 1/4 inch by 2 inches. Dispose of chips that are unsaleable or unsuitable for landscaping or other uses with unchipped debris. 4. Limit offsite disposal of clearing and grubbing debris to locations that are approved by federal, state, and local authorities, and that will not be visible from Project. ' B. Scalpings: As specified for clearing and grubbing debris. ' C. Strippings: 1. Dispose of strippings that are unsuitable for topsoil or that exceed quantity required for topsoil offsite. 2. Stockpile topsoil in sufficient quantity to meet Project needs. Dispose of excess strippings as specified for clearing and grubbing. ' END OF SECTION I CVO/391538A SITE CLEARING JUNE, 2010 02200 - 3 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 SECTION 02-240 DEWATERING PART 1 GENERAL ' 1.01 SUBMITTALS A. Informational Submittals: 1. Water control plan. 2. Well permits. 3. Discharge permits. 4. Water Level Elevations Observed in Observation Wells: Submit same day measured. 5. Settlement Benchmark Elevations: Submit weekly record. 6. Inflow Measurements: Submit weekly record. 1.02 WATER CONTROL PLAN A. As a minimum, include: 1. Descriptions of proposed groundwater and surface water control facilities including, but not limited to, equipment; methods; standby equipment and power supply, pollution control facilities, discharge locations to be utilized, and provisions for immediate temporary water I supply as required by this section. 2. Drawings showing locations, dimensions, and relationships of elements of each system. 3. Design calculations demonstrating adequacy of proposed dewatering systems and components. ' B. If system is modified during installation or operation revise or amend and resubmit Water Control Plan. PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION ' 3.01 GENERAL A. Continuously control water during course of construction, including weekends and holidays and during periods of work stoppages, and provide adequate backup systems to maintain control of water. ' 3.02 SURFACE WATER CONTROL A. See Section 01500, Temporary Facilities and Controls. CVO/391538A DEWATERING JUNE 2010 02240 - 1 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 B. Remove surface runoff controls when no longer needed. 3.03 DEWATERING SYSTEMS A. Provide, operate, and maintain dewatering systems of sufficient size and capacity to permit excavation and subsequent construction in dry and to lower and maintain groundwater level a minimum of 2 feet below the lowest point of excavation. Continuously maintain excavations free of water, regardless of source, and until backfilled to final grade. ' B. Dewatering systems shall include wells, well points, or open sumps, and other equipment and appurtenances installed outside sufficiently below lowest point of excavation, or to maintain specified groundwater elevation. C. Design and Operate Dewatering Systems: ' 1. To prevent loss of ground as water is removed. 2. To avoid inducing settlement or damage to existing facilities, completed I Work, or adjacent property. 3. To relieve artesian pressures and resultant uplift of excavation bottom. D. Provide sufficient redundancy in each system to keep excavation free of water in event of component failure. E. Provide 100 percent emergency power backup with automatic startup and switchover in event of electrical power failure. F. Provide supplemental ditches and sumps only as necessary to collect water from local seeps. Do not use ditches and sumps as primary means of dewatering. ' 3.04 SETTLEMENT A. Monitoring Dewatering- Induced Settlement: Establish monuments for ' monitoring settlement at existing Headworks, location to be selected by Engineer. Monitor vertical movement of each settlement monument, relative to remote benchmark selected by Engineer, at least weekly. 3.05 MONITORING FLOWS ' A. Monitor volume of water pumped per calendar day from excavations, as Work progresses. Also monitor volume of water introduced each day into excavations for performance of Work. Monitor flows using measuring devices acceptable to Engineer. I 1 DEWATERING CVO/391538A 02240 - 2 JUNE 2010 DURHAM PHASE 5B 1 3.06 DISPOSAL OF WATER ' A. Obtain discharge permit for water disposal from authorities having jurisdiction. ' B. Treat water collected by dewatering operations, as required by regulatory agencies, prior to discharge. C. Discharge water as required by discharge permit and in manner that will not cause erosion or flooding, or otherwise damage existing facilities, completed Work, or adjacent property. ' D. Remove solids from treatment facilities and perform other maintenance of treatment facilities as necessary to maintain their efficiency. ' 3.07 • PROTECTION OF PROPERTY ' A. Make assessment of potential for dewatering induced settlement. Provide and operate devices or systems, including but not limited to reinjection wells, infiltration trenches and cutoff walls, necessary to prevent damage to existing ' facilities, completed Work, and adjacent property. B. Securely support existing facilities, completed Work, and adjacent property vulnerable to settlement due to dewatering operations. Support shall include, but not be limited to, bracing, underpinning, or compaction grouting. END OF SECTION CVO/391538A DEWATERING JUNE 2010 02240 - 3 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 SECTION 02260 SHORING PART 1 GENERAL ' 1.01 SUBMITTALS A. Informational Submittals: 1. Excavation support plan. ' 2. Movement monitoring plan. 3. Trench excavation plan. 4. Movement measurement and data and reduced results indicating ' movement trends. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide surveys to monitor movements of critical facilities. PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL ' A. Design, provide, and maintain shoring, sheeting, and bracing as necessary to support the sides of excavations and to prevent detrimental settlement and lateral movement of existing facilities, adjacent property, and the completed ' Work. 3.02 EXCAVATION SUPPORT PLAN A. Prepare excavation support plan addressing the following topics: 1. Details of shoring, bracing, sloping, or other provisions for worker protection from hazards of caving ground. 2. Design assumptions and calculations. 3. Methods and sequencing of installing excavation support. ' 4. Proposed locations of stockpiled excavated material. 5. Minimum lateral distance from the crest of slopes for vehicles and stockpiled excavated materials. 6. Anticipated difficulties and proposed resolutions. 1. CVO/391538A SHORING JUNE 2010 02260 - 1 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 3.03 MOVEMENT MONITORING PLAN A. Prepare movement monitoring plan addressing following topics: ' 1. Survey control. 2. Location of monitoring points. 3. Plots of data trends. 4. Interval between surveys. 3.04 REMOVAL OF EXCAVATION SUPPORT A. Remove excavation support in a manner that will maintain support as ' excavation is backfilled. B. Do not begin to remove excavation support until support can be removed ' without damage to existing facilities, completed Work, or adjacent property. C. Remove excavation support in a manner that does not leave voids in the ' backfill. 3.05 TRENCHES ' A. For trench excavation exceeding 5 feet in depth, provide adequate safety system meeting requirements of applicable state and local construction safety orders, and federal requirements. END OF SECTION 1 1 1 1 1 SHORING CVO/391538A 02260 - 2 JUNE 2010 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 SECTION 02315 ' EXCAVATION PART 1 GENERAL ' 1.01 SUBMITTALS ' A. Informational Submittals: 1. Excavation Plan, Detailing: ' a. Methods and sequencing of excavation. b. Proposed locations of stockpiled excavated material: c. Proposed onsite and offsite spoil disposal sites. d. Numbers, types, and sizes of equipment proposed to perform excavations. e. Anticipated difficulties and proposed resolutions. ' f. Reclamation of onsite spoil disposal areas. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide adequate survey control to avoid unauthorized overexcavation. 1.03 WEATHER LIMITATIONS A. Material excavated when frozen or when air temperature is less than ' 32 degrees F shall not be used as fill or backfill until material completely thaws. B. Material excavated during inclement weather shall not be used as fill or backfill until material drains and dries sufficiently for proper compaction. ' 1.04 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Dewatering: Conform to applicable requirements of Section 02240, Dewatering, prior to initiating excavation. B. Excavation Support: Install and maintain, as specified in Section 02260, Shoring, as necessary to support sides of excavations and prevent detrimental settlement and lateral movement of existing facilities, adjacent property, and completed Work. CVO/391538A EXCAVATION JUNE 2010 02315 - 1 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 1 PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Excavate to lines, grades, and dimensions shown and as necessary to accomplish Work. Excavate to within tolerance of plus or minus 0.1 foot, except where dimensions or grades are shown or specified as maximum or minimum. Allow for forms, working space, granular base, topsoil, and similar items, wherever applicable. Trim to neat lines where concrete is to be deposited against earth. B. Do not overexcavate without written authorization of Engineer. C. Remove or protect obstructions as shown and as specified in Section 01500, Temporary Facilities and Controls. 3.02 UNCLASSIFIED EXCAVATION A. Excavation is unclassified. Complete all excavation regardless of the type, nature, or condition of the materials encountered. 3.03 TRENCH WIDTH A. Minimum Width of Trenches: 1. Single Pipes, Conduits, Direct -Buried Cables, and Duct Banks: , a. Less than 4 -inch OutsideDiameter or Width: 18 inches. b. Greater than 4 -inch Outside Diameter or Width: 18 inches greater than outside diameter or width of pipe, conduit, direct -buried cable, or duct bank. 2. Multiple Pipes, Conduits, Cables, or Duct Banks in Single Trench: 18 inches greater than aggregate width of pipes, conduits, cables, duct banks, plus space between. 3. Increase trench widths by thicknesses of sheeting. ' B. Maximum Trench Width: Unlimited, unless otherwise shown or specified, or unless excess width will cause damage to existing facilities, adjacent property, or completed Work. Pipe of greater strength or superior pipe bedding, when approved in writing by Engineer, may be used in lieu of maintaining the pipe widths shown or specified. ' 3.04 PIPE BEDDING GROOVES FOR NONPERFORATED DRAIN LINES A. Semicircular, trapezoidal, or 90- degree -V. 1 i EXCAVATION CVO/391538A 02315 - 2 JUNE 2010 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 13. Excavated or lowed into trench bottom. Forming-groove b y compaction will P g1� Y compaction be acceptable. 3.05 EMBANKMENT AND CUT SLOPES ' A. Shape, trim, and finish cut slopes to conform with lines, grades, and cross - sections shown, with proper allowance for topsoil or slope protection, where shown. B. Remove stones and rock that exceed 3 -inch diameter and that are loose and may roll down slope. Remove exposed roots from cut slopes. ' C. Round tops of cut slopes in soil to not less than a 6 -foot radius, provided such rounding does not extend offsite or outside easements and rights -of -way, or adversely impacts existing facilities, adjacent property, or completed Work. 3.06 STOCKPILING EXCAVATED MATERIAL A. Stockpile excavated material that is suitable for use as fill or backfill until material is needed. B. Post signs indicating proposed use of material stockpiled. Post signs that are readable from all directions of approach to each stockpile. Signs should be clearly worded and readable by equipment operators from their normal seated position. ' C. Confine stockpiles to within easements, rights -of -way, and approved work areas. Do not obstruct roads or streets. ' D. Do not stockpile excavated material adjacent to trenches and other excavations, unless excavation side slopes and excavation support systems are designed, constructed, and maintained for stockpile loads. ' E. Do not stockpile excavated materials near or over existing facilities, adjacent property, or completed Work, if weight of stockpiled material could induce ' excessive settlement. 3.07 DISPOSAL OF SPOIL ' A. Dispose of excavated materials, which are unsuitable or exceed quantity needed for fill or backfill, in designated onsite disposal area. Coordinate with ' Owner. 3.08 OVEREXCAVATION FOR HEADWORKS ADDITION A. Excavate to elevations shown. 111 B. Notify Engineer when excavation subgrade is reached. CVO/391538A EXCAVATION JUNE 2010 02315 -3 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 ' determine , C. Engineer will ermine if additional excavation is required. END OF SECTION 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 EXCAVATION CVO /391538A 02315 - 4 JUNE 2010 ' DURHAM PHASE 5B1 SECTION 02316 FILL AND BACKFILL PART 1 GENERAL ' 1.01 DEFINITIONS ' A. Relative Compaction: 1. Ratio, in percent, of as- compacted field dry density to laboratory ' maximum dry density as determined in accordance with ASTM D1557. 2. Apply corrections for oversize material to either as- compacted field dry density or maximum dry density, as determined by Engineer. B. Optimum Moisture Content: 1. Determined in accordance with ASTM Standard specified to determine maximum dry density for relative compaction. 2. Determine field moisture content on basis of fraction passing 3/4 -inch ' sieve. C. Relative Density: Calculated in accordance with ASTM D4254 based on maximum index density determined in accordance with ASTM D4253 and minimum index density determined in accordance with ASTM D4254. ' D. Prepared Ground Surface: Ground surface after completion of required demolition, clearing and grubbing, scalping of sod, stripping of topsoil, excavation to grade, and subgrade preparation. E. Completed Course: A course or layer that is ready for next layer or next phase of Work. ' F. Lift: Loose (uncompacted) layer of material. ' G. Geosynthetics: Geotextiles, geogrids, or geomembranes. H. Well- Graded: ' 1. A mixture of particle sizes with no specific concentration or lack thereof of one or more sizes. 2. Does not define numerical value that must be placed on coefficient of uniformity, coefficient of curvature, or other specific grain size distribution parameters. ' 3. Used to define material type that, when compacted, produces a strong and relatively incompressible soil mass free from detrimental voids. CVO/391538A FILL AND BACKFILL JUNE 2010 02316 - 1 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 I. Influence Area: Area within lanes sloped downward and outward at p p 60- degree angle from horizontal measured from: 1. 1 foot outside outermost edge at base of foundations or slabs. 2. 1 foot outside outermost edge at surface of roadways or shoulder. 3. 0.5 foot outside exterior at spring line of pipes or culverts. J. Borrow Material: Material from required excavations or from designated borrow areas on or near Site. K. Selected Backfill Material: Materials available onsite that Engineer determines to be suitable for specific use. ' L. Imported Material: Materials obtained from sources offsite, suitable for specified use. M. Structural Fill: Fill materials as required under structures, pavements, and other facilities. I N. Embankment Material: Fill materials required to raise existing grade in areas other than under structures. i 1.02 SUBMITTALS - A. Action Submittals: 1. Samples: Imported material taken at source. ' • B. Informational Submittals: 1. Manufacturer's data sheets for compaction equipment. ' 2. Certified test results from independent testing agency. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE ' A. Notify Engineer when: 1. Structure is ready for backfilling, and whenever backfilling operations are resumed after a period of inactivity. 2. Soft or loose subgrade materials are encountered wherever embankment or site fill is to be placed. 3. Fill material appears to be deviating from Specifications. 1.04 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Complete applicable Work specified in Section 02315, Excavation; and 1 Section 02319, Subgrade Preparation, prior to placing fill or backfill. FILL AND BACKFILL CVO/391538A 02316 - 2 JUNE 2010 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 B. Backfill against concrete structures only after concrete has attained g Y ' compressive strength, specified in Section 03300, Cast -in -Place Concrete. Obtain Engineer's acceptance of concrete work and attained strength prior to placing backfill. ' C. Backfill around water - holding structures only after completion of satisfactory leakage tests as specified in Section 03300, Cast -in -Place Concrete. ' D. Do not place granular base, subbase, or surfacing until after subgrade has been prepared as specified in Section 02319, Subgrade Preparation. '. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL ' A. Gradation Tests: ' 1. As necessary to locate acceptable sources of imported material. 2. During production of imported material, test as follows: a. Granular Fill: 1,500 tons. b. Sand: 1,500 tons. c. Granular Drain Material: 1,500 tons. d. Foundation Stabilization Rock: 1,500 tons. e. Soil Cover Over Geotextiles: 1,500 tons. 2.02 EARTHFILL ' A. Excavated material from required excavations free from rocks larger than 3 inches, from roots and other organic matter, ashes, cinders, trash, debris, and other deleterious materials. B. Material containing more than 10 percent gravel, stones, or shale particles is unacceptable. C. Provide imported material of equivalent quality, if required to accomplish ' Work. 2.03 GRANULAR FILL ' A. 1 -inch minus crushed gravel or crushed rock. • B. Free from dirt, clay balls, and organic material. C. Well- graded from coarse to fine and containing sufficient fines to bind material when compacted, but with maximum 8 percent by weight passing No. 200 sieve. CVO/391538A FILL AND BACKFILL JUNE2010 02316 -3 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 2.04 SAND A. Free from clay, organic matter, or other deleterious material. ' B. Gradation as determined in accordance with ASTM C117 and ASTM C136: Sieve Size Percent Passing by Weight 1/4-inch 100 , No. 4 95 - 100 No. 200 0 - 8 , 2.05 WATER FOR MOISTURE CONDITIONING A. Free of hazardous or toxic contaminates, or contaminants deleterious to proper compaction. 2.06 BASE COURSE ROCK ' A. As specified in Section 02710, Aggregate Base Courses. 2.07 FOUNDATION STABILIZATION ROCK A. Crushed rock or pit run rock. B. Uniformly graded from coarse to fine. C. Free from excessive dirt and other organic material. D. Maximum 2 -1/2 -inch particle size. , 2.08 TOPSOIL A. General: Natural, friable, sandy loam, obtained from well - drained areas, free I from objects larger than 1 -1/2 inches maximum dimension, and free of subsoil, roots, grass, other foreign matter, hazardous or toxic substances, and ' deleterious material that may be harmful to plant growth or may hinder grading, planting, or maintenance. B. Composition: As determined in accordance with USBR 514.4.4: 1. Gravel -Sized Fraction: Maximum 5 percent by weight retained on a No. 10 sieve. 2. Sand -Sized Fraction: Maximum 65 percent passing No. 10 sieve and retained on No. 270 sieve. 3. Silt -Sized Fraction: Maximum 50 percent passing No. 270 sieve and larger than 0.002 millimeter. FILL AND BACKFILL CVO/391538A 02316 - 4 JUNE 2010 • DURHAM PHASE 5B1 4. Clay -Sized Fraction: Maximum 2 -5- percent smaller than - ' 0.002 millimeter. C. Organic Matter: Minimum 1.5 percent by dry weight as determined in ' accordance with USBR 514.8.7. D. pH ' E. Textural Amendments: Amend as necessary to conform to required composition by incorporating sand, peat, manure, or sawdust. F. Source: Stockpile material onsite, in accordance with Section 02200, Site Clearing. Import topsoil if onsite material fails to meet specified requirements or is insufficient in quantity. ' PART 3 EXECUTION ' 3.01 GENERAL A. Keep placement surfaces free of water, debris, and foreign material during placement and compaction of fill and backfill materials. B. Place and spread fill and backfill materials in horizontal lifts of uniform thickness, in a manner that avoids segregation, and compact each lift to specified densities prior to placing succeeding lifts. Slope lifts only where necessary to conform to final grades or as necessary to keep placement surfaces drained of water. C. During filling and backfilling, keep level of fill and backfill around each structure and buried tank even. D. Do not place fill or backfill, if fill or backfill material is frozen, or if surface upon which fill or backfill is to be placed is frozen. E. If pipe, conduit, duct bank, or cable is to be laid within fill or backfill: 1. Fill or backfill to an elevation 2 feet above top of item to be laid. 2. Excavate trench for installation of item. 3. • Install bedding, if applicable, as in Section 02320, Trench Backfill. 4. Install item. ' 5. Backfill envelope zone and remaining trench, as shown or specified. F. Tolerances: 1 1. Final Lines and Grades: Within a tolerance of 0.1 foot unless dimensions or grades are shown or specified otherwise. CVO/391538A FILL AND BACKFILL JUNE 2010 02316 - 5 1 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 2. Grade to establish and maintain slopes and drainage shown. Reverse p d dra ge as s o everse slopes are not permitted. G. Settlement: Correct and repair any subsequent damage to structures, pavements, curbs, slabs, piping, and other facilities, caused by settlement of fill or backfill material. 3.02 BACKFILL UNDER AND AROUND STRUCTURES A. Under Facilities: Within influence area beneath structures, slabs, pavements, curbs, piping, conduits, duct banks, and other facilities, backfill with granular fill, unless otherwise shown. Place granular fill in lifts of 6 -inch maximum thickness and compact each lift to minimum of 95 percent relative.'compaction as determined in accordance with ASTM D1557. B. Other Areas: Backfill with earthfill to lines and grades shown, with proper allowance for topsoil thickness where shown. Place in lifts of 6 -inch maximum thickness and compact each lift to minimum 95 percent relative compaction as determined in accordance with ASTM D1557. 3.03 FILL A. Outside Influence Areas beneath Structures, Tanks, Pavements, Curbs, Slabs, Piping, and Other Facilities: Unless otherwise shown, place earthfill as follows: 1. Allow for 6 -inch thickness of topsoil where required. 2. Maximum 8 -inch thick lifts. 3. Place and compact fill across full width of embankment. 4. Compact to minimum 90 percent relative compaction as determined in ' accordance with ASTM D1557. 5. Dress completed embankment with allowance for topsoil, crest surfacing, and slope protection, where applicable. I 3.04 SITE TESTING A. Gradation: t 1. One sample from each 1,500 tons of finished product or more often as determined by Engineer, if variation in gradation is occurring, or if material appears to depart from Specifications. 2. If test results indicate material does not meet Specification requirements, terminate material placement until corrective measures are taken. 3. Remove material placed in Work that does not meet Specification requirements. 1 FILL AND BACKFILL CVO/391538A 02316 - 6 JUNE 2010 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 B. In -Place Density Tests: In accordance with ASTM D6938. During placement - -- ' of materials, test as follows: 1. Granular Fill: 500 tons. ' 2. Base Course Rock: 500 tons. 3.05 GRANULAR BASE, SUBBASE, AND SURFACING A. Place and Compact as specified in Section 02710, Aggregate Base Courses. 3.06 REPLACING UNAUTHORIZED OVEREXCAVATED MATERIAL ' A. Replace unauthorized excavation carried below grade lines shown or established by Engineer as follows: 1. Beneath Footings: Granular fill. 2. Beneath Fill or Backfill: Same material as specified for overlying fill or ' backfill. 3. Beneath Slabs -On- Grade: Granular fill. 4. Trenches: ' a. Unauthorized Overexcavation: Either trench stabilization material or granular pipe base material, as specified in Section 02320, Trench Backfill. b. Authorized Overexcavation: Trench stabilization material, as specified in Section 02320, Trench Backfill. 5. Permanent Cut Slopes (Where Overlying Area is Not to Receive Fill or Backfill): a. Flat to Moderate Steep Slopes (3:1, Horizontal Run: Vertical Rise or Flatter): Earthfill. b. Steep Slopes (Steeper than 3:1): 1) Correct overexcavation by transitioning between overcut areas and designed slope adjoining areas, provided such cutting does not extend offsite or outside easements and right -of -ways, or adversely impacts existing facilities, adjacent property, or completed Work. ' 2) Backfilling overexcavated areas is prohibited, unless in Engineer's opinion, backfill will remain stable, and overexcavated material is replaced as compacted earthfill. 3.07 ACCESS ROAD SURFACING 1 A. Place and compact as specified in Section 02710, Aggregate Base Courses. END OF SECTION 1 CVO/391538A FILL AND BACKFILL JUNE2010 02316 -7 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 SECTION 02319 - - ' SUBGRADE PREPARATION PART 1 GENERAL ' 1.01 DEFINITIONS A. Optimum Moisture Content: As defined in Section 02316, Fill and Backfill. B. Prepared Ground Surface: Ground surface after completion of clearing and ' grubbing, scalping of sod, stripping of topsoil, excavation to grade, and scarification and compaction of subgrade. ' C. Relative Compaction: As defined in Section 02316, Fill and Backfill. D. Relative Density: As defined in Section 02316, Fill and Backfill. ' E. Subgrade: Layer of existing soil after completion of clearing, grubbing, scalping of topsoil prior to placement of fill, roadway structure or base for floor slab. 1.02 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Complete applicable Work specified in Section 02315, Excavation, prior to subgrade preparation. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE ' A. Notify Engineer when subgrade is ready for compaction or proof - rolling or whenever compaction or proof - rolling is resumed after a period of extended inactivity. ' 1.04 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Prepare subgrade when unfrozen and free of ice and snow. ' PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Keep subgrade free of water, debris, and foreign matter during compaction or proof - rolling. ' B. Bring subgrade to proper grade and cross - section and uniformly compact surface. CVO/391538A SUBGRADE PREPARATION JUNE 2010 02319 - 1 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 C. Do not use sections of reared ground surface p p grou d ace as haul roads. Protect prepared subgrade from traffic. D. Maintain rep ared ground surface in finished condition until next course is p placed. 3.02 COMPACTION A. Under Earthfill: Compact upper 6 inches to minimum of 95 percent relative ' compaction as determined in accordance with ASTM D1557. 3.03 MOISTURE CONDITIONING ' A. Dry Subgrade: Add water, then mix to make moisture content uniform throughout. B. Wet Subgrade: Aerate material by blading, discing, harrowing, or other methods, to hasten drying process. ' 3.04 TESTING A. Proof -roll subgrade with equipment specified in Article Compaction to detect soft or loose subgrade or unsuitable material, as determined by Engineer. 3.05 CORRECTION A. Soft or Loose Subgrade: ' 1. Adjust moisture content and recompact, or 2. Over excavate as specified in Section 02315, Excavation, and replace with suitable material from the excavation, as specified in Section 02316, Fill and Backfill. B. Unsuitable Material: Over excavate as specified in Section 02315, Excavation, ' and replace with suitable material from the excavation, as specified in Section 02316, Fill and Backfill. END OF SECTION 1 1 1 SUBGRADE PREPARATION CVO/391538A 02319 - 2 JUNE 2010 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 • SECTION 02320 TRENCH BACKFILL PART 1 GENERAL ! 1.01 DEFINITIONS ! A. Base Rock: Granular material upon which manhole bases and other structures are placed. ! B. Bedding Material: Granular material upon which pipes, conduits, cables, or duct banks are placed. C. Imported Material: Material obtained by Contractor from source(s) offsite. D. Lift: Loose (uncompacted) layer of material. E. Pipe Zone: Backfill zone that includes full trench width and extends from prepared trench bottom to an upper limit above top outside surface of pipe, ! conduit, cable or duct bank. F. Prepared Trench Bottom: Graded trench bottom after excavation and installation of stabilization material, if required, but before installation of bedding material. ! G. Relative Compaction: The ratio, in percent, of the as- compacted field dry density to the laboratory maximum dry density as determined by ASTM D1557. Corrections for oversize material may be applied to either as- compacted field dry density or maximum dry density, as determined by Engineer. H. Selected Backfill Material: Material available onsite that Engineer determines ! to be suitable for a specific use. ! I. Well- Graded: A mixture of particle sizes that has no specific concentration or lack thereof of one or more sizes producing a material type that, when compacted, produces a strong and relatively incompressible soil mass free ! from detrimental voids. Well- graded does not define any numerical value that must be placed on the coefficient of uniformity, coefficient of curvature, or other specific grain size distribution parameters. 1.02 SUBMITTALS ! A. Action Submittals: 1. Shop Drawings: Manufacturer's descriptive literature for marking tapes. ' 2. Samples: Imported material taken at source. CVO/391538A TRENCH BACKFILL JUNE 2010 02320 - 1 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 B. Informational Submittals: 1. Catalog and manufacturer's data sheets for compaction equipment. 2. Certified Gradation Analysis: Submit not less than 30 days prior to delivery for imported materials or anticipated use for excavated materials, except for trench stabilization material that will be submitted prior to material delivery to Site. 3. Controlled Low Strength Material: Certified mix design and test results. Include material types and weight per cubic yard for each component of mix. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MARKING TAPE A. Nondetectable: 1. Inert polyethylene, impervious to known alkalis, acids, chemical ' reagents, and solvents likely to be encountered in soil. 2. Thickness: Minimum 5 mils. 3. Width: 3 inches. , 4. Identifying Lettering: Minimum 1 -inch high, permanent black lettering imprinted continuously over entire length. 5. Manufacturers and Products: a. Reef Industries; Terra Tape. b. Mutual Industries; Non - detectable Tape. c. Presco; Non - detectable Tape. ' B. Detectable: 1. Solid aluminum foil, visible on unprinted side, encased in protective high visibility, inert polyethylene plastic jacket. 2. Foil Thickness: Minimum 0.35 mils. ' 3. Laminate Thickness: Minimum 5 mils. 4. Width: 3 inches. 5. Identifying Lettering: Minimum 1 -inch high, permanent black lettering imprinted continuously over entire length. 6. Joining Clips: Tin or nickel - coated furnished by tape manufacturer. 7. Manufacturers and Products: a. Reef Industries; Terra Tape, Sentry Line Detectable. b. Mutual Industries; Detectable Tape. 1 c. Presco; Detectable Tape. 1 i TRENCH BACKFILL CVO/391538A 02320 - 2 JUNE 2010 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 C. Color: In accordance with APWA Uniform Color Code-for Temporary o Marking of Underground Facilities. Color* Facility ' Red Electric power lines, cables, conduit, and lightning cables Orange Communicating alarm or signal lines, cables, or conduit ' Yellow Gas, oil, steam, petroleum, or gaseous materials Green Sewers and drain lines ' Blue Potable water Purple Reclaimed water, irrigation, and slurry lines ' *As specified in NEMA Z535.1, Safety Color Code. ' 2.02 TRENCH STABILIZATION MATERIAL A. As specified for foundation stabilization rock in Section 02316, Fill and Backfill. 2.03 BEDDING MATERIAL AND PIPE ZONE MATERIAL • A. Unfrozen, friable, and no clay balls, roots, or other organic material. B. Clean or gravelly sand with less than 5 percent passing No. 200 sieve, as ' determined in accordance with ASTM D1140, or gravel or crushed rock within maximum particle size and other requirements as follows unless otherwise specified. 1. Duct Banks: 3/4 -inch maximum particle size. 2. PVC Irrigation System Piping and Ductile Iron Pipe with Polyethylene ' Wrap: 3/8 -inch maximum particle size. 3. Pipe Under 18 -Inch Diameter: 3/4 -inch maximum particle size, except 1/4 inch for stainless steel pipe, copper pipe, tubing, and plastic pipe ' under 3 -inch diameter. 4. Pipe Greater than 18 -Inch Diameter: 1 -1/2 -inch maximum particle size ' for ductile iron pipe, concrete pipe, welded steel pipe, and pretensioned or prestressed concrete cylinder pipe. 5. Perforated Pipe: Granular drain material. 6. Conduit and Direct - Buried Cable: a. Sand, clean or clean to silty, less than 12 percent passing No. 200 sieve. ' b. Individual Particles: Free of sharp edges. c. Maximum Size Particle: Pass a No. 4 sieve. CVO/391538A TRENCH BACKFILL JUNE 2010 02320 - 3 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 d. If more than 5 percent passes No. 200 sieve, the fraction that passes No. 40 sieve shall be nonplastic as determined in accordance with ASTM D4318. 2.04 EARTHFILL A. As specified in Section 02316, Fill and Backfill. 2.05 GRANULAR FILL , A. As specified in Section 02316, Fill and Backfill. 2.06 CONTROLLED LOW STRENGTH FILL A. Select and proportion ingredients to obtain compressive strength between 50 and 150 psi at 28 days in accordance with ASTM D4832. B. Materials: 1. Cement: ASTM C150, Type I or Type II. 2. Aggregate: ASTM C33, Size 7. 3. Fly Ash (if used): ASTM C618, Class C. 4. Water: Clean, potable, containing less than 500 ppm of chlorides. 2.07 GRAVEL SURFACING ROCK A. As specified in Section 02710, Aggregate Base Courses. , 2.08 TOPSOIL A. As specified in Section 02316, Fill and Backfill. 1 2.09 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform gradation analysis in accordance with ASTM C136 for: 1. Trench Stabilization Material: 1,500 tons. ' 2. Bedding and Pipe Zone Material: 1,500 tons. B. Certify Laboratory Performance of Mix Designs: , 1. Controlled low strength material. 2. Concrete. ' 1 TRENCH BACKFILL CVO/391538A 02320 - 4 JUNE 2010 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 TRENCH PREPARATION A. Water Control: ' 1. As specified in Section 02240, Dewatering. 2. Remove water in a manner that minimizes soil erosion from trench sides 1 and bottom. 3. Provide continuous water control until trench backfill is complete. ' B. Remove foreign material and backfill contaminated with foreign material that falls into trench. ' 3.02 TRENCH BOTTOM A. Firm Subgrade: Grade with hand tools, remove loose and disturbed material, and trim off high areas and ridges left by excavating bucket teeth. Allow space for bedding material if shown or specified. ' B. Soft Subgrade: If subgrade is encountered that may require removal to prevent pipe settlement, notify Engineer. Engineer will determine depth of overexcavation, if any required. 3.03 TRENCH STABILIZATION MATERIAL INSTALLATION ' A. Rebuild,trench bottom with trench stabilization material. B. Place material over full width of trench in 6 -inch lifts to required grade, ' providing allowance for bedding thickness. C. Compact each lift so as to provide a firm, unyielding support for the bedding ' • material prior to placing succeeding lifts. 3.04 BEDDING A. Furnish imported bedding material where, in the opinion of Engineer, excavated material is unsuitable for bedding or insufficient in quantity. B. Place over the full width of the prepared trench bottom in two equal lifts when the required depth exceeds 8 inches. C. Hand grade and compact each lift to provide a firm, unyielding surface. D. Minimum Thickness: As follows: ' 1. Pipe 15 Inches and Smaller: 4 inches. 2. Pipe 18 Inches to 36 Inches: 6 inches. CVO/391538A TRENCH BACKFILL JUNE 2010 02320 - 5 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 3. Pipe 42 Inches and Larger: 8 inches. 4. Conduit: 3 inches. 5. Direct -Buried Cable: 3 inches. 6. Duct Banks: 3 inches. E. Check grade and correct irregularities in bedding material. Loosen top 1 inch ' to 2 inches of compacted bedding material with a rake or by other means to provide a cushion before laying each section of pipe, conduit, direct - buried cable, or duct bank. F. Install to form continuous and uniform support except at bell holes, if applicable, or minor disturbances resulting from removal of lifting tackle. G. Bell or Coupling Holes: Excavate in bedding at each joint to permit proper assembly and inspection of joint and to provide uniform bearing along barrel of pipe or conduit. 3.05 BACKFILL PIPE ZONE ' A. Upper limit of pipe zone shall not be less than following: 1. Pipe: 12 inches, unless shown otherwise. 2. Conduit: 3 inches, unless shown otherwise. 3. Direct -Buried Cable: 3 inches, unless shown otherwise. 4. Duct Bank: 3 inches, unless shown otherwise. B. Restrain pipe, conduit, cables, and duct banks as necessary to prevent their ' movement during backfill operations. C. Place material simultaneously in lifts on both sides of pipe and, if applicable, between pipes, conduit, cables, and duct banks installed in same trench. 1. Pipe 10 -Inch and Smaller Diameter: First lift less than or equal to 1/2 pipe diameter. 2. Pipe Over 10 -Inch Diameter: Maximum 6 -inch lifts. D. Thoroughly tamp each lift, including area under haunches, with handheld tamping bars supplemented by "walking in" and slicing material under haunches with a shovel to ensure that voids are completely filled before placing each succeeding lift. E. After the full depth of the pipe zone material has been placed as specified, compact the material by a minimum of three passes with a vibratory plate compactor only over the area between the sides of the pipe and the trench walls. 1 F. Do not use power- driven impact compactors to compact pipe zone material. TRENCH BACKFILL CVO/391538A 02320 - 6 JUNE 2010 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 3.06 MARKING TAPE INSTALLATION O A. Continuously install marking tape along centerline of all buried piping, at depth shown. Coordinate with piping installation drawings. ' 1. Detectable Marking Tape: Install with nonmetallic piping and waterlines. 2. Nondetectable Marking Tape: Install with metallic piping. 3.07 BACKFILL ABOVE PIPE ZONE ' A. General: 1. Process excavated material to meet specified gradation requirements. ' 2. Adjust moisture content as necessary to obtain specified compaction. 3. Do not allow backfill to free fall into the trench or allow heavy, sharp pieces of material to be placed as backfill until after at least 2 feet of backfill has been provided over the top of pipe. 4. Do not use power driven impact type compactors for compaction until at least 4 feet of backfill is placed over top of pipe. 1 5. Backfill to grade with proper allowances for topsoil, crushed rock surfacing, and pavement thicknesses, wherever applicable. 6. Backfill around structures with same class backfill as specified for adjacent trench unless otherwise shown or specified. B. Granular Fill: 1. Place in areas beneath pavement or gravel surfaces. 2. Place in lifts not exceeding thickness of 9 inches. 1 3. Mechanically compact each lift to a minimum of 95 percent relative compaction prior to placing succeeding lifts. C. Earthfill: 1. Place in landscape areas outside of pavements or gravel surfacing. ' 2. Backfill trench above pipe zone with earthfill to a depth of 12 inches below original ground surface. 3. Fill remainder of trench with topsoil over entire trench width. D. Controlled Low Strength Fill: 1. Discharge from truck mounted drum type mixer into trench. 2. Place in lifts as necessary to prevent uplift (flotation) of new and existing facilities. 3. In traveled areas fill entire trench section to pavement finish grade for a temporary driving surface, and screed off excess and finish with a float. 4. In other areas fill the trench section as shown. CVO/391538A TRENCH BACKFILL JUNE 2010 02320 - 7 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 3.08 REPLACEMENT OF TOPSOIL A. Replace topsoil in top 12 inches of backfilled trench. ' B. Maintain the finished grade of topsoil even with adjacent area and grade as necessary to restore drainage. ' 3.09 MAINTENANCE OF TRENCH BACKFILL A. After each section of trench is backfilled, maintain the surface of the backfilled trench even with the adjacent ground surface until final surface restoration is completed. ' B. Gravel Surfacing Rock: Add gravel surfacing rock where applicable and as necessary to keep the surface of the backfilled trench even with the adjacent ' ground surface, and grade and compact as necessary to keep the surface of backfilled trenches smooth, free from ruts and potholes, and suitable for normal traffic flow. ' C. Topsoil: Add topsoil where applicable and as necessary to maintain the surface of the backfilled trench level with the adjacent ground surface. ' D. Concrete Pavement: Replace settled slabs as specified in Section 02772, Asphalt Paving. E. Asphaltic Pavement: Replace settled areas or fill with asphalt as specified in Section 02772, Asphalt Paving. ' F. Other Areas: Add excavated material where applicable and keep the surface of the backfilled trench level with the adjacent ground surface. , 3.10 SETTLEMENT OF BACKFILL A. Settlement of trench backfill, or of fill, or facilities constructed over trench ' backfill will be considered a result of defective compaction of trench backfill. END OF SECTION ' 1 1 TRENCH BACKFILL CVO/391538A 02320 - 8 JUNE 2010 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 SECTION 02370 SOIL STABILIZATION PART 1 GENERAL ' 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall provide erosion control barriers, complete and in place, in accordance with the Contract Documents, the 1200 -C permit requirements, and Chapter 6 of Clean Water Services' Design and Construction Standards ' (June 2007). B. The Contractor shall provide erosion protection including fertilizing, seeding, ' and mulching for all disturbed areas, including stockpiled berms in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.02 CONTRACT DOCUMENT SUBMITTALS A. At the Preconstruction Conference, the Contractor shall submit a completed ' 1200 -C Name Change and Permit Transfer Application to DEQ Northwest Region, 2020 S.W. 4th Avenue, Suite 400, Portland, Oregon 97201 -4987. B. Upon completion of all excavation, backfill, structural fill, site improvements, drainage, and landscaping work, the Contractor shall submit Notice of Termination Application for NPDES General Permit to Discharge Storm ' Water Associated with Construction Activity to DEQ Northwest Region, 2020 S.W. 4th Avenue, Suite 400, Portland, Oregon 97201 -4987. ' C. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01330, Submittal Procedures. PART 2 PRODUCTS ' 2.01 FERTILIZER ' A. Fertilizer shall be 39 — 0 — 0 (with 5 to 8 percent sulfur). 2.02 SEED ' A. Provide the following seed mixture for all disturbed areas except in areas designated Agricultural Lands on the Drawings, or areas otherwise noted on • the Drawings or in the Specifications for restoration. Kind of Seed Weight Percentage ' Elka Dwarf Perennial Rye Grass 70% Creeping Red Fescue 20% CVO/391538A SOIL STABILIZATION JUNE 2010 02370 - 1 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 1 Kind of Seed Weight Percentage Kentucky Blue Grass 10% ' B. General: ' 1. Seeds shall be labeled in accordance with USDA Rules and Regulations under the Federal Seed Act. 2. Seed that is wet or moldy or has been damaged in transit will not be accepted. 2.03 MULCH ' A. Straw Mulch: Provide air -dry, clean, mildew- and seed -free, clean "fieldstraw" from Deschampsia caespitosa. ' B. Fiber Mulch: Biodegradable, dyed -wood, cellulose -fiber mulch; nontoxic; free of plant - growth or germination inhibitors; with maximum moisture content of 15 percent and a pH range of 4.5 to 6.5. C. Special Seeding and Mulching Equipment: Hydraulic equipment used for the application of fertilizer, seed and slurry of prepared wood - cellulose fiber shall have a built -in agitation system with an operating capacity sufficient to agitate, suspend and homogeneously mix the slurry specified. The slurry distribution lines shall be large enough to prevent stoppage.. The discharge line shall be equipped with a set of spray nozzles that will provide even distribution of the slurry on the various slopes. 2.04 EROSION CONTROL MATTING A. Excelsior mat or straw blanket staples as recommended by matting manufacturer. B. Manufacturer and Product: North American Green, Evansville, IN; SC150BN • blanket. 2.05 REINFORCED PLASTIC COVERING A. Physical Requirement (Minimum Average Roll Values): ' 1. Tear Strength: 130 pounds. 2. Elongation: 620 percent. 3. Minimum Thickness: 6 -mil. I 1 SOIL STABILIZATION CVO/391538A 02370 - 2 JUNE 2010 I DURHAM PHASE 5B1 B. Manufacturers: — - 1 1. Reed Industries, Inc., Houston, TX. 2. Griffolyn Co., Houston, TX. 1 2.06 SOIL TACKIFIER A. Soil tackifier shall be Cliffhanger Tack (Quattro Environmental, Inc.), I EcoFibre & Tac (Canfor), or approved equal. 2.07 SEDIMENT FENCE I A. Support Posts: As recommended by manufacturer of geotextile. ' B. Fasteners: Heavy -duty wire staples at least 1 -inch long, tie wires, or hog rings, as recommended by manufacturer of geotextile. C. Filter Fabric: Polyester, polypropylene, or nylon filaments, woven into a uniform pattern, distinct and measurable openings. I 1. Filaments: Resistant to damage from exposure to ultraviolet rays and heat. 111 2. Material Edges: Finish so that filaments retain their relative positions under stress. D. In accordance with requirement of Table No. 1: I Table No. 1 Filter Fabric I Physical Property Required Value Test Method I Weight, lbs /sq yd, min. 4 ASTM D3776 Equivalent Opening Size, 50 -70 U.S. Standard Sieve max. I Grab Tensile Strength, lb, 160 ASTM D4632 min. ARV I Elongation; % max. 25 ASTM D1682 Mullen Burst Strength, psi, 200 ASTM D3786 I min. ARV Ultraviolet Radiation 70 ASTM D4355 Resistance, % Strength Retention CVO/391538A SOIL STABILIZATION I JUNE 2010 02370 - 3 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 1 Table No. 1 Filter Fabric ' Physical Property Required Value Test Method Flow Rate, gpm/sf, min, 30 to 50 ASTM D4491 I ARV E. Manufacturers: 1. Polyfelt, Evergreen, AL. 2. Dupont Co., Wilmington, DE. , 3. Mirafi, Inc., Charlotte, NC. 2.08 DUST CONTROLLER ' A. Nontoxic materials that do not have an adverse effect on soil structure or establishment and growth of vegetation. ' 2.09 CONSTRUCTION FENCE A. Ultraviolet stabilized polyethylene or polypropylene safety fence, 3 feet in I height, and yellow or orange in color. 2.10 BIOFILTER BAGS A. Bags: Made of burlap, jute, geotextile or other pervious material capable of holding contents while allowing water to pass through bag. Bags shall have minimum dimensions of 2 feet long by 1 foot high by 1 foot wide. B. Contents: Wood chips, bark, straw or other approved material. 1 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 APPLICATION A. Erosion control measures are required during all construction and site , disturbance activity and shall remain and be maintained until permanent site ground covers are in place. B. The implementation of the erosion control plan and the construction maintenance, replacement, and upgrading the erosion control devices are the responsibility of the Contractor until all construction is completed. During the construction period, the erosion control devices shall be upgraded for unexpected storm events and to ensure that sediment and sediment -laden water do not leave the site. 1 SOIL STABILIZATION CVO/391538A 02370 - 4 JUNE 2010 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 C. Maintain existing buffer zones adjacent to project limits. Keep all- construction g adjacent p J p equipment, debris, and soils out of the natural buffer zone. 3.02 CONSTRUCTION ENTRANCE A. Provide graveled construction accesses at locations shown on the Drawings. • B. Construction entrance shall comply with CWS Standard Drawing No. 855. ' C. Contractor shall maintain construction entrance to ensure proper function. 3.03 SOIL PREPARATION A. Areas to be seeded shall be graded and prepared for placement of topsoil. t Native topsoil shall be salvaged and stockpiled, and shall be placed on areas to be restored. Prior to placement of topsoil all debris and trash shall be removed from areas to be seeded. 1 3.04 SEEDING ' A. Verify that grading and soil preparation has been completely corrected. B. Apply by hydroseeding method with approved hydraulic seeding equipment on moist soil, but only after free surface water has drained away. Seed shall be distributed uniformly over designated areas. Half of seed shall be sown in one direction, and the remainder with sower moving at right angles to first sowing. Prevent drift and displacement of mixture into other areas. On slopes steeper than 10 percent, hydroseed and mulch shall be applied with a bonding agent (tacktifier). ' C. Application: Prepare and apply slurry as follows: ' 1. Seed Mix: 90 pounds per acre. 2. Fertilizer: 100 pounds per acre. 3. Wood Cellulose Fiber Mulch: 2,000 pounds per acre. ' 4. Water: As necessary. D. Satisfactory Seeded Areas: Unless otherwise specified all seeded areas shall at end of maintenance period, exhibit a healthy, uniform, close stand of the specified seed mix, free of weeds and surface irregularities, with coverage of mix in specified proportions. ' E. Reestablish seeded areas that do not comply with requirements and continue maintenance until seeded areas are satisfactory. 1 CVO/391538A SOIL STABILIZATION JUNE2010 02370 -5 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 ' MULCHING 3.05 A. Apply uniformly on disturbed areas that will remain undisturbed for 7 days or more, as requested by Engineer, and on all seeded areas with a slope steeper than 5 percent. Do not apply mulch on seeded areas that will be immediately covered with erosion control matting. B. Application: Sufficiently loose to permit penetration of sunlight and air circulation, and sufficiently dense to shade ground, reduce evaporation rate, and prevent or materially reduce erosion or underlying soil. 1. Wood Cellulose Fiber Mulch: 2,000 pounds per acre. , 3.06 EROSION CONTROL MATTING A. Place on Seeded Slopes: 4H:1 V and steeper; on ground surfaces and stock ' piles exposed during wet weather season (October 15 though April 30); and as a temporary measure to provide erosion protection and assist in germination ' on areas seeded between October 15 through April 30. B. Apply seed and fertilizer prior to matting. • 3.07 SOIL TACKIFIER A. Apply on areas mulched. B. Spray on after mulch is in place. I C. The soil tackifier shall be applied at the rate per acre specified by manufacturer for applicable grades. ' 3.08 REINFORCED PLASTIC COVERING A. Place on areas where hydroseeding and erosion control matting have not i controlled erosion, and over all temporary stockpiles. B. Install per CWS Standard Drawing No. 810. t 3.09 SEDIMENT FENCE A. Install prior to starting earth disturbing activities. B. One -piece filter fabric or continuously sewn to make one -piece filter fabric for 1 full height of fence, including portion buried in the toe trench. C. Remove silt fence after area has been permanently stabilized. 1' D. Sediment fence shall comply with CWS Standard Drawing No. 875. SOIL STABILIZATION CVO/391538A 02370 -6 JUNE2010 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 3.10 TEMPORARY SOIL STOCKPILES A. Cover temporary soil stock pile as required to prevent erosion per CWS Standard Drawing No. 810. I 3.11 DUST CONTROL A. Apply appropriate dust control measures on a continuous basis until permanent stabilization measures are in place. B. Apply on construction routes and other disturbed areas subject to surface dust movement and where offsite damage may occur if dust is not controlled. C. Avoid creating erosion when using water as a dust controller. 3.12 TEMPORARY CATCH BASIN PROTECTION A. Install biofilter bags at all catch basins shown on the Drawings. END OF SECTION 1. 1 CVO/391538A SOIL STABILIZATION JUNE 2010 02370 - 7 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 SECTION 02533 MANHOLES ' PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Shop Drawings: ' a. Cast -in -Place Manholes: Details of construction. b. Precast Manholes: Details of construction. c. Precast Base, Cones, and Top Slab Sections: Details of construction. d. Manholes Over Existing Piping: Plans and schedule for diverting flow. B. Informational Submittals: ' 1. Proposed curing method for cast -in -place concrete structures. 2. Precast Manhole Sections: Manufacturer's results of tests performed on 1 representative sections to be furnished. 3. Certified load test data for precast manhole steps. 4. Plan for diversion of flow during installation of manhole over existing piping. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PRECAST MANHOLES A. Riser Sections: ' 1. Minimum 48 inches in diameter. 2. Fabricate in accordance with ASTM C478. ' 3. Minimum Wall Thickness: 4 inches or 1/12 times inside diameter, whichever is greater. 4. Top and bottom shall be parallel. 5. Joints: Confined 0-ring with rubber gaskets meeting ASTM C443. B. Cone Sections: ' 1. Provide eccentric cones. 2. Same wall thickness and reinforcement as riser section. 3. Top and bottom shall be parallel. C. Flat Top Sections: As shown on Drawings. CVO /391538A MANHOLES JUNE 2010 02533 - 1 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 D. Base Sections and Base Slab: 1. Base Sections: Base slab integral with sidewalls. 2. Fabricate in accordance with ASTM C478. E. Manhole Extensions: 1. Concrete grade rings; maximum 6 inches high. 2. Fabricate in accordance with ASTM C478. F. Preformed Plastic Gaskets: Hamilton Kent of Nevada, Sparks, NV; Kent -Seal No. 2. G. Source Quality Control: 1. All test specimens shall be mat tested and meet permeability test requirements of ASTM C14. 2. Conduct tests at point of manufacture prior to delivery of any section. 1 3. Sections to be tested will be selected at random from stockpiled material to be supplied for the Project. 2.02 CAST -IN -PLACE MANHOLES A. Reinforcing Steel: Furnish as specified in Section 03210, Reinforcing Steel. B. Concrete: Furnish as specified in Section 03300, Cast -in -Place Concrete. 2.03 MANHOLE FRAMES AND COVER ' A. Castings: ' 1. Tough, close - grained gray iron, sound, smooth, clean, free from blisters, blowholes, shrinkage, cold shuts, and defects. 2. Cast Iron: ASTM A48 Class 30B. 3. Ductile Iron: ASTM A536, Grade 60- 40 -12. 4. Plane or grind bearing surfaces to ensure flat, true surfaces. ' B. Cover: True and seat within ring at all points with the word SEWER or DRAIN in 2 -inch raised letters. 2.04 MORTAR A. Standard premixed in accordance with ASTM C387, or proportion one part ' portland cement to two parts clean, well - graded sand that will pass a 1/8 -inch screen. 1 MANHOLES CVO/391538A 02533 - 2 JUNE 2010 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 B. Admixtures: May be included but do not exceed the following of I weight of cement: 1. Hydrated Lime: 10 percent. 2. Diatomaceous Earth or Other Inert Material: 5 percent. C. Mix Consistency: 1. Tongue- and - Groove Type Joint: Such that mortar will readily adhere to pipe. 2. Confined Groove (Keylock) Joint: Such that excess mortar will be forced out of groove and support is not provided for section being placed. ' 2.05 CLEANOUT FRAMES AND COVERS A. Castings: 1. Tough, close - grained gray iron, sound, smooth, clean, free from blisters, blowholes, shrinkage, cold shuts, and defects. ' 2. Cast Iron: ASTM A48, Class 30B. 3. Ductile Iron: ASTM A536, Grade 65- 40 -12. 011 4. Plane or grind bearing surfaces to ensure flat, true surfaces. B. Covers: True and seat within frame at all points. 2.06 IMPORTED PIPE BASE A. Furnish as specified in Section 02320, Trench Backfill. 2.07 MANHOLE PIPING ' A. Drop Assembly: 1. Extend pipe from the drop to a minimum of 3 feet beyond the manhole ' excavation into the trench, and connect to sewer pipe with an adapter. 2. Support lower drop elbow with concrete monolithically placed with manhole base. 2.08 FLEXIBLE JOINTS A. Manufacturers: 1. "Kor -N -Seal" flexible rubber boot with stainless steel accessories as ' manufactured by NPC, Inc., Milford, New Hampshire. 2. "Z -LOK XP" or "A -LOK" flexible connectors as manufactured by A -LOK Products, Inc., Tullytown, PA. CVO /391538A MANHOLES JUNE 2010 02533 - 3 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL ' A. Remove and keep all water clear from the excavation during construction and testing operations. ' B. Place imported pipe base material on undisturbed earth; thoroughly compact with a mechanical vibrating or power tamper. ' 3.02 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL A. Excavation: As specified in Section 02315, Excavation. B. Backfill: As specified in Section 02320, Trench Backfill. ' 3.03 INSTALLATION OF PRECAST MANHOLES A. Concrete Base: 1. Cast -in- Place: a. Vibrate to densify concrete and screed so first precast manhole section to be placed has a level, uniform bearing for full circumference. b. Deposit sufficient mortar on base to assure watertight seal between base and manhole wall, or place first precast section of manhole in concrete base before concrete has set. Properly locate ' and plumb first section. 2. Precast: a. Place on compacted imported base material. I b. Properly locate, ensure firm bearing throughout, and plumb first section. B. Sections: 1. Carefully inspect precast manhole sections to be joined. 2. Thoroughly clean ends of sections to be joined. 3. Do not use sections with chips or cracks in the tongue. C. Rubber Gasketed Joints: Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. D. Extensions: 1. Provide on manholes in streets or other locations where a subsequent change in existing grade may be likely. 2. Install to height not exceeding 12 inches. MANHOLES CVO/391538A 02533 - 4 JUNE 2010 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 3. - - -Lay grade rings in mortar with sides- plumb- and - tops - level. ' 4. Seal joints with mortar as specified for sections, and make watertight. 3.04 MANHOLE INVERT A. Construct with smooth transitions to ensure an unobstructed flow through manhole. Remove sharp edges or rough sections that tend to obstruct flow. ' B. Where full section of pipe is laid through manhole, break out top section as shown and cover exposed edge of pipe completely with mortar. Trowel mortar ' surfaces smooth. 3.05 CAST -IN -PLACE MANHOLE A. Reinforcing Steel: Install as specified in Section 03210, Reinforcing Steel. B. Concrete: Install as specified in Section 03300, Cast -in -Place Concrete. 3.06 MANHOLE FRAMES AND COVERS ' A. Set frames in bed of mortar with mortar carried over flange as shown. B. Set tops of covers flush with surface of adjoining pavement or ground surface, unless otherwise shown or directed. 3.07 MANHOLE PIPING ' A. Flexible Joints: ' 1. Provide in pipe not more than 1 -1/2 feet from manhole walls. 2. Where last joint of pipe is between 1 -1/2 and 6 feet from manhole wall, provide flexible joint in manhole wall. 3.08 MANHOLES OVER EXISTING PIPING ' A. Maintain flow through existing pipelines at all times. B. Plastic Pipe: ' 1. Use solvent recommended by pipe manufacturer to slightly soften the pipe wall. 2. Apply a dense coating of clean mortar sand over all areas that will be in contact with concrete. 3. Allow mortar to dry completely prior to placing concrete. C. Concrete Pipe: Apply a bonding agent on all surfaces to be in contact with concrete. CVO /391538A MANHOLES JUNE 2010 02533 - 5 • DURHAM PHASE 5B 1 I D. Construct base under existing piping. E. Construct manhole as specified. ' F. Break out existing pipe within new manhole, cover edges with mortar, and trowel smooth. G. Protect new concrete and mortar work for 7 days after placing concrete. 3.09 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Hydrostatic Testing: ' 1. When, in Engineer's opinion, groundwater table is too low to permit - visual detection of infiltration leaks, hydrostatically test all manholes. ' 2. Procedure: Plug inlets and outlets and fill manhole with water to height determined by Engineer. 3. A manhole may be filled 24 hours prior to time of testing, if desired, to , permit normal absorption into the pipe walls to take place. 4. Leakage in each manhole shall not exceed 0.1 gallon per hour per foot of head above the invert. 5. Repair manholes that do not meet the leakage test, or do not meet specified requirements from visual inspection. END OF SECTION 1 1 1 I MANHOLES CVO/391538A 02533 - 6 JUNE 2010 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 SECTION 02631— ' CATCH BASINS PART 1 GENERAL (NOT USED) 111 PART 2 PRODUCTS ' 2.01 CONCRETE A. Concrete shall be ready- mixed, conforming to ASTM C94/C94M, Alternate 2. ' Compressive field strength shall be not less than 2,500 psi at 28 days. Maximum size of aggregate shall be 1 -1/2 inch. Slump shall be between 2 and 4 inches. Field strength shall be assumed as equal to 85 percent of strength of ' laboratory -cured cylinders. 2.02 FORMS ' A. Exposed surfaces shall be plywood. Others shall be steel, matched boards, plywood, or other acceptable material. Form vertical surfaces. Provide fillets on re- entrant angles. Trench walls, large rock, or earth will not be acceptable form material. 2.03 REINFORCING STEEL A. Reinforcing steel shall conform to ASTM A615/A615M, Grade 60, deformed ' bars. 2.04 PRECAST UNITS A. At the.option of Contractor, approved precast units may be substituted for cast -in -place units. Precast units shall conform to ASTM C478. Submit details of proposed units to Engineer for review. Concrete risers for extensions shall be a maximum of 6 inches high and of same quality as sections. Risers shall be reviewed by Engineer before installation. 2.05 MORTAR A. Standard premixed mortar conforming to ASTM C387, Type S, or proportion 1 part portland cement to 2 parts clean, well - graded sand which will pass a 1/8 -inch screen. Admixtures may be used not exceeding the following percentages of weight of cement: Hydrated lime, 10 percent; diatomaceous earth or other inert materials, 5 percent. Consistency of mortar shall be such that it will readily adhere to concrete. • CVO/391538A CATCH BASINS JUNE 2010 02631 - 1 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 2.06 FRAMES AND GRATINGS A. Cast iron frames and gratings for catch basins and storm drain inlets shall be , as indicated. Bearing surfaces shall be clean and shall provide uniform contact. Castings shall be tough, close - grained gray iron, sound, smooth, clean, free from blisters, blowholes, shrinkage, cold shuts, and defects, and shall conform to ASTM A48, Class 30. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL A. Excavate as required to accomplish construction. Backfill shall be as specified for adjoining pipe trench. 3.02 CONSTRUCTION OF CATCH BASINS AND INLETS A. Construct inlets and catch basins at locations shown and in accordance with , Drawings. Construct forms to dimensions and elevations required. Forms shall be tight and well braced. Chamfer corners of forms. B. Prior to placing concrete, remove water and debris from forms. Moisten forms just prior to placing concrete. Handle concrete from transporting vehicle to forms in a continuous manner as rapidly as practical without segregation or loss of ingredients. Immediately after placing, compact concrete with mechanical vibrator. Limit duration of vibration to time necessary to produce satisfactory consolidation without causing segregation. C. Screed top surface of exposed slabs and walls. When initial water has been absorbed, float surfaces with wood float and lightly trowel with steel trowel to smooth finish free from marks or irregularities. Finish exposed edges with steel edging tool. Remove forms and patch defects in concrete with mortar mixed in same proportions as original concrete mix. D. Cure concrete by preventing loss of moisture for a period of 7 days. Accomplish with a membrane - forming curing compound. Apply curing compound immediately after removal of forms or finishing of slabs. Protect concrete from damage during 7 -day curing period. ' 3.03 PLACING PRECAST UNITS A. If material in bottom of trench is unsuitable for supporting unit, excavate and ' backfill to required grade with 3 -inch minus, clean, pit -run material. Set units to grade at locations shown. CATCH BASINS CVO/391538A 02631 - 2 JUNE 2010 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 3.04- EXTENSIONS — ' A. Install extensions to height required to achieve finish grade. Lay risers in mortar with sides plumb and tops to grade. Joints shall be sealed with mortar, with interior and exterior troweled smooth. Prevent mortar from drying out and cure by applying a curing compound. Extensions shall be watertight. ' 3.05 INSTALLATION OF FRAMES AND GRATES A. Set frames and grates at elevations indicated or as determined in field and in ' conformance with Drawings. B. Frames may be cast in, or shall be set in mortar. ' 3.06 CLEANING A. Upon completion, clean each structure of all silt, debris, and foreign matter. ' END OF SECTION 1 1 1 f 1 CVO/391538A CATCH BASINS JUNE 2010 02631 - 3 DURHAM U M PHASE 5B1 SECTION STORM DRAIN, SANITARY SEWER, AND DRAINAGE PIPING ' PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUBMITTALS A. Informational Submittals: Manufacturer's Certification of Compliance. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPE AND FITTINGS ' A. As specified in the Data Sheets following "End of Section." PART 3 EXECUTION ' 3.01 INSTALLATION OF PIPE, FITTINGS, AND APPURTENANCES A. General: 1. Pipe laying shall proceed upgrade with spigot ends pointing in direction of flow. 2. Excavate bell holes at each joint to permit correct assembly and inspection of entire joint. ' 3. Pipe invert may deviate from line or grade up to 1/2 inch for line and 1/4 inch for grade, provided that finished pipe line will present a uniform bore, and such variation does not result in a level or reverse ' sloping invert, or less than minimum slope shown. 4. Pipe bedding shall form continuous and uniform bearing and support for pipe barrel between joints. Pipe shall not rest directly on bell or pipe joint. 5. Prevent entry of foreign material into gasketed joints. 6. Plug or close off pipes that are stubbed off for manhole, concrete structure, or for connection by others, with temporary watertight plugs. 3.02 SEWER CLEANING A. Prior to final acceptance and final manhole -to- manhole inspection of the sewer system by Engineer, flush and clean all parts of the system. Remove all accumulated construction debris, rocks, gravel, sand, silt, and other foreign material from the sewer system at or near the closest downstream manhole. If necessary, use mechanical rodding or bucketing equipment. ' CVO/391538A STORM DRAIN, SANITARY SEWER, JUNE 2010 AND DRAINAGE PIPING ' 02632 - 1 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 i B. Upon Engineer's final manhole -to- manhole inspection of the sewer system, if any foreign matter is still present in the system, reflush and clean the sections and portions of the lines as required. 3.03 SUPPLEMENTS A. Data Sheets. Number Title 02632 -03 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) 02632 -05 Reinforced Concrete END OF SECTION • i 1 1 1 1 1 1 STORM DRAIN, SANITARY SEWER, CVO/391538A ' AND DRAINAGE PIPING JUNE 2010 02632 - 2 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 I ' SECTION 02632 -03 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) Item Description Pipe: 15 -inch diameter ASTM D3034: Standard dimension ratio less than 35, except ' and under that the cell classification shall be 12454 -B or 12454 -C as defined in ASTM D1784. ' Pipe: 18- through 24 -inch diameter ASTM F679: Standard dimension ratio less than 35, except that the cell classification shall be 12454 -C as defined in ASTM D1784. ' Ribbed Profile Pipe: 18- ASTM F794: Minimum stiffness of 46 psi when tested in through 36 -inch accordance with ASTM D2412, except that the cell diameter classification shall be 12454 -C as defined in ASTM D1784. 1 Joints ASTM D3212 rubber gasketed. Gaskets ASTM F477. ' Lubricants: As approved by manufacturer. Fittings PVC, gasketed. Provide plug when service piping is not required. Plugs Removable. Removal shall provide a socket suitable for making a flexible jointed lateral connection or extension. Source Quality Control In accordance with specified ASTM. Testing t END OF SECTION 1 . 1 CVO/391538A POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) JUNE 2010 02632 -03 DATA SHEET - 1 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 SECTION 02632 -05 REINFORCED CONCRETE Item Description ' Pipe ASTM C76, Wall B, Class III. Mark each joint with pipe class. Rotating packer or platform not allowed. ' Cement ASTM C150, Type II, or ASTM C150, Type I, with fly ash; maximum 12 percent Tricalcium Aluminate, or ASTM C595 Rev A, Type IP, with fly ash; Cement: ASTM C150. Minimum 564 pounds per cubic yard without fly ash. - Minimum 479 pounds per cubic yard with fly ash. ' Ratio: Water to Not over 0.49. Cementitious • Materials Fly Ash ASTM C618, Class C or Class F, Tables 1 and 2 modified as follows: Loss on Ignition: Maximum 3 percent Water Requirement: Maximum 100 percent of control Ratio Percent CaO /Fe203: Maximum 1.5 or test cement fly ash mix in accordance with ASTM C1012. Mix: Equal to or better than ASTM C150, Type II cement. ' 85 pounds per cubic yard minimum, 160 pounds per cubic yard maximum. Test: ASTM C311 and ASTM C618. Joints ASTM C443 Rev A. Captive gasket in groove. Rubber Gaskets ASTM C443. Tee Fittings Reinforced concrete, rubber gasketed. Provide plug when service piping is not required. ' Plugs Removable. Removal shall provide a socket suitable for making a flexible jointed lateral connection or extension. Circumferential Not closer than 1 inch to inside surface of pipe. Area of outer Reinforcement circular reinforcing cage not less than 75 percent of inner cage. Elliptical Not allowed. Reinforcement CVO /391538A REINFORCED CONCRETE JUNE 2010 02632 -05 DATA SHEET - 1 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 SECTION 02632 -05 REINFORCED CONCRETE ' Item Description Source Quality Load Bearing 0.01 -inch Crack, Compressive Strength and Control Testing Absorption: ASTM C76. Load Bearing Ultimate: ASTM C76. , Permeability: ASTM C497. Voids: Longitudinally sawcut one pipe from each 100 lengths of pipe manufactured in half with saw that will not damage the concrete or reinforcing steel. Inspect for voids adjacent to circumferential bars. Voids will be considered continuous if a 1/16 -inch diameter pin can be inserted 1/4 inch deep. If voids exist adjacent to more than 10 percent of the circumferential bars, two additional pipes shall be tested. If either of the two pipes fail, the entire 100 lengths will be rejected. END OF SECTION 1 1 1 1 1 1 REINFORCED CONCRETE CVO/391538A 02632 -05 DATA SHEET - 2 JUNE 2010 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 SECTION- 0271-0- ' AGGREGATE BASE COURSES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DEFINITIONS ' A. Completed Course: Compacted, unyielding, free from irregularities, with smooth, tight, even surface, true to grade, line, and cross - section. B. Completed Lift: Compacted with uniform cross - section thickness. C. Standard Specifications: When referenced in this section, shall mean the Oregon Standard Specifications for. Construction, 2008. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Informational Submittals: 1. Certified Test Results on Source Materials: Submit copies from commercial testing laboratory 20 days prior to delivery of materials to Project showing materials meeting the physical qualities specified. 2. Certified results of in -place density tests from independent testing agency. ' PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 BASE COURSE A. As specified for 3/4 -inch maximum base aggregate in Sections 02630 and 00641, of the Standard Specifications. ' 2.02 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests necessary to locate acceptable source of materials meeting specified requirements. B. Final approval of aggregate material will be based on test results of installed materials. C. Should separation of coarse from fine materials occur during processing or stockpiling, immediately change methods of handling materials to correct uniformity in grading. • 1 CVO/391538A AGGREGATE BASE COURSES JUNE 2010 02710 - 1 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 PART 3 EXECUTION 1 3.01 SUBGRADE PREPARATION , A. As specified in Section 02319, Subgrade Preparation. B. Obtain Engineer's acceptance of subgrade before placing base course or surfacing material. C. Do not place base course or surfacing materials in snow or on soft, muddy, or frozen subgrade. 3.02 EQUIPMENT A. Compaction Equipment: Adequate in design and number to provide compaction and to obtain specified density for each layer. 3.03 HAULING AND SPREADING ' A. Hauling Materials: 1. Do not haul over surfacing in process of construction. 1 2. Loads: Of uniform capacity. 3. Maintain consistent gradation of material delivered; loads of widely varying gradations will be cause for rejection. B. Spreading Materials: • 1. Distribute material to provide required density, depth, grade, and dimensions with allowance for subsequent lifts. 2. Produce even distribution of material upon roadway or prepared surface without segregation. 3. Should segregation of coarse from fine materials occur during placing, immediately change methods of handling materials to correct uniformity in grading. 3.04 CONSTRUCTION OF COURSES , A. Untreated Aggregate Base Course: 1. Maximum Completed Lift Thickness: 6 inches. 2. Completed Course Total Thickness: As shown. 3. Spread lift on preceding course to required cross - section. 4. Lightly blade and roll surface until thoroughly compacted. 5. Add keystone to achieve compaction and as required when aggregate does not compact readily due to lack of fines or natural cementing properties, as follows: a. Use leveling course or surfacing material as keystone. AGGREGATE BASE COURSES CVO/391538A 02710 - 2 JUNE 2010 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 b:- Spread evenly -on- top- of-base- course,— using spreader- boxes -or -chip — - -- - ' spreaders. c. Roll surface until keystone is worked into interstices of base course without excessive displacement. ' d. Continue operation until course has become thoroughly keyed, compacted, and will not creep or move under roller. 6. Blade or broom surface to maintain true line, grade, and cross - section. 3.05 ROLLING AND COMPACTION ' A. Commence compaction of each layer of base after spreading operations and continue until density of 95 percent of maximum density has been achieved as determined by AASHTO T99. B. Roll each layer of material until material does not creep under roller before succeeding layer is applied. 1 C. Commence rolling at outer edges and continue toward center; do not roll center of road first. ' D. Apply water as needed to obtain specified densities. E. Place and compact each lift to required density before succeeding lift is placed. F. Surface Defects: Remedy by loosening and rerolling. Reroll entire area, ' including surrounding surface, until thoroughly compacted. G. Finished surface shall be true to grade and crown before proceeding with ' surfacing. 3.06 SURFACE TOLERANCES A. Blade or otherwise work surfacing as necessary to maintain grade and cross - section at all times, and to keep surface smooth and thoroughly compacted. ' B. Finished Surface of Untreated Aggregate Base Course: Within plus or minus 0.04 foot of grade shown at any individual point. C. Gravel Surfacing: Within 0.04 foot from lower edge of 10 -foot straightedge placed on finished surface, parallel to centerline. D. Overall Average: Within plus or minus 0.01 foot from crown and grade specified. 1 CVO/391538A AGGREGATE BASE COURSES JUNE2010 02710 -3 DURHAM PHASE 5B 1 1 3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. In -Place Density Tests: , 1. Provide testing laboratory at least 24 hours advance notification prior to testing. 2. Show proof that areas meet specified requirements before identifying density test locations. 3.08 CLEANING A. Remove excess material from the Work area. Clean stockpile and,staging areas of all excess aggregate. END OF SECTION • 1 1 1 1 i 1 I 1 1 AGGREGATE BASE COURSES CVO/391538A 02710 -4 JUNE2010 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 SECTION 02771 - ' CURBS, GUTTERS, AND SIDEWALKS PART 1 GENERAL ' 1.01 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Form Material: Information on metal forms, if used, including type, ' condition, surface finish, and intended function. 2. Complete data on concrete mix, including aggregate gradations and admixtures in accordance with requirements of ASTM C94. B. Informational Submittals: ' 1. Curing Compound: Manufacturer's Certificate of Compliance and application instructions. 2. Ready -mix delivery ticket for each truck in accordance with ASTM C94. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Conform to the State of Oregon Standard Specifications for Highway Construction. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Conform to the requirements of the referenced Standard Specification. 2.02 EXPANSION JOINT FILLER A. Preformed asphalt- impregnated, expansion joint material meeting ' ASTM D994, 1/2 -inch thick. 2.03 CONCRETE A. Ready -mixed meeting ASTM C94, Option A, with compressive strength of 3,000 psi at 28 days. ' B. Maximum Aggregate Size: 1 -1/2 inch. ' C. Slump: 2 inches to 4 inches. D. Concrete for curbs and curb and gutter shall be fiber reinforced. CVO/391538A CURBS, GUTTERS, AND SIDEWALKS JUNE 2010 02771 - 1 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 2.04 CURING COMPOUND 1 A. Liquid membrane forming, clear or translucent, suitable for spray application i and meeting ASTM C309, Type 1. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Perform Work in accordance with the referenced Standard Specification. 3.02 FORMWORK A. Lumber Materials: 1. 2 -inch dressed dimension lumber, or metal of equal strength, straight, free from defects that would impair appearance or structural quality of completed curb and sidewalk. 2. 1 -inch dressed lumber or plywood may be used where short- radius forms are required. B. Metals: Steel in new undamaged condition. C. Setting Forms: 1. Construct forms to shape, lines, grades, and dimensions. 2. Stake securely in place. D. Bracing: 1. Brace forms to prevent change of shape or movement resulting from 1 placement. 2. Construct short- radius curved forms to exact radius. E. Tolerances: 1. Do not vary tops of forms from gradeline more than 1/8 inch when ' checked with 10 -foot straightedge. 2. Do not vary alignment of straight sections more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet. 3.03 PLACING CONCRETE A. Prior to placing concrete, remove water from excavation and debris and foreign material from forms. B. Place concrete as soon as possible, and within 1 -1/2 hours after adding cement 1 to mix without segregation or loss of ingredients, and without splashing. 1 CURBS, GUTTERS, AND SIDEWALKS CVO/391538A 02771 - 2 JUNE 2010 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 C. Place, process, finish, and cure concrete in accordance with applicable ,P , pP requirements of ACI 304, and this section. Wherever requirements differ, the more stringent shall govern. ' D. To compact, vibrate until concrete becomes uniformly plastic. 3.04 CURB CONSTRUCTION A. Construct ramps at pedestrian crossings. B. Expansion Joints: Place at maximum 45 -foot intervals and at the beginning ' and end of curved portions of curb, and at connections to existing curbs. Install expansion joint filler at each joint. C. Curb Facing: Do not allow horizontal joints within 7 inches from top of curb. D. Contraction Joints: 1. Maximum 15 -foot intervals in curb. 2. Provide open joint type by inserting thin, oiled steel sheet vertically in ' fresh concrete to force coarse aggregate away from joint. 3. Insert steel sheet to full depth of curb. 4. Remove steel sheet with sawing motion after initial set has occurred in concrete and prior to removing front curb form. 5. Finish top of curb with steel trowel and finish edges with steel edging tool. E. Front Face: • 1. Remove front form and finish exposed surfaces when concrete has set sufficiently to support its own weight. 2. Finish formed face by rubbing with burlap sack or similar device to ' produce uniformly textured surface, free of form marks, honeycomb, and other defects. 3. Remove and replace defective concrete. ' 4. Apply curing compound to exposed surfaces of curb upon completion of finishing. 5. Continue curing for minimum of 5 days. F. Backfill curb with earth upon completion of curing period, but not before 7 days has elapsed since placing concrete. ' 1. Backfill shall be free from rocks 2 inches and larger and other foreign material. 1 2. Compact backfill firmly. CVO/391538A CURBS, GUTTERS, AND SIDEWALKS JUNE 2010 02771 - 3 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 3.05 SIDEWALK CONSTRUCTION A. Thickness: 4 inches in walk areas. B. Connection to Existing Sidewalk: 1. Remove old concrete back to an existing contraction joint. 2. Clean the surface. 3. Apply a neat cement paste immediately prior to placing new sidewalk. C. Expansion Joints: Place in adjacent curb, where sidewalk ends at curb, and around posts, poles, or other objects penetrating sidewalk. Install expansion joint filler at each joint. Align joints with expansion joints in curb. D. Contraction Joints: ' 1. Provide transversely to walks at locations opposite contraction joints in curb. I 2. Dimensions: 3/16 -inch by 1 -inch weakened plane joints. 3. Construct straight and at right angles to surface of walk. E. Finish: 1. Broom surface with fine -hair broom at right angles to length of walk and tool at edges, joints, and markings. 2. Mark walks transversely at 5 -foot intervals with jointing tool; finish edges with rounded steel edging tool. 3. Apply curing compound to exposed surfaces upon completion of finishing. 4. Protect sidewalk from damage and allow to cure for at least 7 days. ' END OF SECTION 1 1 CURBS, GUTTERS, AND SIDEWALKS CVO/391538A 02771 - 4 JUNE 2010 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 SECTION 02772 ASPHALT PAVING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DEFINITIONS ' A. Combined Aggregate: All mineral constituents of asphalt concrete mix, including mineral filler and separately sized aggregates. ' B. RAP: Reclaimed asphalt pavement. C. Standard Specifications: Oregon Standard Specifications for Construction, 2008. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Job -mix formula for pavements. ' B. Quality Control Submittals: 1. Manufacturer's Certificate of Compliance for the following materials: a. Aggregate: Gradation. b. Asphalt for Binder: Type and grade. c. Prime Coat: Type and grade of asphalt. ' d. Tack Coat: Type and grade of asphalt. e. Mixes: Conforms to job -mix formula. 2. Manufacturer's Certificate of Proper Installation. ' 3. Certification from independent testing agency. 4. Certified Test Results: a. Mix Design: ' 1) Aggregate gradation: 2) Asphalt content. 3) Stability number. ' b. Asphalt Concrete Cores: 1) Permeability. 2) Density. ' c. Uncompacted Mix: 1) Asphalt content. 2) Aggregate gradation. d. Asphalt cement for binder. I CVO/391538A ASPHALT PAVING JUNE 2010 02772 - 1 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: ' 1. Independent Testing Laboratory: In accordance with ASTM E329. 2. Asphalt concrete mix formula shall be prepared by approved certified independent laboratory under the supervision of a certified asphalt technician. 1.04 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Temperature: Do not apply asphalt materials or place asphalt mixes when ' ground temperature is lower than 10 degrees C (50 degrees F) or air temperature is lower than 4 degrees C (40 degrees F). Measure ground and air temperature in shaded areas away from heat sources or wet surfaces. ' B. Moisture: Do not apply asphalt materials or place asphalt mixes when application surface is wet. ' PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS ' A. Tack Coat: Emulsified asphalt, Grade CSS -1, CSS -lh conforming to AASHTO M208. 2.02 ASPHALT CONCRETE MIX ' A. Asphalt Concrete: Level 2, 3/4 -inch dense as specified in Sections 00744.12 and 00744.13 of the Standard Specifications. 1 B. Composition: Hot -plant mix of aggregate, mineral filler if required, and paving grade asphalt cement. The several aggregate fractions shall be sized, uniformly graded, and combined in such proportions that resulting mixture meets grading requirements of mix formula. C. Aggregate: , 1. General: As specified in Section 00744.10 of the Standard Specifications for hot plant mix bituminous pavement. D. Mineral Filler: In accordance with Section 00745 of the Standard Specifications. E. Asphalt Cement: Paving Grade 64 -22 or 70 -22, as specified in the Standard Specifications. ASPHALT PAVING CVO/391538A 02772 - 2 JUNE 2010 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 • PART 3 EXECUTION - - - - - 3.01 GENERAL A. Traffic Control: ' 1. In accordance with Section 01500, Temporary Facilities and Controls. 2. Minimize inconvenience to traffic, but keep vehicles off freshly treated or paved surfaces to avoid pickup and tracking of asphalt. 3.02 LINE AND GRADE ' A. Provide and maintain intermediate control of line and grade, independent of underlying base, to meet finish surface grades and minimum thickness. 3.03 APPLICATION EQUIPMENT A. In accordance with Sections 00745.20, 00745.21, 00745.22, 00745.23, and 00745.24 of the Standard Specifications. ' 3.04 PREPARATION A. Prepare subgrade as specified in Section 02319, Subgrade Preparation. B. Existing Roadway: ' 1. Modify profile by grinding, milling, or overlay methods as approved, to provide meet lines and surfaces and to produce smooth riding connection to existing facility. ' 2. Remove existing material to a minimum depth of 25 millimeters (1 inch). 3. Paint edges of meet line with tack coat prior to placing new pavement. C. Thoroughly coat edges of contact surfaces (curbs, manhole frames) with emulsified asphalt or asphalt cement prior to laying new pavement. Prevent ' staining of adjacent surfaces. 3.05 PAVEMENT APPLICATION A. General: Place asphalt concrete mixture on approved, prepared base in conformance with this section. ' B. Tack Coat: 1. Apply uniformly to clean, dry surfaces avoiding overlapping of ' applications. 2. Do not apply more tack coat than necessary for the day's paving operation. CVO/391538A ASPHALT PAVING JUNE 2010 02772 - 3 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 3. Touch up missed or lightly coated surfaces and remove excess material. 4. Application Rate: Minimum 0.25 liter to maximum 0.70 liter of asphalt (residual if diluted emulsified asphalt) per square meter (0.05 to 0.15 gallon per square yard) of surface area. C. Pavement Mix: ' 1. Prior to Paving: a. Sweep primed surface free of dirt, dust, or other foreign matter. b. Patch holes in primed surface with asphalt concrete pavement mix. c. Blot excess prime material with sand. 2. Place asphalt concrete pavement mix in two equal lifts. 3. Total Compacted Thickness: As shown. 4. Apply such that meet lines are straight and edges are vertical. 5. Collect and dispose of segregated aggregate from raking process. Do not scatter material over finished surface. 6. Joints: a. Offset edge of each layer a minimum of 150 millimeters (6 inches) so joints are not directly over those in underlying layer. b. Offset longitudinal joints in roadway pavements so longitudinal joints in wearing layer coincide with pavement centerlines and lane divider lines. c. Form transverse joints by cutting back on previous day's run to expose full vertical depth of layer. 7. Succeeding Lifts: Apply tack coat to pavement surface between each lift. 8. After placement of pavement, seal meet line by painting a minimum of 150 millimeters (6 inches) on each side of joint with cut -back or emulsified asphalt. Cover immediately with sand. D. Compaction: Roll until roller marks are eliminated and density of 92 percent of measured maximum density determined in accordance with ASTM D2041 is obtained. E. Tolerances: ' 1. General: Conduct measurements for conformity with crown and grade immediately after initial compression. Correct variations immediately by removal or addition of materials and by continuous rolling. 2. Completed Surface or Wearing Layer Smoothness: a. Uniform texture, smooth, and uniform to crown and grade. b. Maximum Deviation: 3 millimeters (1/8 inch) from lower edge of a 3.6 -meter (12 -foot) straightedge, measured continuously parallel and at right angle to centerline. ASPHALT PAVING CVO/391538A 02772 - 4 JUNE 2010 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 c. If surface of completed pavement deviates-by more than twice p y e ' specified tolerances, remove and replace wearing surface. 3. Transverse Slope Maximum Deviation: 6 millimeters (1/4 inch) in 3.6 meters (12 feet) from rate of slope shown. ' 4. Finished Grade: a. Perform field differential level survey on maximum 15 -meter (50 -foot) meter grid and along grade breaks. b. Maximum Deviation: 6 millimeters (0.02 foot) from grade shown. 3.06 PATCHING A. Preparation: 1. Remove damaged, broken, or unsound asphalt concrete adjacent to ' patches. Trim to straight lines exposing smooth, sound, vertical edges. 2. Prepare patch subgrade as specified in Section 02319, Subgrade ' Preparation. B. Application: 1. Patch Thickness: 75 millimeters (3 inches) or thickness of adjacent asphalt concrete, whichever is greater. 2. Place asphalt concrete mix across full width of patch in layers of equal thickness. 3. Spread and grade asphalt concrete with hand tools or mechanical spreader, depending on size of area to be patched. C. Compaction: 1 1. Roll patches with power rollers capable of providing compression of 350 to 525 Newtons per linear centimeter (200 to 300 pounds per linear inch). Use hand tampers where rolling is impractical. 2. Begin rolling top course at edges of patches, lapping adjacent asphalt surface at least 1/2 the roller width. Progress toward center of patch overlapping each preceding track by at least 1/2 width of roller. ' 3. Make sufficient passes over entire area to remove roller marks and to produce desired finished surface. ' D. Tolerances: 1. Finished surface shall be flush with and match grade, slope, and crown ' of adjacent surface. 2. Tolerance: Surface smoothness shall not deviate more than plus 6 millimeters (1/4 inch) or minus 0 millimeter when straightedge is laid across patched area between edges of new pavement and surface of old surfacing. CVO/391538A ASPHALT PAVING JUNE 2010 . 02772 - 5 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. General: Owner will provide services of approved certified independent ' testing laboratory to conduct tests. B. Field Density Tests: Measure with properly operating and calibrated nuclear 1 density gauge in accordance with ASTM D2950. END OF SECTION ' 1 1 1 1 1 ASPHALT PAVING CVO/391538A 02772 - 6 JUNE 2010 DURHAM PHASE 5B 1 SECTION 02821 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES ' PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DEFINITIONS ' A. Terms as defined in ASTM F552. 1.02 SUBMITTALS ' A. Action Submittals: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components, and fmishes for chain link fences and gates. 1) Fence, gate posts, rails, and fittings. 2) Chain link fabric. 3) Gates and hardware. 4) Gate operators, motors, and mounting arrangements, switches, and controls; include operating instructions. 5) Gate access system, including access control features, power and control wiring diagrams, and operating instructions. ' B. Informational Submittals: ' 1. Manufacturer's recommended installation instructions. 2. Evidence of Supplier and installer qualifications. C. Technical Operation and Maintenance Information: 1. Operation and Maintenance Data: As specified in Section 01782, Operation and Maintenance Data. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE ' A. Qualifications: 1 1. Automatic Gate Operator System Supplier: 5 years' experience in gate operator systems. 2. Automatic Gate Operator System Installer: Experienced installer who ' has completed chain link fences and gates similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for Project and whose work has resulted CVO/391538A CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES JUNE 2010 02821 - 1 DURHAM ' PHASE 5B1 1 with a record of successful in- service performance with a minimum 3 years' experience. B. Design, supply of equipment and components, installation, and on -call service shall be product of individual company with record of installations meeting requirements specified. C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at project Site with gate installer to verify layout and operations of automatic gate operating system. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING ' A. Deliver materials to Site in undamaged condition. Store materials off the ground to provide protection against oxidation caused by ground contact. ' 1.05 SCHEDULING AND SEQUENCING A. Complete necessary Site preparation and grading before installing chain link 1 fence and gates. B. Interruption of Existing Utility Service: Notify owner of utility 72 hours prior ' to interruption of utility services. Do not proceed with interruption of utility service without written permission from utility owner. 1.06 SPECIAL GUARANTEE A. Provide manufacturer's extended guarantee or warranty, with Owner named , as beneficiary, in writing, as special guarantee. Special guarantee shall provide for correction, or at the option of the Owner, removal and replacement of the following items found defective during a period of 1 year after the date of Substantial Completion. Duties and obligations for correction or removal and replacement of defective Work shall be as specified in the General Conditions. 1. Faulty operations of gate operators and controls. 2. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond , normal weathering. 3. Deflection of fence fabric beyond limits. , PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL ' A. Match style, finish, and color of each fence component with that of other fence components. 1 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES CVO/391538A 02821 - 2 JUNE 2010 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 2.02 CHAIN LINK FENCE FABRIC ' A. Galvanized fabric conforming to ASTM A392, Type II, Class 1, 1.2 ounces per square foot galvanized after weaving. B. Height: 72 inches, unless otherwise shown. C. Core Wire Gauge: No. 9. D. Pattern: 2 -inch diamond -mesh. E. Diamond Count: Manufacturer's standard and consistent for fabric furnished of same height. ' F. Loops of Knuckled Selvages: Closed or nearly closed with space not exceeding diameter of wire. G. Wires of Twisted Selvages: 1. Twisted in a closed helix three full turns. ' 2. Cut at an angle to provide sharp barbs that extend minimum 1/4 inch beyond twist. 2.03 POSTS A. General: ' 1. Strength and Stiffness Requirements: ASTM F 1043, heavy industrial fence, except as modified in this section. ' 2. Round Steel Pipe, Schedule 40: ASTM F1083. 3. Roll- Formed Steel Shapes: Roll- formed from ASTM A1011 /A1011M, Grade 45, High- Strength Low -Alloy steel. ' 4. Lengths: Manufacturer's standard with allowance for minimum embedment below finished grade of 34 inches. 5. Protective Coatings: ' a. Zinc Coating: ASTM F 1043, Type A external and internal coating. ' B. Line Posts: 1. Round Steel Pipe: a. Outside Diameter: 2.375 inches. b. Weight: 3.65 pounds per foot. CVO/391538A CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES JUNE 2010 02821 - 3 • DURHAM PHASE 5B1 1 C. End, Corner, Angle, and Pull Posts: 1. Round Steel Pipe: a. Outside Diameter: 2.875 inches. b. Weight: 5.79 pounds per foot. D. Posts for Swing Gates 8 Feet High and Under: 1. ASTM F900. ' 2. Round Steel Pipe: a. Outside Diameter: 4 inches. b. Weight: 6.56 pounds per foot. E. Posts for Horizontal Sliding Gates: 1. ASTM F1184, Type II, Class 1. 2. Round Steel Pipe: a. Outside Diameter: 4 inches. b. Weight: 6.56 pounds per foot. 2.04 TOP AND BRACE RAILS ' A. Galvanized Round Steel Pipe: 1. ASTM F1083. 2. Outside Diameter: 1.66 inches. 3. Weight: 2.27 pounds per foot. , B. Protective Coatings: As specified for posts. C. Strength and Stiffness Requirements: ASTM F1043, top rail, heavy industrial fence. 2.05 FENCE FITTINGS A. General: In conformance with ASTM F626, except as modified by this article. , B. Post and Line Caps: Designed to accommodate passage of top rail through cap, where top rail required. , C. Tension and Brace Bands: No exceptions to ASTM F626. D. Tension Bars: 1. One - piece. 2. Length not less than 2 inches shorter than full height of chain link fabric. 1 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES CVO/391538A 02821 - 4 JUNE 2010 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 3. Provide one bar for each gate and end -post, -and two for -each corner and ' pull post. E. Truss Rod Assembly: 3/8 -inch diameter, steel, hot -dip galvanized after threading rod and turnbuckle or other means of adjustment. F. Tie Wires, Clips, and Fasteners: According to ASTM F626. ' 2.06 TENSION WIRE ' A. Zinc - coated steel marcelled tension wire conforming to ASTM A824, Type II, Class 2. 2.07 GATES A. General: 1. Gate Operation: Opened and closed easily by one person. 2. Metal Pipe and Tubing: Galvanized steel. Comply with ASTM F1043 ' and ASTM F1083 for materials and protective coatings. 3. Frames and Bracing: Fabricate members from round galvanized steel tubing with outside dimension and weight according to ASTM F900. 4. Gate leaves more than 8 -feet wide shall have intermediate tubular members and diagonal truss rods to provide rigid construction, free from sag or twist. 5. Gate Fabric Height: Same as for adjacent fence height. 6. Welded Steel Joints: Paint with zinc -based paint. 7. Chain Link Fabric: Attached securely to gate frame at intervals not ' exceeding 15 inches. 8. Latches: Arranged for padlocking so padlock will be accessible from both sides of gate. ' B. Swing Gates: Comply with ASTM F900 for single swing gate types. 1. Existing swing gate shall be relocated as shown on Drawings. 2. Gate Stops: Mushroom type or flush plate with anchors, suitable for setting in concrete. 3. Locking Device and Padlock Eyes: Integral part of latch, requiring one padlock for locking both leaves of double gate. 4. Hold -Open Keepers: Designed to automatically engage gate leaf and hold it in open position until manually released. C. Cantilever Horizontal Sliding Gates: ' 1. Existing 30 -foot cantilever slide gate shall be relocated as shown on Drawings. I CVO/391538A CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES JUNE 2010 02821 - 5 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 1 1 2. Cantilever Gate Support Posts: Spaced on maximum 10 -foot centers. 3. Roller Guards: As required per ASTM F1184 for Type II, Class 1 gate. 4. Hangers, roller assemblies, and stops fabricated from galvanized malleable iron. 5. Fob Readers and Pedestal: Relocate existing as shown on Drawings. ' 2.08 GATE OPERATOR SYSTEM A. Existing Gate to be Relocated: Salvage, install, and test existing control 1 devices and operator at the new gate location. Where any device is not functional or salvageable, provide new compatible devices that ensure the functionality described in this Section. Gate opens by fob. Gate closes after adjustable time period up to 90 seconds and loop and proximity sensors indicate gate is free of obstruction. B. General: Provide factory- assembled automatic operating system designed for gate size, type, weight, and operation frequency. Provide operation control system with characteristics suitable for Project conditions, safety devices, and weatherproof enclosures; coordinate electrical requirements with Division 26, Electrical. 1. Provide operator designed so motor may be removed without disturbing limit- switch adjustment and without affecting auxiliary emergency operator. 2. Provide operator with UL approved components. 3. Provide electronic components with built -in troubleshooting diagnostic feature. 4. Provide unit designed and wired for both right - hand/left -hand opening, permitting universal installation. 5. Provide with NEMA Type 4X stainless steel heavy -duty safety switch for service disconnect adjacent to controller cabinet. Mount disconnect to suitable structure or provide stainless steel stanchion for mounting. 1 C. Motor Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected loads at designated speeds, within installed environment, with indicated operating sequence, and without exceeding nameplate rating or considering service factor. D. Gate Operator: 1 1. Heavy -duty, high frequency, electrical models designed to open and close gates provided. 2. For each gate, supply manufacturer of gate operator with complete details of gate, hardware, track rollers, adjacent fence posts, and fence 1 construction for development and detailing of gate operator. 1 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES CVO/391538A 02821 - 6 JUNE 2010 ' DURHAM PHASE 5B1 3. Furnish with following features: a. Metal enclosure, including attachments shall be constructed with finish and design suitable for exterior installation in all- weather environment. b. Minimum 1 -hp motor, 480V ac, three- phase, 60 -Hz electric power, reversible. c. Electric motor driven hydraulic power pack with hard rubber ' wheels in contact with operating type secured to gate. Transmission of opening or closing forces to gate shall be by rotation of wheels against operating type. d. Positive limit switch, to sense position of gate and provide control to prevent damage to gate operator. e. NEMA 250, Type 3R enclosure for motor control components. ' f Motor Overload Protection: Industrial quality with manual reset. g. 24V ac control circuit to power remote control gate activation devices. h. Manual operation feature or disconnect, without use of tools, for easy operation during power failure, malfunction, or emergency. i. Aluminum drive rail designed for attachment to sliding gate in ' manner that reinforces gate assembly. j. Gate Travel Speed: 1) Minimum 1 foot per second. 2) Speed adjusting feature that provides range of appropriate speeds for slide gate operation is acceptable but not required. 3) Maximum Gate Weight: 2,000 pounds. 4) Frequency of Use: 30 cycles per hour. ' 5) Operating Type: Roller chain with manual release. k. Compatible with gate operator control devices provided. 4. Manufacturers: ' a. Hy- Security Gate Operator, Seattle, WA. b. Automated Equipment Co., Seattle, WA. c. Stanley. d. Richards Wilcox, Aurora, IL. E. Access System: ' 1. Fob reader and wiring are provided under a separate contract by Sonitrol Pacific. ' 2. For safety, provide loop detectors minimum of 4 feet away from each side of gate and other metallic objects. a. Induction Loops: Induction loops shall meet the requirements ' listed below. Induction loops may be used for vehicle presence detection. Induction loops shall be capable of detecting passenger vehicles, bicycles, motorcycles, and high bed trucks. Tests for all CVO/391538A CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES JUNE 2010 02821 - 7 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 three types of vehicles shall be conducted on each installed loop during the Performance Verification Test. 1) Tuning: Automatic, with temperature compensation. 2) Loop Input: To withstand minimum 2000V, both normal and common modes. 3) Loop Sensing Frequency: Minimum four user selectable frequencies to minimize cross talk with adjacent loops. 4) Sensitivity:. User selectable, minimum 12 ranges, 20 to 2500 mH with a Q factor of minimum 5. 5) Diagnostic: Provide diagnostics and related indication for short and open loop circuit. 6) Detector Output: Dry Form C contact set, rated a minimum of 0.25 A at 24V dc. 7) Operating Humidity: 0 to 95 percent. 8) Operating Temperature: Minus 40 to 77 degrees C (minus 40 to plus 170 degrees F). 9) Vibration: NEMA TS -2 -2.1.9 or better. 10) Shock: NEMA TS -2- 2.1.10 or better. 11) User Selectable Operation Modes: Presence, pulse on entrance, pulse on exit - factory set on presence mode. ' 12) User Selectable Operation: Fail Safe or Fail Secure - factory set at Fail Safe. 13) User selectable sensitivity boost feature, which boosts sensitivity after a presence detection and holds the increased sensitivity until the detection drops out, at which time sensor sensitivity returns to the original setting. 14) Loop Wire: a) Provide minimum of two inductive loops one on entry and one on exit side of gate, or as recommended by gate manufacturer. b) Ensure that the loop slots in which the loop wire is laid are free from debris, sharp objects, and are completely dry. Clean out slots with compressed air before installing loop wire. c) Install loop wire in layers. Install backer rods over top wire at a minimum of 300 mm (1 foot) spacing to ensure uniform placement of wire in the slot. Fill the loop slots with sealant per recommendation of the loop wire manufacturer. d) Use 16 AWG stranded cable with Cross Linked Polyethylene insulation installed in a PVC sleeve. Loop wire extending from the loop to the loop amplifier shall be twisted with a minimum twist pitch of 18 per m (6 per foot). I CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES CVO/391538A 02821 - 8 JUNE 2010 • DURHAM PHASE 5B1 e) Check conductor - resistance-to ground -with "megger" of 500V or higher. Remove and replace the whole installation if ground resistance of less than 10 mega - ohms is measured. ' f) Provide TVSS (Transient Voltage Surge Suppressor) for both loop -wire terminations at or near the loop detector module. Ground the TVSS with minimum ' 1 0 AWG insulated ground wire of high strand -count to the closest ground termination point. 15) Loops shall be rectangular with 6 -inch radius rounded ' corners. Loops shall be 4 feet wide in direction of traffic and wide enough perpendicular to traffic to ensure no vehicle can pass around the loops. ' 3. Proximity Sensors: Provide two through -beam type proximity sensors and provide wiring to the gate operator to ensure gate does not close onto a vehicle. Provide mounting structure to mount one sensor at 24 inches above grade and one sensor at 60 inches abovegrade. 2.09 LOCKS FOR PEDESTRIAN GATES A. Trilogy Prox lock, PDL3000 with Standard Schlage key way. B. Color: Satin chrome. C. Provide tamperproof box around lever on interior. 2.10 GATE OPERATOR LOCK BOXES ' A. General: The Contractor shall furnish and install two gate access lock boxes at the North Entry Gate. Each lock box shall be provided with one unique Knox lock with dust cover and keyway provided respectively for Tualatin Valley ' Fire and Rescue and Portland General Electric access to the plant site. Each lock box shall be provided with an access control fob which shall activate the gate operator. Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating the installation ' of appropriate keyways with the lock box manufacturer, Tualatin Valley Fire and Rescue, and the Portland General Electric. After installation of the north entrance lock boxes, the Contractor shall provide the Engineer with written ' approval from Tualatin Valley Fire and Rescue and the Portland General Electric that the lock boxes meet with their respective access requirements. Each box shall be of a specialized color or labeled marking as specified by ' Tualatin Valley Fire and Rescue and Portland General Electric (Contractor shall coordinate with each entity to determine specific requirements prior to procurement). CVO/391538A CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES JUNE 2010 02821 - 9 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 1 B. Manufacturer and Product: 1. Knox Company, 800 - 552 -5669; Knox Box 3200 Series with recessed mounting kit. 2. Or equal. 2.11 CONCRETE A. Provide as specified in Section 03300, Cast -in -Place Concrete. 2.12 FENCE GROUNDING A. Conductors: Bare, solid wire for No. 6 AWG and smaller; stranded wire for No. 4 AWG and larger. 1. Material above Finished Grade: Copper. 2. Material on or below Finished Grade: Copper. 3. Bonding Jumpers: Braided copper tape, 1 -inch wide, woven of No. 30 AWG bare copper wire, terminated with copper ferrules. B. Connectors and Grounding Rods: Comply with UL 467. 1. Connectors for Below -Grade Use: Exothermic welded type. 2. Grounding Rods: Copper -clad steel. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Install chain link fences and gates in accordance with ASTM F567, except as modified in this section, and in accordance with fence manufacturer's recommendations, as approved by Engineer. Erect fencing in straight lines between angle points. B. Provide necessary hardware for a complete fence and gate installation. C. Any damage to galvanized surfaces, including welding, shall be repaired with paint containing zinc dust in accordance with ASTM A780. 3.02 PREPARATION ' A. Clear area on either side of fence to the extent specified in Section 02200, Site Clearing. Eliminate ground surface irregularities along fence line to the extent necessary to maintain a 2 -inch clearance between bottom of fabric and finish grade. 1 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES CVO/391538A 02821 - 10 JUNE 2010 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 B. Stake locations of fence lines, gates; and terminal posts. Do not exceed - intervals of 500 feet or line of sight between stakes. Indicate locations of I utilities, lawn sprinkler system, underground structures, benchmarks, and property monuments. ' C. Embedment Coating: Coat portion of galvanized or aluminum- coated steel posts that will be embedded in concrete as specified in Section 09900, ' f Painting and Coating. Extend coating 1 inch above top of concrete. 3.03 POST SETTING A. Drill or hand - excavate holes for posts to diameters and spacing indicated, in firm, undisturbed soil. Driven posts are not acceptable. Postholes shall be clear of loose materials. Waste materials from postholes shall be removed from Site or regraded into slopes on Site. ' B. Posthole Depth: 1. Minimum 3 feet below finished grade. ' 2. 2 inches deeper than post embedment depth below fmish grade. C. Set posts with minimum embedment below finished grade of 34 inches and with top rail at proper height above finished grade. Verify posts are set plumb, aligned, and at correct height and spacing. Brace posts, as necessary, to maintain correct position and plumbness until concrete sets. D. Backfill postholes with concrete to 2 inches above finished grade. Vibrate or tamp concrete for consolidation. Protect above ground portion of posts from concrete splatter. E. Before concrete sets, crown and finish top of concrete to readily shed water. F. Terminal Posts: Locate terminal end, corner, and gate posts per ASTM F567 and terminal pull posts at changes in horizontal or vertical alignment of 15 degrees or more. G. Line Posts: Space line posts uniformly at 10 feet on centers between terminal end, corner, and gate posts. 1 1 CVO/391538A CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES JUNE 2010 02821 - 11 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 3.04 POST BRACING A. Install according to ASTM F567, maintaining plumb position, and alignment 1 of fencing. Install braces at gate, end, pull, and corner posts diagonally to adjacent line posts to ensure stability. Install braces on both sides of corner and pull posts. 1. Locate horizontal braces at mid - height of fabric or higher, on fences with top rail, and 2/3- fabric height on fences without top rail. Install so posts are plumb when diagonal truss rod assembly is under proper tension. 3.05 TOP RAILS A. Install according to ASTM.F567, maintaining plumb position and alignment ' of fencing. Run rail continuously through line post caps and terminating into rail end attached to posts or posts caps fabricated to receive rail at terminal posts. Install top rail sleeves with springs at 105 feet maximum spacing to permit expansion in rail. 3.06 TENSION WIRE A. Install according to ASTM F567 and ASTM F1916, maintaining plumb position and alignment of fencing. Pull wire taut, without sags. Fasten fabric to tension wire with tie wires at a maximum spacing of 24 inches on center. B. Install tension wire within 6 inches of bottom of fabric and tie to each post with not less than same diameter and type of wire. 3.07 CHAIN LINK FABRIC A. Do not install fabric until concrete has cured minimum 7 days. B. Install fabric with twisted and barbed selvage at top. C. Apply fabric to outside of enclosing framework. Pull fabric taut to provide a I smooth and uniform appearance free from sag, without permanently distorting fabric diamond or reducing fabric height. Tie fabric to posts, rails, and tension wires. Anchor to framework so fabric remains under Pension after pulling 1 force is released. D. Splicing shall be accomplished according to ASTM F1916 by weaving a ' single picket into the ends of the rolls to be joined. E. Leave 2 inches between finish grade or surface and bottom selvage, unless 1 otherwise indicated. 1 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES CVO/391538A 02821 - 12 JUNE 2010 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 F. Tension or Stretcher Bars: Thr ead through -fabric and-secure-to-end, corner, ' pull, and gate posts with tension bands spaced not more than 15 inches on center. ' G. Tie Wires: Fasten ties to wrap a full 360 degrees around rail or post and a minimum of one complete diamond of fabric. Twist ends of tie wire three full twists, and cut off protruding ends to preclude untwisting by hand. 1 1. Maximum Spacing: Tie fabric to line posts at 12 inches on center and to brace and top rails at 24 inches on center. 1 3.08 GATES A. Install gates according to manufacturer's written instructions, level, plumb ' and secure for full opening without interference. Attach fabric and hardware to gate using tamper- resistant or concealed means. Adjust hardware for smooth operation and lubricate where necessary so gates operate satisfactorily from open or closed position. ' B. Set gate stops in concrete to engage center drop rod or plunger bar. C. Provide pushbutton lock at each pedestrian gate. 3.09 GATE OPERATOR SYSTEMS A. Install gate operator systems in accordance with manufacturer's ' recommendations, aligned and true to fence line and grade. B. Furnish with equipment and accessories necessary for complete installation. C. Hand excavate holes for pads in firm undisturbed soil to dimensions, depths, and locations as required by gate operator component manufacturer's written ' instructions and as shown on the Drawings. D. Vehicle Loop Detector System: Cut grooves in pavement and bury and seal wire loop according to manufacturer's written instructions. Connect to equipment operated by detector. 3.10 ELECTRICAL GROUNDING A. Ground fences at a maximum interval of 1,000 feet in accordance with applicable requirements of IEEE C2, National Electrical Safety Code. B. Protection at Crossings of Overhead Electrical Power Lines: Ground fence at location of crossing and at a maximum distance of 150 feet on each side of crossing. CVO/391538A CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES JUNE 2010 02821 - 13 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 1 C. Grounding Method: At each grounding location, drive a grounding rod vertically until top is 6 inches below finished grade. Connect rod to fence with No. 6 AWG conductor. Connect conductor to each fence component at grounding location. 3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL ' A. Post and Fabric Testing: Test fabric tension and line post rigidity according to ASTM F1916. B. Gate Tests: 1. Prior to acceptance of installed gates, demonstrate proper operation of p g P p p gates under each possible open and close condition specified. 2. Adjust gate to operate smoothly, easily, and quietly, free of binding, warp, excessive deflection, distortion, nonalignment, misplacement, disruption, or malfunction, throughout entire operational range. 3. Confirm that latches and locks engage accurately and securely without forcing and binding. C. Automatic Gate Operator: 1. Energize circuits to electrical equipment and devices. 2. Adjust operators, controls, safety devises, and limit switches. 3. Start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation free of binding. Test and adjust all gate controls for proper operation. 4. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. 5. Lubricate hardware, gate operator and other moving parts. 3.12 MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES 1 A. Provide manufacturer's representative at Site in accordance with Section 01640, Manufacturers' Services, to train Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain gates. 3.13 CLEANUP ' A. Remove excess fencing materials and other debris from Site. END OF SECTION 1 I I CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES CVO/391538A 02821 - 14 JUNE 2010 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 SECTION 03100 CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES ' PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Design formwork in accordance with ACI 347 and ACI 318/318R to provide concrete finishes specified in Section 03300, Cast -in -Place Concrete. ' B. When high range water reducer (superplasticizer) is used in concrete mix, forms shall be designed for full hydrostatic pressure per ACI 347. ' C. Make joints in forms watertight. D. Limit panel deflection to 1 /360th of each component span to achieve tolerances specified. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Layout of panel joints and tie hole pattern. b. Form Ties - Tapered Through - Bolts: Proposed method of sealing form tie hole; coordinate with details shown. c. Manufacturer's data for form release agent. B. Informational Submittals: Statement of qualification for formwork designer. 1.03 QUALIFICATIONS ' A. Formwork Designer: Formwork, falsework, and shoring design shall be by an engineer licensed in the state of Project. ' PART 2 PRODUCTS ' 2.01 FORM MATERIALS A. Wall Forms and Underside of Slabs and Beams: 1. Materials: Hard plastic finished plywood, or steel in "new and undamaged" condition, of sufficient strength and surface smoothness to produce specified finish. ' CVO/391538A CONCRETE FORMING JUNE 2010 AND ACCESSORIES ' 03100 - 1 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 1 B. Column Forms: 1. Rectangular Columns: As specified for walls. ' C. All Other Forms: Materials as specified for wall forms. D. Form Release Agent: 1. Material: Release agent shall not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces, and shall not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces when applied to forms. A ready -to -use water based material formulated to reduce or eliminate surface imperfections, containing no mineral oil or organic solvents. Environmentally safe, meeting local, state, and federal regulations. 2. Manufacturers and Products: a. BASF, Shakopee, MN; MBT, Rheofinish 211. b. Cresset Chemical Company; Crete -Lease 20 -VOC. c. Unitex Chemicals; Farm Fresh. d. Atlas Construction Supply, Inc.; Bio- Guard. E. Rustication Grooves and Beveled Edge Corner Strips: Nonabsorbent material, , compatible with form surface, fully sealed on all sides prohibiting loss of paste or water between the two surfaces. F. Form Ties: 1. Material: Stainless steel. , 2. Spreader Inserts: a. Conical or spherical type. , b. Design to maintain positive contact with forming material. c. Furnish units that will leave no metal closer than 1.5 inches to concrete surface when forms, inserts, and tie ends are removed. 3. Wire ties not permitted. 4. Flat bar ties for panel forms; furnish plastic or rubber inserts with minimum 1.5 -inch depth and sufficient dimensions to permit patching of tie hole. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 FORM SURFACE PREPARATION . A. Thoroughly clean form surfaces that will be in contact with concrete or that have been in contact with previously cast concrete, dirt, and other surface contaminants prior to coating surface. CONCRETE FORMING CVO/391538A ' AND ACCESSORIES JUNE 2010 03100 - 2 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 B. Exposed osed Wood Forms in Contact with Concrete: Apply 1 form release agent p ppy as recommended by the manufacturer. ' C. Steel Forms: Apply form release agent to steel forms as soon as they Y g Y are cleaned to prevent discoloration of concrete from rust. ' 3.02 ERECTION 1 A. General: Unless specified otherwise, follow applicable recommendations of ACI 347. 1 B. Beveled Edges (Chamfer): 1. Form 3/4 -inch bevels at concrete edges, unless otherwise shown. 1 2. Where beveled edges on existing adjacent structures are other than 3/4 inch, obtain Engineer's approval of size prior to placement of beveled edge. ' C. Wall Forms: ' 1. Do not reuse forms with damaged surfaces. 2. Locate form ties and joints in an uninterrupted uniform pattern. 3. Inspect form surfaces prior to installation to assure conformance with specified tolerances. D. Form Tolerances: Provide forms in accordance with ACI 117/117R, ACI 347, 1 and ACI 318/318R and the following tolerances for finishes specified: 1. Wall Tolerances: ' a. Straight Vertical or Horizontal Wall Surface: Flat planes within tolerance specified. b. Wall Type W -A: 1) Plumb within 1/4 inch in 10 feet or within 1 inch from top to bottom for walls over 40 feet high. 2) Depressions in Wall Surface: Maximum 5/16 inch when 1 10 -foot straightedge is placed on high points in all directions. ' c. Wall Type W -B: 1) Plumb within 1/8 inch in 10 feet or within 1/2 inch from top to bottom for walls over 40 feet high. 2) Depressions in Wall Surface: Maximum 1/8 inch when ' 10 -foot straightedge is placed on high points in all directions. ' d. Thickness: Maximum 1/4 inch minus or 1/2 inch plus from dimension shown. 1 CVO/391538A CONCRETE FORMING JUNE 2010 AND ACCESSORIES 1 03100 - 3 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 1 e. Form Offset: Between adjacent pieces of formwork, facing material shall not exceed 1/4 inch. 2. Beams and Columns Tolerances: a. Exposed Straight Horizontal and Vertical Surfaces: Flat planes within tolerances specified. b. Lateral Alignment: 1) Centerlines must be within plus or minus 1/2 inch from dimensions shown. 2) At intersections, centerlines shall intersect within plus or minus 1/2 inch of dimensions shown. c. Beam Type B -A: 1) Physical Dimensions: Maximum 1/4 inch minus or 1/2 inch plus from dimension shown. 2) Elevations: Within plus or minus 1/2 inch, except where tops of beams become part of finished slab. In this case refer to slab tolerances. d. Column Type C -A: 1 1) Physical Dimensions: Maximum 1/4 inch minus or 1/2 inch plus from dimension shown. 2) Plumb within 1/4 inch in 10 feet in all directions with 1 maximum 1/2 inch out -of -plumb at top with respect to bottom. 3.03 FORM REMOVAL A. Nonsupporting forms (sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of 1 Work) may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 degrees F for 24 hours from time of concrete placement if: 1. Concrete is sufficiently hard so as not to sustain damage by form removal operations. 2. Curing and protection operations are maintained. 1 B. Elevated Structural Slabs or Beams: In accordance with ACI 318/318R, Chapter 6, and at such time as concrete has reached compressive strength equal to 80 percent of specified 28 -day compressive strength as determined by test cylinders. END OF SECTION 1 1 CONCRETE FORMING CVO/391538A 1 AND ACCESSORIES JUNE 2010 03100 - 4 1 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 SECTION 03210 REINFORCING STEEL ' PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUBMITTALS 1 A. Action Submittals: 1. Shop Drawings prepared in accordance with CRSI Manual of Standard ' Practice and ACI SP -66 Detailing Manual: a. Bending lists. b. Placing drawings. 1.02 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING ' A. Unload, store, and handle bars in accordance with CRSI publication "Placing Reinforcing Bars." 1 PART 2 PRODUCTS • 2.01 MATERIALS A. Deformed Billet -Steel Reinforcing Bars: ' 1. Includes stirrups, ties, and spirals. 2. ASTM A615, Grade 60, where welding is not required. ' B. Welded Wire Fabric: 1. ASTM A185 or ASTM A497 and ACI 318/318R, using ASTM A82 ' wire of 75 ksi minimum tensile strength. 2. Furnish flat sheets only, rolled sheets not permitted. ' 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Tie Wire: 1. Black, soft- annealed 16 -gauge wire. 2. Nylon -, epoxy -, or plastic- coated wire. 1 B. Bar Supports and Spacers: 1. Use precast concrete bar supports or all- plastic bar supports and side form spacers, unless noted otherwise. Do not use other types of supports or spacers. CVO /391538A REINFORCING STEEL • JUNE2010 03210 - 1 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 1 2. Bar supports shall have sufficient strength and stiffness to carry loads without failure, displacement, or significant deformation. Space bar supports so minimum concrete cover is maintained for reinforcing between supports. 3. Use only precast concrete bar supports where concrete surfaces are exposed to weather, earth, water, chloride intrusion, or corrosive chemicals. Bar supports shall be nonconductive and have geometry and bond characteristics that deter movement of moisture from the surface to the reinforcement. 4. Precast concrete supports shall have same minimum strength and shall be made from same materials as that of the concrete in which they are to be embedded. Precast concrete supports shall be cast and properly cured for at least 7 days before use and shall have a wire or other device cast into each block for the purpose of attaching them securely to the reinforcing steel. 5. In Beams, Columns, Walls, and Slabs Exposed to View after Form Removal: Use small precast concrete blocks made of same color as 1 concrete in which they are embedded. All- plastic bar supports and side form spacers may be used, except where surface is exposed as described above. 1 6. Plastic Bar Supports: Manufactured by Aztec Concrete Accessories, Bloomington, CA. 7. Precast Concrete Supports: Total bond precast high performance concrete bar supports as supplied by Con Sys Inc., Pinawa, MB, Canada. . 2.03 FABRICATION A. Follow CRSI Manual of Standard Practice. 1 B. Bend bars cold. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION 1 A. Notify Engineer when reinforcing is ready for inspection and allow sufficient time for inspection prior to placing concrete. 1 B. Clean reinforcing bars of loose mill scale, oil, earth, and other contaminants. C. Coat wire projecting from precast concrete bar supports with dielectric 1 material, epoxy, or plastic. 1 1 REINFORCING STEEL CVO/391538A 03210 - 2 JUNE 2010 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 3.02 REINFORCING -BAR INSTALLATION - - 1 A. Bundle or space bars, instead of field bending where construction access through reinforcing is necessary. B. Spacing and Positioning: Conform to ACI 318/318R. . C. Location Tolerances: In accordance with CRSI publication, "Placing 1 Reinforcing Bars ". D. Splicing: 1. Follow ACI 318/318R. 2. Use lap splices, unless otherwise shown or permitted in writing by 1 Engineer. 3. Welded Splices: Not allowed. 4. Stagger splices in adjacent bars where indicated. ' E. Tying Reinforcing Bars: 1 1. Tie every other intersection on mats made up of Nos. 3, 4, 5, and 6 bars to hold them firmly at required spacing. 2. Bend tie wire away from concrete surface to provide clearance of 1 inch from surface of concrete to tie wire. F. Reinforcement around Openings: On each side and above and below pipe or 1 opening, place an equivalent area of steel bars to replace steel bars cut for opening. Extend steel reinforcing a standard lap length beyond opening at each end. ' G. Straightening and Rebending: Field bending of reinforcing steel bars is not permitted. H. Unless permitted by Engineer, do not cut reinforcing bars in field. 1 3.03 WELDED WIRE FABRIC INSTALLATION A. Use only where specifically shown. ' B. Extend fabric to within 2 inches of edges of slab, and lap splices at least 1 -1/2 courses of fabric or minimum 8 inches. 1 C. Tie laps and splices securely at ends and at least every 24 inches with tie wire. ' D. Place welded wire fabric on concrete blocks and rigidly support equal to that provided for reinforced bars. Do not use broken concrete, brick, or stone. CVO/391538A REINFORCING STEEL JUNE 2010 03210 - 3 DURHAM 5 PHASE 5B1 S 1 E. Follow ACI 318/318R and current Manual of Standard Practice, Welded Wire Fabric. F. Do not use fabric that has been rolled. Install flat sheets only. 3.04 TESTS AND. INSPECTION 1 A. Special inspection will be provided by Owner as indicated on Drawings. END OF SECTION 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 REINFORCING STEEL CVO/391538A 03210 - 4 JUNE 2010 DURHAM PHASE S 5B1 SECTION 03251 ' CONCRETE JOINTS AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 GENERAL I 1.01 SUBMITTALS 1 A. Action Submittals: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Waterstop: Details of splices, method of securing and supporting waterstop in forms to maintain proper orientation and location during concrete placement. b. Construction and Control Joints: Layout and location for each type. ' 1.02 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Acceptance at Site: Verify delivered materials are in accordance with ' Specifications and manufacturer's product data sheets prior to unloading and storing onsite. Pi I B. Storage: Store materials under tarps to protect from oil, dirt, and sunlight. PART 2 PRODUCTS ' 2.01 PLASTIC WATERSTOP ' A. Extruded from elastomeric plastic compound of which basic resin shall be prime virgin polyvinyl chloride (PVC). Compound shall not contain scrapped material, reclaimed material, or pigment. B. Specific Gravity: Approximately 1.37. 1 C. Shore Durometer Type A Hardness: Approximately 80. D. Performance Requirements: COE Specification CRD -C -572. 1 E. Type: Center bulb with parallel ribs or protrusions on each side of strip center. F. Corrugated or tapered type waterstops are not acceptable. G. Thickness: Constant from bulb edge to outside stop edge. 1 CVO/391538A CONCRETE JOINTS JUNE 2010 A ND ACCESSORIES 03251 -1 • DURHAM PHASE 5B1 1 H. Minimum Weight per Foot of Waterstop: 1. 1.60 pounds for 3/8 inch by 6 inches. 2. 2.30 pounds for 3/8 inch by 9 inches. I. Factory Fabrications: Use only factory fabrications for intersections, 1 transitions, and changes of direction. J. Manufacturers and Products: 1 1. Vinylex Corp., Knoxville, TN; Catalog No. 03250/VIN: No. RB6 -38H (6 inches by 3/8 inch) and No. RB9 -38H (9 inches by 3/8 inch). 2. Greenstreak Plastic Products, St. Louis, MO; Catalog No. 03150 /GRD: Style 732 (6 inches by 3/8 inch) and Style 735 (9 inches by 3/8 inch). 3. Four Seasons Industries Durajoint, Garrettsville, OH; Catalog No. CSP -162: Type 9 (6 inches by 3/8 inch), and Type 10 (9 inches by 3/8 inch). 1 2.02 WIRE LOOPED PLASTIC WATERSTOP A. Furnish as alternative to plastic waterstops. 1 B. Same material and geometry as plastic waterstops. C. Furnish with continuous galvanized wire looping at edge, for convenience in positioning and securing stop in place in forms. D. Manufacturer and Product: Paul Murphy Plastics, Roseville, MI; "Wire Stop Waterstop "; geometry numbers ACR 6380, ACR 9380, as shown on Paul Murphy Plastics Co. Drawing No. CCP- 120 -12M. 2.03 PREMOLDED JOINT FILLER A. Bituminous Type: ASTM D994 or ASTM D1751. 2.04 ACCESSORIES 1 A. Nonshrink Grout: As specified in Section 03600, Nonshrink Grouting. B. Roofing Felt: ASTM D226, Type II, 30 -pound asphalt - saturated or equal weight of ASTM D227 coal -tar saturated felt. C. Reinforcing Steel: As specified in Section 03210, Reinforcing Steel. D. Nails: Galvanized, as required for securing premolded joint filler. 1 CONCRETE JOINTS CVO/391538A 1 AND ACCESSORIES JUNE 2010 03251 - 2 1 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 E. Masking Tape: As required to temporarily adhere -to concrete at each side of ' joint to receive filler. F. Ties for PVC Waterstop: "Hog Rings" or grommets for each edge at 12 -inch ' maximum spacing. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Commence concrete placement after joint preparation is complete. ' B. Time Between Concrete Pours: As specified in Section 03300, Cast -in -Place Concrete. ' 3.02 SURFACE PREPARATION ' A. Construction Joints: Prior to placement of abutting concrete, clean contact surface: 1. Remove laitance and spillage from reinforcing steel and dowels. 2. Roughen surface to minimum of 1/4 -inch amplitude: a. Sandblast after concrete has fully cured. b. Water blast after concrete has partially cured. c. Green cut fresh concrete with high pressure water and hand tools. 3. Perform cleaning so as not to damage waterstop, if one is present. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF WATERSTOPS ' A. General: 1. Continuous waterstop (as specified) shall be installed in all construction joints in walls and slabs of belowgrade structures, unless specifically noted otherwise. 2. Join waterstop at intersections to provide continuous seal. ' 3. Center waterstop on joint. 4. Secure waterstop in correct position. Tie waterstop to reinforcing steel using grommets, "Hog Rings," or tiewire at maximum spacing of 12 inches. Do not displace waterstop during concrete placement. 5. Repair or replace damaged waterstop. 6. Place concrete and vibrate to obtain impervious concrete in vicinity of ' joints. 7. Joints in Footings and Slabs: a. Ensure that space beneath plastic waterstop is completely filled ' with concrete. CVO/391538A CONCRETE JOINTS JUNE 2010 AND ACCESSORIES 03251 - 3 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 1 b. During concrete placement, make visual inspection of waterstop area. c. Limit concrete placement to elevation of waterstop in first pass, vibrate concrete under waterstop, lift waterstop to confirm full consolidation without voids, then place remaining concrete to full height of slab. B. Plastic Waterstop: 1. Install in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Splice in accordance with waterstop manufacturer's written instructions using Teflon - coated thermostatically controlled heating iron at approximately 380 degrees F. a. Allow at least 10 minutes before new splice is pulled or strained in any way. b. Finished splices shall provide cross section that is dense and free of porosity with tensile strength of not less than 80 percent of unspliced materials. c. Use only factory made waterstop fabrications for all intersections, changes of directions and transitions. d. Field splice permitted only for straight butt welds. 3. Wire looped plastic waterstop may be substituted for plastic waterstop. 3.04 EXPANSION JOINT INSTALLATION A. Premolded Joint Filler: 1. Sufficient in width to completely fill joint space where shown. 2. Vibrate concrete thoroughly along joint form to produce dense, smooth surface. B. Bituminous Type Premolded Joint Filler: 1 1. Drive nails approximately 1 foot 6 inches on center through filler, prior to installing, to provide anchorage embedment into concrete during concrete placement. 2. Secure premolded joint filler in forms before concrete is placed. 3. Install in walkways, at changes in direction, at intersections, at each side of driveway entrances, and at 45 -foot intervals, maximum. END OF SECTION 1 CONCRETE JOINTS CVO/391538A 1 AND ACCESSORIES JUNE 2010 03251 - 4 1 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 SECTION 03300 - ' CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DEFINITIONS 1 A. Defective Areas: Surface defects that include honeycomb, rock pockets, indentations greater than 3/16 inch, cracks 0.005 inch wide and larger, as well as a crack that leaks for liquid containment basins and belowgrade habitable 1 spaces; cracks 0.010 inch wide and larger in nonfluid holding structures spalls, chips, air bubbles greater than 3/4 inch in diameter, pinholes, bug 1 holes, embedded debris, lift lines, sand lines, bleed lines, leakage from form joints, fins and other projections, form popouts, texture irregularities, and stains and other color variations that cannot be removed by cleaning. B. Exposed Concrete: Concrete surfaces that can be seen inside or outside of structures regardless whether concrete is above water, dry at all times, or can be seen when structure is drained. 1 C. New Concrete: Less than 60 days old. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: ' 1. Shop Drawings: a. Product Data: Admixtures, bonding agent, bond breaker, and patching materials. b. Design Data: Concrete mix designs signed by qualified mix designer. 1 c. Placement Drawings: Concrete, identifying location of each type of construction joint. 1 d. Gradation for coarse and fine aggregates, and combined together. List gradings, percent passing through each sieve size. e. Detailed plan for cold weather curing and protection of concrete 1 placed and cured in weather below 40 degrees F. f. Detailed plan for hot weather placements including curing and protection for concrete placed in ambient temperatures over 1 80 degrees F. g. Concrete repair methods and materials. 1 CVO/391538A CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 1 JUNE 2010 03300 - 1 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 1 B. Informational Submittals: 1. Preinstallation Conference minutes. 1 2. Manufacturer's application instructions for bonding agent and bond breaker. 3. Manufacturers' Certificate of Compliance: a. Portland cement. b. Admixtures. c. Fly ash. d. Aggregates. e. Bonding agent. f. Bond breaker. g. Patching materials. h. Admixtures: Manufacturers' Certificate of Proper Installation. 4. Test Reports: a. Admixtures, test reports showing chemical ingredients and percentage of chloride in each admixture and fly ash. b. Source test analysis report for fly ash, including percentage of chloride content. c. Statement identifying aggregates reactivity. Determine water 1 soluble chloride in each component of aggregates in accordance with ASTM C 1218/C 1218M. d. For each trial concrete mix design and signed by a qualified mix designer. e. Cylinder compressive test results for laboratory concrete mixes. 5. Concrete Delivery Tickets: a. For each batch of concrete before unloading at Site. b. Record of drum revolution counter, type, brand, test certification, Amount of fly ash if used in accordance with ASTM C94/C94M, Section 16. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1 • 1. Mix Designer: Licensed professional engineer registered in the State of Project or state DOT approved mix designer in the State of Project. 1 2. Batch Plant: Currently certified by the National Ready Mixed Concrete Association. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS 1 A. Cement: Furnish from one source. 1. Portland Cement Type I or Type II: a. Meet ASTM C150. 1 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE CVO/391538A 03300 - 2 JUNE 2010 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 b. Alkalies: Maximum 0.60 percent. c. Tricalcium Aluminate Content of Type I Cement: Maximum ' 12 percent. d. All Structures: Type II cement or combination of Type I mixed ' with fly ash. e. Combine fly ash with cement at batch plant or during production of cement in accordance with ASTM C595, Type IP cement. B. Aggregates: Furnish from one source. ' 1. Natural Aggregates: a. Free from deleterious coatings and substances in accordance with ASTM C33, except as modified herein. b. Free of materials and aggregate types causing popouts, discoloration, staining, or other defects on surface of concrete. 2. Nonpotentially Reactive: In accordance with ASTM C33, Appendix XI, Paragraph X1.1. 3. Aggregate Soundness: Test for fine and coarse aggregates in accordance with ASTM C33 and ASTM C88 using sodium sulfate solution. ' 4. Fine Aggregates: a. Clean, sharp, natural sand. b. ASTM C33. c. Materials Passing 200 Sieve: 4 percent maximum. d. Limit deleterious substances in accordance with ASTM C33, Table 1 with material finer than 200 sieve limited to 3 percent, ' coal and lignite limited to 0.5 percent. 5. Coarse Aggregate: a. Natural gravels, combination of gravels and crushed gravels, crushed stone, or combination of these materials containing no more than 15 percent flat or elongated particles (long dimension more than five times the short dimension). b. Materials Passing 200 Sieve: 0.5 percent maximum. c. Limit deleterious substances in accordance with ASTM C33, Table 3 for exposed concrete. ' C. Admixtures: Furnish from one manufacturer. 1. Characteristics: Compatible with each other and free of chlorides or other corrosive chemicals. 2. Air - Entraining Admixture: 1 a. ASTM C260, nontoxic after 30 days and contains no chlorides. b. Concrete with air - entrainment admixture added shall maintain air percentage as batched, within plus or minus 2 percent for time 1 required for placement into structure. CVO/391538A CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE JUNE 2010 03300 - 3 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 1 3. Water- Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M, Type A or Type D. a. Manufacturers and Products: 1) BASF Admixtures Inc., Shakopee, MN; Pozzolith or Polyheed. 2) Euclid Chemical Co., Cleveland, OH; Eucon WR -91. 3) W. R. Grace & Co., Cambridge, MA; WRDA with HYCOL. 4. High Range Water Reducing Admixture (Superplasticizer): a. ASTM C494/C494M. b. Hold slump of 5 inches or greater for time required for placement. c. Furnish type as recommended by manufacturer for allowed temperature ranges. d. Type F or G. e. Manufacturers and Products: 1) BASF Admixtures Inc., Shakopee, MN; Rheobuild or Polyheed at dosage greater than 10 ounces per 100 pounds of cement. 2) Euclid Chemical Co., Cleveland, OH; Eucon 537. 1 3) W. R. Grace & Co., Cambridge, MA; Daracem 100. 5. Fly Ash (Pozzolan): Class C or Class F fly ash in accordance with ASTM C618, except as modified herein: 1 a. Shall not be produced from process that has utilized hazardous or potentially hazardous materials. b. ASTM C618, Table 1, Loss of Ignition: Maximum 3 percent. c. ASTM C618, Table 2, Water Requirement: Maximum 100 percent of control. d CaO( %) — 5 :Maximuml .5 FE 0 ( %) 6. Fly Ash: Maximum 25 percent, minimum 15 percent, of total weight of fly ash plus cement. 7. For fly ash not meeting requirements of chemical ratio listed above, furnish the following: a. Test fly ash in accordance with ASTM C1012. b. Furnish test data confirming fly ash in combination with cement used meets strength requirements, is compatible with air- ' entraining agents and other additives, provides increased sulfate resistance equivalent to or better than Type II cement. c. Conduct tests using proposed fly ash and cement samples together 1 with control samples using Type II cement without fly ash. 8. Fly ash used in concrete containing aggregate classified as potentially reactive for ASR (alkali - silica reactivity) shall be limited to Class F and shall contain low levels of CaO. D. Water: Clean and potable containing less than 500 ppm of chlorides. 1 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE CVO/391538A 03300 - 4 JUNE 2010 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 2.02 ANCILLARY - MATERIALS 1 A. Crack Repair Epoxy Manufacturers: As specified in Section 03740, Crack Repair Epoxy Injection Grouting. 1 B. Bonding Agent: ' 1. Furnish two- component epoxy. 2. Consult manufacturer for surface finish, pot life, set time, vertical or horizontal application, and forming restrictions. 3. Manufacturers and Products: a. BASF Building Systems Inc., Shakopee, MN; Concresive. b. Euclid Chemical Co., Cleveland, OH; Euco Epoxy System. ' c. Sika Chemical Corp., Lyndhurst, NJ; Sikadur 32. C. Bond Breaker: 1 1. Nonstaining type, providing positive bond prevention. 2. Manufacturers and Products: ' a. Burke Co., San Mateo, CA; Burke Clean Lift Bond Breaker or Burke Tilt Free Bond Breaker. b. Nox -Crete Products Group, Omaha, NE; Silcoseal Select. c. Williams Distributors, Inc., Seattle, WA; Williams Tilt -Up Compound. D. Repair Material: 1. Contain no chlorides or other chemicals causing steel corrosion. 1 2. Repair mortar specifically mixed and then tested at Job Site for appearance compatibility prior to use in exposed. areas. 3. Low pressure spray or hand applied silica fume mortar, for vertical and ' overhead repair, as specified in Section 03720, Repair of Vertical and Overhead Concrete Surfaces. 4. Repair mortar system submitted and approved for horizontal concrete 1 surface repairs from list of repair mortars in Section 03722, Repair of Horizontal Concrete Surfaces. 5. Crack repair material as specified in Section 03740, Crack Repair Epoxy Injection Grouting. 1 1 CVO/391538A CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 1 JUNE 2010 03300 - 5 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 1 2.03 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN A. Design: Select and proportion ingredients using trial batches; sample, cure 1 and test concrete mix through approved independent testing laboratory in accordance with ACI 211.1. 1. Concrete Compressive Strength, F'c: a. 4,000 psi at 28 days, unless otherwise shown, except 3,000 psi at 28 days for secondary concrete elements such as curbs, sidewalks, and pipe /conduit encasements. b. Design lab -cured trial mix cylinders. c. Use additional cement or cement plus fly ash above minimum specified if required to meet average compressive strength, F'cr. d. Use F'cr as basis for selection of concrete proportions as set forth in ACI 301. e. F'cr: Equal to F'c plus 1,200 when data are not available to establish standard deviation. f. Duct bank concrete shall have a red dye mixed integrally with the concrete. Sprinkle on dye is not permitted at duct banks. 2. Concrete Fill: a. Design for 2,500 psi at 28 days using 1 -inch aggregate, 4 -inch maximum slump and 0.46 maximum water to cementitious materials ratio. b. Use water - reducing admixture. B. Proportions: 1. Design mix to meet aesthetic and structural concrete requirements. 2. In accordance with ACI 211.1, unless specified otherwise. 3. Unless specifically stated otherwise, water to cementitious materials ratio shall control amount of total water added to concrete as follows: 1 Water to Cementitious Materials Ratio Maximum W/C Maximum W/C Coarse Aggregate Ratio w/ Ratio w/o Size Superplasticizer Superplasticizer 1 1 -1/2" 0.40 0.44 1" 0.40 0.44 3/4" 0.40 0.44 4. Minimum Cementitious Materials Content: a. 517 pounds per cubic yard for concrete with 1 -1/2 -inch maximum size aggregate. 1 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE CVO/391538A 03300 -6 JUNE2010 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 b. 540 ounds per cubic p cub c yard for 1 -inch maximum size aggregate. ' c. 564 pounds per cubic yard for 3/4 -inch maximum size aggregate. d. Increase cementitious materials content as required to obtain strength requirements and water - cement ratio. C. Admixtures: ' 1. Air Content: a. 4 percent to 6 percent when tested in accordance with ASTM C231. b. No air entraining admixture to be added to concrete for interior ' slabs where heavy -duty concrete floor finish is required or for interior slabs with dense polished machine - trowel surface. c. Use 4 percent minimum for concrete placed under requirements of cold weather concreting, unless noted 'otherwise. 2. Fly Ash: Maximum 25 percent, minimum 15 percent of total weight of fly ash plus cement. 3. Water Reducers: Use in all concrete. 4. High Range Water Reducers (Superplastizicers): Use at Contractor's ' option. Control slump and workability to at least 4 -1/2 -inch slump at discharge into forms by adjusting high range water reducer at batch plant. D. Slump Range at Site: ' 1. 4 -1/2 inches minimum, 8 inches maximum for concrete with a high range water reducing admixture. 2. 3 inches minimum and 5 inches maximum for concrete without high 1 range water reducing admixture. E. Combined Aggregate Gradation: 1 1. Structures: Select one of the gradations shown in the following table. 2. Combined Gradation Limits: Limits shown are for coarse aggregates and fine aggregates mixed together (combined). Combined Gradation 1 Percentage Passing 1 -1/2" 1" 3/4" Sieve Sizes Max. Max. Max. 1 2" - 100 - - 1 -1/2" 95 - 100 - 100 - 1 1" 65 - 85 90 - 100 - 100 3/4" 55 - 75 70 - 90 92 - 100 CVO/391538A CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE JUNE 2010 03300 - 7 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 I 1 Combined Gradation Percentage Passing I 1 -1/2" 1" 3/4" Sieve Sizes Max. Max. Max. 1/2" - .68 - 86 1 3/8" 40 - 55 45 - 65 57 - 74 No. 4 30 - 45 31 - 47 38 - 57 I No. 8 23 - 38 23 - 40 28 - 46 No.16 16 -30 17 -35 20 -36 1 No.30 10 -20 10 -23 14 -25 No.50 4 -10 2 -10 5 -14 I No.100 0 -3 0 -3 0 -5 No.200 0 -2 0 -2 0 -2 1 2.04 CONCRETE MIXING A. General: In accordance with ACI 304R. 1 B. Concrete Mix Temperatures: As shown below for various stages of mixing and placing: I I Concrete Temperatures I Concrete Member Size, Minimum Dimension Ambient Air Temp. <12" 12 " -36" 36 " -72" >72" 1 Minimum concrete temperature as mixed for indicated air temperature: Above 30 deg F 60 deg F 55 deg F 50 deg F 45 deg F I 0 to 30 deg F 65 deg F 60 deg F 55 deg F 50 deg F Below 0 deg F 70 deg F 65 deg F 60 deg F 55 deg F 1 Maximum allowable gradual temperature drop in first 24 hours after curing period and after end of rotection: 1 — 1 50 deg F 40 deg F 30 deg F 20 deg F C. Truck Mixers: 1 1. Equip with electrically actuated counters to readily verify number of revolutions of drum or blades. 2. Counter: a. Resettable, recording type, mounted in driver's cab. I CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE CVO/391538A 03300 - 8 JUNE 2010 I DURHAM PHASE 5B1 b. Actuated at time of starting mixers at mixing speeds. 3. Truck mixer operation shall furnish concrete batch as discharged that is ' homogeneous with respect to consistency, mix, and grading. 4. If slump tests taken at approximately 1/4 point and 3/4 point of load during discharge give slumps differing by more than 2 inches when specified, slump is more than 4 inches, discontinue use of truck mixer unless causing condition is corrected and satisfactory performance is ' verified by additional slump tests. 5. Before attempting to reuse unit, check mechanical details of mixer, such as water measuring, and discharge apparatus, condition of blades, speed ' of rotation, general mechanical condition of unit, admixture dispensing equipment, and clearance of drum. 6. Do not use nonagitating or combination truck and trailer equipment for ' transporting ready -mixed concrete. 7. Concrete Volume in Truck: a. Limit to 63 percent of total volume capacity in accordance with ASTM C94/C94M when truck mixed. b. Limit to 80 percent of total volume capacity when central mixed. 8. Mix each batch of concrete in truck mixer for minimum 70 revolutions 1 of drum or blades at rate of rotation designated by equipment manufacturer. 9. Perform additional mixing, if required, at speed designated by equipment manufacturer as agitating speed. 10. Place materials, including mixing water, in mixer drum before actuating revolution counter for determining number of mixing revolutions. D. Aggregates: Thoroughly and uniformly wash before use. 1 E. Admixtures: 1. Air - Entraining Admixture: Add at plant through manufacturer- approved ' dispensing equipment. 2. Water Reducers: Add prior to addition of high range water reducing admixture (superplasticizers). 1 3. High range water reducing admixture (superplasticizers) and Air - Entraining Admixtures: a. Add at concrete plant only through equipment furnished or 1 approved by admixture manufacturer. b. Accomplish variations in slump, working time, and air content for flowable mixes by increasing or reducing high range water ' reducing admixture (superplasticizers) dose or air - entraining admixture dose at ready -mix plant only. ' c. Equipment shall provide for easy and quick visual verification of admixture amount used for each dose. CVO/391538A CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 1 JUNE 2010 03300 - 9 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 1 d. Add discharge amount to each load of concrete into separate dispensing container, verify amount is correct, and add to concrete. e. Additional dosage of high range water reducing admixture (superplasticizers) may be added in field using manufacturer- approved dispensing when unexpected delays cause too great of slump loss. 2.05 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL 1 A. Cement: Test for total chloride content. B. Fly Ash: Test in accordance with ASTM C311. C. Batch Plant Inspection: Engineer shall have access to and have right to inspect 1 batch plants, cement mills, and supply facilities of suppliers, manufacturers, and Subcontractors, providing products included in these Specifications. 1. g Wei hin Scales: Tested and certified within tolerances set forth in the Weighing NIST Handbook No. 44. 2. Batch Plant Equipment: Either semiautomatic or fully automatic in accordance with ASTM C94/C94M. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PLACING CONCRETE A. Preparation: Meet requirements and recommendations of ACI 304R and ACI 301, except as modified herein. B. Inspection: Notify Engineer at least 1 full working day in advance before starting to place concrete. C. Discharge Time: 1. As determined by set time, do not exceed 1 -1/2 hours after adding cement to water unless special approved time delay admixtures are used. Coordinate time delay admixture information with manufacturer and Engineer prior to placing concrete. 1 2. Adjust slump or air content at Site by adding admixtures for particular load when approved by Engineer. Then, adjust plant dosage for remainder of placement. Additional dosage at Site shall be through approved dispenser supplied by admixture manufacturer. 3. Maintain required slump throughout time of concrete placement and consolidation. Discontinue use of high range water reducing admixture (superplasticizers) and provide new mix design if it fails to maintain slump between 4 inches to 8 inches and produce good consolidation for , CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE CVO/391538A 03300 - 10 JUNE 2010 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 1 length of time required. Redesign mix adjusting set control- admixtures ' to maintain setting time in range required. D. Placement into Formwork: 1. Before depositing concrete, remove debris from space to be occupied by concrete. ' 2. Prior to placement of concrete, dampen fill under slabs on ground, dampen sand where vapor retarder is specified, and dampen wood forms. 3. Reinforcement: Secure in position before placing concrete. 4. Place concrete as soon as possible after leaving mixer, without segregation or loss of ingredients, without splashing forms or steel above, and in layers not over 1.5 feet deep, except for slabs which shall be placed full depth. Place and consolidate successive layers prior to initial set of first layer to prevent cold joints. ' 5. Use placement devices, for example, chutes, pouring spouts, and pumps. 6. Vertical Free Fall Drop to Final Placement: 5 feet in forms 8 inches or less wide and 8 feet in forms wider than 8 inches, except as specified. a. For placements where drops are greater than specified, use placement device such that free fall below placement device conforms to required value. 111 b Limit free fall to prevent segregation caused by aggregates hitting reinforcing steel. 7. Do not use aluminum conveying devices. ' 8. Provide sufficient illumination in the interior of forms so concrete deposition is visible, permitting confirmation of consolidation quality. 9. Joints in Footings and Slabs: ' a. Ensure space beneath plastic water stop completely fills with concrete. b. During concrete placement, make visual inspection of entire water 1 stop area. c. Limit concrete placement to elevation of waterstop in first pass, vibrate concrete under waterstop, lift waterstop to confirm full 1 consolidation without voids, place remaining concrete to full height of slab. ' d. Apply procedure to full length of waterstops. 10. If reinforcement is in direct sunlight or is more than 20 degrees F higher in temperature than concrete temperature before placement, wet ' reinforcement with water fog spray before placing concrete to cool reinforcement. 11. Trowel and round off top exposed edges of walls with 1/4 -inch radius steel edging tool. CVO/391538A CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE JUNE 2010 03300 - 11 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 E. Conveyor Belts and Chutes: 1. Design and arrange ends of chutes, hopper gates, and other points of 1 concrete discharge throughout conveying, hoisting, and placing system for concrete to pass without becoming segregated. 2. Do not use chutes longer than 50 feet. 3. Minimum Slopes of Chutes: Angled to allow concrete to readily flow without segregation. 4. Conveyor Belts: a. Approved by Engineer. b. Wipe clean with device that does not allow mortar to adhere to belt. c. Cover conveyor belts and chutes. F. Retempering: Not permitted for concrete where cement has partially hydrated. 1 G. Pumping of Concrete: 1. Provide standby pump, conveyor system, crane and concrete bucket, or other system onsite during pumping, for adequate redundancy to assure completion of concrete placement without cold joints in case of primary placing equipment breakdown. 2. Minimum Pump Hose (Conduit) Diameter: 4 inches. 3. Replace pumping equipment and hoses (conduits) that are not functioning properly. H. Maximum Size of Concrete Placements: 1 1. Limit size of each placement to allow for strength gain and volume change as a result of shrinkage. 2. Joints: a. Locate expansion, control, contraction, and construction joints where shown. b. When expansion or control joints are not shown, provide construction joints at maximum spacing of 40 feet. c. When expansion or control joint spacing exceeds 60 feet, provide intermediate construction joints at maximum spacing of 40 feet. d. Uniformly space construction joints. e. Vertical construction joint shall not be greater than 20 feet from wall corners or intersections. 3. Consider beams, girders, brackets, column capitals, and haunches as part of floor or roof system and place monolithically with floor or roof system. 4. Should placement sequence result in cold joint located below finished 1 water surface, install waterstop in joint. 1 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE CVO/391538A 03300 - 12 JUNE 2010 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 I. Minimum Time between Adjacent Placements: 1 1. Construction Joints: 14 days (7 days wet cure and 7 days dry cure). 2. Control Joints: 6 days. ' 3. Expansion Joints /Contraction Joints: 1 day. 4. At least 2 hours shall elapse after depositing concrete in long columns and walls thicker than 8 inches before depositing concrete in beams, ' girders, or slabs supported thereon. 5. For columns and walls 10 feet in height or less, wait at least 45 minutes prior to depositing concrete in beams, girders, brackets, column capitals, ' or slabs supported thereon. J. Removal of Water: Unless tremie method for placing concrete is specified, ' remove water from space to be occupied by concrete. K. Consolidation and Visual Observation: 1 1. Consolidate concrete with internal vibrators with minimum frequency of 8,000 cycles per minute and amplitude as required to consolidate concrete in section being placed. ' 2. Provide at least one standby vibrator in operable condition at placement Site prior to placing concrete. 3. Consolidation Equipment and Methods: ACI 309R. 4. Provide sufficient windows in forms or limit form height to allow for concrete placement through windows and for visual observation of ' concrete. 5. Vibration consolidation shall not exceed distance of 3 feet from point of placement. 6. Vibrate concrete in vicinity of joints to obtain impervious concrete. L. Hot Weather: 1 1. Prepare ingredients, mix, place, cure, and protect in accordance with ACI 305R. ' 2. Placement frequency shall be such that lift lines will not be visible in exposed concrete finishes. 3. Maintain concrete temperature below 85 degrees F at time of placement, or furnish test data or provide other proof that admixtures and mix ingredients do not produce flash set plastic shrinkage, or cracking as a result of heat of hydration. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain fresh concrete temperatures as specified or less. 4. Provide for windbreaks, shading, fog spraying, sprinkling, ice, wet cover, or other means as necessary to maintain concrete at or below ' specified temperature. 5. Prevent differential temperature between reinforcing steel and concrete. 6. Evaporation Retardant: As specified in Section 03370, Concrete Curing. CVO/391538A CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE JUNE 2010 03300 - 13 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 M. Cold Weather Placement: 1. Do not place concrete when ambient temperature is below 40 degrees F 1 or approaching 40 degrees F and falling, without special protection as specified or approved by Engineer. 2. Do not place concrete against frozen earth or ice, or against forms and reinforcement with frost or ice present. 3. Provide heated enclosures when air temperatures are below 40 degrees F. 4. Maintain surface temperature of concrete above 40 degrees F and cure concrete as specified. in Section 03370, Concrete Curing, for minimum of 7 days. 5. Provide maximum and minimum thermometers placed on concrete surfaces spaced throughout Work to allow monitoring of concrete surface temperatures representative of Work. 6. In accordance with ACI 306.1 and ACI 301. 7. External Heating Units: a. Vent heating units to atmosphere and do not locally heat or dry concrete. Where water cure is specified, maintain wet condition. b. Do not exhaust heater flue gases (causes concrete carbonation as a result of concentrated carbon dioxide) directly into enclosed area. 8. Maintain curing conditions as specified in Section 03370, Concrete Curing. 3.02 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS A. As specified in Section 03100, Concrete Forming and Accessories. 1 3.03 REPAIRING CONCRETE A. General: 1. Repair horizontal concrete surfaces using one of the materials specified 1 in Section 03722, Repair of Horizontal Concrete Surfaces. Select system, submit for review, and obtain approval from Engineer prior to use. 2. Repair vertical and overhead concrete as specified in Section 03720, Repair of Vertical and Overhead Concrete Surfaces. 3. Develop repair techniques with material manufacturer on mockup panels prior to starting actual repair work and show how finish color will blend with adjacent surfaces. Obtain approval from Engineer. 4. Obtain quantities of repair material and manufacturer's detailed instructions for use to provide repair with finish to match adjacent surface or apply sufficient repair material adjacent to repair to blend 1 finish appearance. 1 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE CVO/391538A 03300 - 14 JUNE 2010 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 5. Re air of concrete shall p to s a provide structurally sound surface finish, 1 uniform in appearance or upgrade finish by other means until acceptable to Engineer. B. Tie Holes: ' 1. Fill with nonshrink rout as specified in Section 03600, Nonshrink g P , ' Grouting. 2. Match color of adjacent concrete and demonstrate on mockup panels first. 1 3. Compact grout using steel hammer and steel tool to drive grout to high density. Cure grout with water. ' C. Exposed Metal Objects: 1. Metal objects not intended to be exposed in as -built condition of structure including wire, nails, and bolts, shall be removed by chipping back concrete to depth of 1 inch and then cutting or removing metal object. ' 2. Repair area of chipped -out concrete per requirements of Section 03720, Repair of Vertical and Overhead Concrete Surfaces. D. Blockouts at Pipes or Other Penetrations: 1. Install per details shown on Drawings or submit proposed blockouts for review. 2. Use nonshrink, nonmetallic grout, Category I or II as specified in Section 03600, Nonshrink Grouting. 3.04 CONCRETE WALL FINISHES A. Type W -2 (Smooth Wall Finish): 1. Patch tie holes. 2. Grind off projections, fins, and rough spots. 1 3. Patch defective areas and repair rough spots resulting from form release agent failure or other reasons to provide smooth uniform appearance. 1 3.05 CONCRETE SLAB FINISHES A. General: ' 1. Finish slab concrete per the requirements of ACI 302.1R. 2. Use manual screeds, vibrating screeds, or roller compacting screeds to 1 place concrete level and smooth. 3. Do not use "jitterbugs" or other special tools designed for purpose of forcing coarse aggregate away from surface and allowing layer of CVO/391538A CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE JUNE 2010 03300 - 15 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 mortar, which will be weak and cause surface cracks or delamination, to accumulate. 4. Do not dust surfaces with dry materials. 5. Use evaporation retardant. 6. Round off edges of slabs with steel edging tool, except where cove finish is shown. Steel edging tool radius shall be 1/4 inch for slabs subject to wheeled traffic. B. Type S -1 (Steel Troweled Finish): 1 1. Finish by screeding and floating with straightedges to bring surfaces to required finish elevation. Use evaporation retardant. 2. While concrete is still green, but sufficiently hardened to bear a person's weight without deep imprint, wood float to true, even plane with no 111 coarse aggregate visible. 3. Use sufficient pressure on wood floats to bring moisture to surface. 4. After surface moisture has disappeared, hand trowel concrete to produce smooth, impervious surface, free from trowel marks. 5. Burnish surface with an additional troweling. Final troweling shall produce ringing sound from trowel. 6. Do not use dry cement or additional water during troweling, nor will excessive troweling be permitted. 7. Power Finishing: a. Approved power machine may be used in lieu of hand finishing in accordance with directions of machine manufacturer. b. Do not use power machine when concrete has not attained 1 necessary set to allow finishing without introducing high and low spots in slab. c. Do first steel troweling for slab S -1 finish by hand. 1 C. Type S -3 (Underside Elevated Slab Finish): When forming is removed, grind off projections on underside of slab and patch defective areas, including small 1 shallow air pockets. D. Type S -6 (Sidewalk Finish): 1 1. Slope walks down 1/4 inch per foot away from structures, unless otherwise shown. 1 2. Strike off surface by means of strike board and float with wood or cork float to true plane, then flat steel trowel before brooming. 3. Broom surface at right angles to direction of traffic or as shown. 1 4. Lay out sidewalk surfaces in blocks, as shown or as directed by Engineer, with grooving tool. 1 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE CVO/391538A 03300 - 16 JUNE 2010 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 E-. - Concrete- Curbs: 1 1. Float top surface of curb smooth, and finish all discontinuous edges with steel edger. 2. After concrete has taken its initial set, remove front form and give exposed vertical surface an ordinary wall finish, Type W -2. ' 3.06 CONCRETE SLAB TOLERANCES A. Slab Tolerances: 1 1. Exposed Slab Surfaces: Comprise of flat planes as required within tolerances specified. 2. Slab Finish Tolerances and Slope Tolerances: Crowns on floor surface ' not too high as to prevent 10 -foot straightedge from resting on end blocks, nor low spots that allow block of twice the tolerance in ' thickness to pass under supported 10 -foot straightedge. 3. Slab Type S -A: Steel gauge block 5/16 inch thick. 4. Slab Type S -B: Steel gauge block 1/8 inch thick. 5. Slab Type S -A and S -B: Finish Slab Elevation: Slope slabs to floor drain and gutter, and shall adequately drain regardless of tolerances. 6. Thickness: Maximum 1/4 inch minus or 1/2 inch plus from thickness shown. Where thickness tolerance will not affect slope, drainage, or slab elevation, thickness tolerance may exceed 1/2 inch plus. ' 3.07 BEAM AND COLUMN FINISHES A. Type B -2: Match wall Type W -2. 1 B. Type C -2: Match wall Type W -2. 3.08 BACKFILL AGAINST WALLS ' A. Do not backfill against walls until concrete has obtained specified 28-day compressive strength. ' B. Place backfill simultaneously on both sides of wall, where required, to P revent differential pressures. ' 3.09 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. General: 1. Provide adequate facilities for safe storage and proper curing of ' concrete test cylinders onsite for first 24 hours, and for additional time as may be required before transporting to test lab. CVO/391538A CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE JUNE 2010 03300 - 17 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 1 2. Provide concrete for testing of slump, air content, and for making cylinders from the point of discharge into forms. When concrete is pumped, Samples used shall be taken from discharge end of pump hose. 3. Evaluation will be in accordance with ACI 301 and Specifications. 4. Specimens shall be made, cured, and tested in accordance with ASTM C31 /C31M and ASTM C39/C39M. 5. Frequency of testing may be changed at discretion of Engineer. 6. Pumped Concrete: Take concrete samples for slump (ASTM C 143/C 143M) and test cylinders (ASTM C31/C31M and ASTM C39/C39M). 7. Reject concrete represented by cylinders failing to meet strength and air content specified. B. Cold Weather Placement Tests: 1. During cold weather concreting, cast cylinders for field curing as follows. Use method that will produce greater number of specimens: a. Six extra test cylinders from last 100 cubic yards of concrete. b. Minimum three specimens for each 2 hours of placing time or for each 100 cubic yards. 2. These specimens shall be in addition to those cast for lab testing. 3. Protect test cylinders from weather until they can be placed under same protection provided for concrete of structure that they represent. 4. Keep field test cylinders in same protective environment as parts of structure they represent to determine if specified strength has been obtained. 5. Test cylinders in accordance with applicable sections of ASTM C31 /C31M and ASTM C39/C39M. 6. Use test results to determine specified strength gain prior to falsework 1 removal or for prestressing. C. Tolerances: 1 1. Walls: Measure and inspect walls for compliance with tolerances specified in Section 03100, Concrete Forming and Accessories. 1 2. Slab Finish Tolerances and Slope Tolerances: - a. Floor flatness measurements shall be made day after floor is finished and before shoring is removed to eliminate effects of 1 shrinkage, curing, and deflection. b. Support 10- foot -long straightedge at each end with steel gauge blocks of thicknesses equal to specified tolerance. c. Compliance with designated limits in four of five consecutive measurements is satisfactory, unless defective conditions are 1 observed. 1 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE CVO/391538A 03300 - 18 JUNE 2010 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 I 3.10 MANUFACTURER'S - S-ERV - ICES 1 A. Provide the following representative at Site in accordance with Section 01640, Manufacturers' Services, for installation assistance, inspection, and certification of proper installation for concrete ingredients, mix design, mixing, and placement. 1. Batch Plant Representative: I a. Observe how concrete mixes are performing. b. Be present during first placement of each type of concrete mix. I c. Assist with concrete mix design, performance, placement, weather problems, and problems as may occur with concrete mix throughout Project. 1 d. Establish control limits on concrete mix designs. 3.11 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK 1 A. After curing as specified in Section 03370, Concrete Curing, and after applying final floor finish, cover slabs with plywood or particle board or I plastic sheeting or other material to keep floor clean and protect it from material and damage as a result of other construction work. ill B. Repair defective areas and areas damaged by construction. 3.12 SCHEDULE OF CONCRETE FINISHES I A. Form Tolerances: As specified in Section 03100, Concrete Forming and Accessories. 1 B. Provide concrete finishes as scheduled: I Required Type of Form Area Finish Tolerances 1 Exterior Wall Surfaces Abovegrade /exposed (above a point 6" below W -2 W -B 1 finish grade) Backfilled/not waterproofed (below a point 6" W -2 W -A I below fmal grade) Interior Wall Surfaces I Buildings, pipe galleries, and other dry W -2 W -A areas /not painted or coated CVO/391538A CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE I JUNE 2010 03300 - 19 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 1 Required Type of Form - 1 Area Finish Tolerances Exterior Slabs Sidewalks /Pavement S -6 S -B Other exterior slabs S -1 S -A Interior Slabs Buildings S -6 S -B Beams and Columns Beams /not coated B -2 B -A Columns /not coated C -2 C -A END OF SECTION 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE CVO/391538A 03300 - 20 JUNE 2010 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 — SECTION 03355 CONCRETE FINISHING PART 1 GENERAL ' 1.01 SUBMITTALS ' A. Action Submittals: Manufacturer's product data sheet(s). B. Informational Submittals: 1. Manufacturer's written procedures for slab preparation, product application, protection of finished surface, and post- application cleanup. ' 2. Product manufacturers representatives' names and phone numbers. 3. Manufacturer's Certificate of Compliance for products to be furnished. 4. Manufacturer's Certificate of Proper Installation. 5. Statement of Qualifications: a. Manufacturer's Product Service Record. b. Application personnel. c. Manufacturer's representative. 6. Manufacturer's installation instructions. 7. Manufacturer's written instructions for maintenance and repair of floor finishes installed. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1 A. Qualifications: ' 1. Manufacturer's Product Service Record: Five previous projects at least 5 years old where product was used at representative coverage per square foot. 2. Floor Product Manufacturer: Manufacture components of floor material, except the epoxy, in own plant and under control of trained quality control manager. 3. Application Personnel: Four previous projects of successful installation of specified materials or manufacturer's training. 1 B. Color Samples: Minimum 2 -inch by 2 -inch Sample applications of floor • finishes available. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 DRY SHAKE HARDENERS A. Mix: Surface hardener with natural aggregate, premixed and packaged at factory, delivered to Site ready to apply. ' CVO 1538A /39 CONCRETE FINISHING JUNE 2010 03355 - 1 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 1 B. Natural Aggregate: Mixture of specially processed graded mineral =;aggregate, selected portland cement, and necessary plasticizing agents formulated, processed, and packaged under stringent quality control at the manufacturer's factory. 1. Manufacturer and Product: Natural concrete gray, "Surflex" by Euclid Chemical Co. or "Mastercron" by Master Builders, Cleveland, OH. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF DRY SHAKE HARDENERS A. Apply where indicated in Interior Finish Schedule and on Structural 1 Drawings. B. Application: 1. Application Rate: 2 pounds per square foot or as recommended by manufacturer. 2. Penetration: Top 1/8 -inch to 3/16 -inch depth of floor slab. 3. Commence application immediately upon completion of floating surface area; bleed water shall not be present during and after application. 4. Distribute 2/3 of specified total quantity evenly on concrete surface to receive treatment by mechanical spreader; do not throw shake product. 5. Apply first to areas adjacent to forms, entry ways, columns, and walls where rapid moisture loss may occur. C. Finishing: 1. Commence first mechanical float with finishing machines using float 1 blades as soon as shake has absorbed moisture, as indicated by darkening of the surface area. 2. Float until moisture from base slab penetrates through first shake application. 3. Immediately distribute remaining 1/3 of total required shake by spreader and commence second mechanical float, as specified above: 4. Compact surface further by third mechanical float as time and setting characteristics of concrete allow. 5. Do not add water to surface area. In drying conditions, an evaporation retarder may be used to prevent plastic shrinkage cracking and rapid surface drying, subject to manufacturer's recommendations and approval of Engineer. 6. Hand or mechanically trowel surface while stiffening progresses, as indicated by loss of sheen with blades relatively flat. 7. Run trowel blades as soon as possible to achieve representative finish obtained on mockup panel. 1 CONCRETE FINISHING CVO/391538A 03355 - 2 JUNE 2010 111 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 8. Avoid excessive - trowel- blade- speed which may — burn or- darken -floor surface resulting in loss of wear. 9. Remove marks and pinholes in final raised trowel operation. ' D. Curing: 1. Cure treated floor surface to meet the recommendations of the dry shake hardener manufacturer. Apply curing compounds as soon as possible ' without marring the slab surface. 2. Commence slab protection when curing compound is dry. a. Cover slab with nonstaining kraft building paper to protect area from droppings. b. Maintain floor free of traffic and loads for at least 10 days after completion. 3.02 TESTS AND INSPECTION A. Vapor Transmission Test: Conduct test on new and existing concrete to show that no surface moisture exists prior to application of specified special floor ' treatment, as follows: 1. Place polyethylene plastic sheet, minimum 4 feet by 4 feet and sealed along four sides with duct tape to prevent moisture transmission by evaporation, over concrete floor area for 24 hours. 2. Indication of moisture transmission will be apparent by accumulation of moisture on enclosed surface of polyethylene plastic sheet. 3. Do not apply concrete bonding agent until test results indicate moisture is not being transmitted from concrete surface. 1 3.03 MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES ' A. Provide manufacturer's representative at Site, for installation assistance, inspection and certification of proper installation, and training of application personnel. ' 1. Technical assistance with design and adjustment of concrete mixes to receive floor finishes and toppings. ' 2. Technical assistance to assure and certify application and installation of system being used. END OF SECTION 1 CVO/391538A CONCRETE FINISHING JUNE 2010 03355 - 3 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 SECTION 03370 ' CONCRETE CURING ' PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUBMITTALS 1 A. Action Submittals: 1. Manufacturers' data for the following products: • 1 a. Evaporation retardant. b. Curing compound. c. Clear floor hardener. 1 2. Curing methods proposed. B. Informational Submittals: 111 1. Curing Compound: Manufacturer's Certificate of Compliance showing moisture retention requirements. ' PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Curing Compound: 1 1. Water- based, high solids content nonmembrane forming, nonyellowing curing compound meeting requirements of ASTM C309. a. Moisture Loss: 0.40 kg /square m/72 hours maximum. b. Capable of meeting moisture retention at manufacturer's specified application rate. ' c. Compatible with clear floor hardener or dry shake hardener. 2. Manufacturers and Products: a. Euclid Chemical Co., Cleveland, OH; Kurez DR VOX. 1 b. Dayton Superior; Clear Dissipating Cure EF. B. Evaporation Retardant: 1. Optional: Fluorescent color tint that disappears completely upon drying. 2. Manufacturers and Products: ' a. Master Builders Co., Cleveland, OH; Confilm. b. Euclid Chemical Co., Cleveland, OH; Eucobar. 1 CVO/391538A CONCRETE CURING 1 JUNE 2010 03370 - 1 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 C. Clear Floor Hardener: 1 1. Silicak penetrating floor sealer. 2. Manufacturers: a. EDOCO 1125 Silicate Hardener; Dayton Superior, Dayton, OH. b. EUCO Diamond Hard; Euclid Chemical, Cleveland, OH. c. No or equal products will be accepted. D. Water: Clean and potable, containing less than 500 ppm of chlorides. 1 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 CURING OF CONCRETE A. Use one of the following methods as approved by Engineer: 1 1. Walls: , a. General: Where walls are to receive coatings, painting, 1 cementitious material, or other similar finishes, use only water curing procedures. b. Method 1: Leave concrete forms in place and keep entire surfaces of forms and concrete wet for 7 days. c. Method 2: Apply curing compound, where allowed, immediately after removal of forms. d. Method 3: Continuously sprinkle with water 100 percent of exposed surfaces for 7 days starting immediately after removal of forms. 2. Slabs and Curbs: a. Method 1: Protect surface by water ponding for 7 days. b. Method 2: Cover with burlap or cotton mats and keep continuously wet for 7 days. c. Method 3: Cover with 1 -inch layer of wet sand, earth, or sawdust, and keep continuously wet for 7 days. d. Method 4: Continuously sprinkle exposed surface for 7 days. e. Other agreed upon method that will keep moisture present and uniform at all times on surface of slabs. Do not use curing compounds. f. Where water curing for slabs during cold weather is not possible, use Engineer- approved curing compound at manufacturer's recommended coverage per gallon. g. Where curing compound cannot be used, special methods using 1 moisture shall be agreed upon prior to placing the concrete slabs. h. Protect slabs during cold weather with plastic sheets or other material inside required heated enclosure if foot traffic is 1 permitted on slabs. 1 CONCRETE CURING CVO/391538A 03370 - 2 JUNE 2010 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 B. — - Use -only water - curing -where additional - finishes- such -as clear - sealer, hardeners, painting, and other special coatings are required. 3.02 EVAPORATION RETARDANT APPLICATION 1 A. Spray onto surface of fresh flatwork concrete immediately after screeding to react with surface moisture. 1 B. Reapply as needed to ensure a continuous moist surface until final finishing is completed. 1 3.03 CLEAR HARDENER APPLICATION A. Apply per manufacturer's written instructions. ' END OF SECTION 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 CVO/391538A CONCRETE CURING JUNE 2010 03370 -3 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 1 SECTION 03400 PRECAST CONCRETE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Sealer for Exterior Surfaces: Product data with mixing /application ' instructions. 2. Form Liners: Manufacturer's literature and product data. 3. Calculations and Technical Data: Proposed details and design calculations for stresses in all critical sections of precast members for all loading conditions including transportation, handling, and erection. B. Informational Submittals: 1. For Precasting Manufacturers Not Listed in Article Quality Assurance: ' a. Experience record on production of precast concrete as shown, with information on precasting plant, that will indicate capability 111 to satisfactorily perform the Work. b. Evidence of current PCI plant certification. c. Complete list of architectural panelwork accomplished in past 2 years, including: 1) Type of structure. 2) Name of owner. 3) Address of completed work. ' 2. Certificate of Compliance: Certify admixtures and concrete do not contain calcium chloride. 3. Test Reports: ' a. For precast manufacturer's concrete test cylinders. b. Inspection of installed panels. ' 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE ' A. Qualifications of Precasting Manufacturers: 1. Precast Concrete and Precast Prestressed Concrete: Product of manufacturer with 3 years' experience producing precast concrete products of quality specified. 2. Precast Plant: PCI certified plant with current certification. 3. Precasting Manufacturers with Apparent Capability to Meet These ' Specifications: a. Olympia Precast, Redmond, Washington. CVO/391538A PRECAST CONCRETE JUNE 2010 03400 - 1 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 1 b. Thermomass, Composite Technologies, Boone, Iowa. c. Clark Pacific, West Sacramento, California. d. Knife River, Harrisburg, Oregon. 4. Calculations stamped by an engineer registered in the same state as the Project. B. Mockup Panels for Architectural Precast Panels: 1. Review Sample in Engineer's office as a guide in preparation of 1 mockup panels. 2. Construct: a. One full -size mockup panel for each different type of color or finish as shown to be used and installed in their respective places after approval of final precast Shop Drawings and calculations. b. In accordance with details shown using materials, forming systems, reinforcing details, cast -in inserts, and mix proportions, and as specified and approved. 3. Finish: a. Uniform in appearance and similar in all respects to Samples on display in Engineer's office. b. Constitutes standard of quality required in completed Work. 4. If mockup panel does not represent quality required, construct additional mockup panels until approved by Engineer. 5. Protect and maintain approved mockup panels at location selected by Engineer or until Engineer approves installation in their respective locations in the Project. 1 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS 1 A. Formwork: 1 1. One - piece, full length and without seams. 2. As specified in Section 03100, Concrete Forming and Accessories. B. Reinforcing Steel: As specified in Section 03210, Reinforcing Steel. C. Cement: As specified in Section 03300, Cast -in -Place Concrete. 1 D. Pretensioning Strands: Seven -wire, uncoated, stress relieved, ASTM A416, Grade 270. E. Aggregates: As specified in Section 03300, Cast -in -Place Concrete, for 3/4 -inch maximum size. Furnish of consistent quality, gradation, and color for precast architectural panels to produce uniformity of appearance in all panels. 1 PRECAST CONCRETE CVO/391538A 03400 - 2 JUNE 2010 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 F. Admixtures: As- specified -in- Section - 03300 - Cast -in - Place - Concrete. - -- G. Embedded Items: 1. ASTM A36 steel. 2. Anchor Studs: Headed anchor studs (HAS), deformed bar anchors (DBA), or threaded studs as manufactured by Nelson Stud Welding Co., ' Lorain, OH. 3. Furnish inserts for lifting walls, bolting stiffeners, attaching braces, and as otherwise required. H. Grout: Nonshrink, nonmetallic Type II grout as specified in Section 03600, Nonshrink Grouting. I. Sealer for Exterior Surfaces: 1. Silane Sealer: One - component penetrating sealer, hydrophilic (isopropyl alcohol as a carrier) with 40 percent active ingredients. 2. Manufacturers: ' a. Master Builders Co. b. Euclid Chemical Co. J. Precast Prestressed Concrete Members: Double tees, 8 feet wide by 1 foot 6 inches deep and hollow core slabs 4 foot 0 inch wide by 8 inches deep. Both elements shall be lightweight construction. ' K. Precast Insulated Architectural Panel: 10 -inch insulated concrete precast panel as shown on Drawings. Maximum unit weight equals 85 pounds per square foot. L. Insulation for Architectural Panels: Polyisocyanurate foam core board. 1. R- Value: 11. 2. Manufacturers: a. Dow Chemical Co. ' b. Rmax, Inc. 2.02 CONCRETE MIX ' A. As specified in Section 03300, Cast -in -Place Concrete. ' B. Design Strength: 5,000 psi at 28 days. C. Water /Cement Ratio: 0.38 maximum. D. For colored precast concrete, coordinate ingredients and procedures to achieve uniformity of color. CVO/391538A PRECAST CONCRETE .' JUNE 2010 03400 - 3 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 E. Form Liners: 1. Material: ABS. 2. Fluted Rib Texture: a. 1/2 -inch deep trapezoidal fins 2 inches plus or minus 1/2 inch on center. b. Manufacturers and Products: 1) Fitzgerald; 14339. 2) Greenstreak; No. 305. 3) Or equal. 2.03 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS 1 A. Precast Architectural Wall Panels: 1. Crack Control: PCI MNL -120. 2. Stresses: Limit tensile stress in the panels, from all handling and installation loads, to that less than that which would cause cracking on the exposed face. 3. Impact Design: Minimum 50 percent of member weight. 4. Tensile Stresses: Do not exceed those recommended in Chapter 5 of above referenced manual for a safety factor of 1.5 in critical sections under all loading conditions. 5. Design and reinforce to withstand handling and erection loads. 6. Minimum R- Value: R -11. 7. Minimum Concrete Face Thickness: 1 -1/2 inches. 8. See Drawings for exterior reveals. • B. Structural Precast and Prestressed Members, Except for Architectural Panels: 1 1. Meet applicable sections of PCI MNL -120. 2. Design for spans and superimposed live and dead loads shown plus dead loads of members. C. Prestressed Members: 1. Calculated tension at full service loads shall not exceed six times the square root of design strength except that in wet or corrosive service conditions, the calculated tension due to live load and dead load shall not exceed zero. This facility is considered a corrosive service environment. 2. Limit long -term camber growth to span length divided by 360. 1 1 PRECAST CONCRETE CVO/391538A 03400 - 4 JUNE 2010 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 2.04 F-ABRIC—A -T-ION ' A. General: 1. Comply with PCI MNL -117. ' 2. Reinforcing Steel and Pretensioning Strands: a. Place in position before concrete is cast. ' b. Keep clean and free from form oil or other substances harmful to bond. 3. Pretensioning Force, if Used: Determine by elongation and by gauge ' pressure. a. Method: Meet requirements of Prestressed Concrete Institute. 4. Forms: Produce smooth surfaces. 5. Concrete: Deposit, vibrate, finish, and cure in accordance with ' recommended practices of ACI 304R. Steam curing is permitted. 6. Release Strength for Pretensioning Method: Minimum 4,000 psi, unless ' otherwise approved. 7. Coordinate dimensions, determine type, quantity, size, and location of, and furnish necessary embedded items in precast concrete. Coordinate ' location of embedded items in cast -in -place concrete necessary to • connect precast items. B. Surface Finish for Precast Structural Units: Furnish concrete finish, as specified in Section 03300, Cast -in -Place Concrete, to additional concrete field placed on precast units. ' 1. Other Surfaces: Smooth screeded finishes, unless otherwise shown. C. Surface Finish for Precast Architectural Panels: 1. Exposed Surfaces in Building Interior: As shown. 2. Panel Interior Surface: As shown. 3. Meet standard of quality represented by approved mockup panel. 4. Furnish panels from same manufacturer. D. Sealer: ' 1. Apply to exterior surfaces of architectural panels, at precast plantsite, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 2. Protect surface until installed in the Work. 3. Repair damage as approved by manufacturer. CVO/391538A PRECAST CONCRETE JUNE 2010 03400 - 5 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 2.05 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Prepare minimum three standard concrete test cylinders for each 50 cubic ' yards or fraction thereof of concrete placed in the precast work in accordance with ASTM C31. B. Test and record concrete strengths. PART 3 EXECUTION , 3.01 ERECTION A. Verify that anchorage inserts are in correct locations. B. Handle and erect precast concrete with care as recommended by 1 manufacturer. C. Erect precast units plumb, straight, level, square, and in proper alignment. ' D. Fasten units securely in place and brace to maintain position, stability, and alignment until permanently connected and structure is complete and stable. ' E. Field Cutting: Not allowed without prior approval of Engineer. 3.02 PATCHING A. Mix and place patching mixture to match color and texture of surrounding concrete and to minimize shrinkage. B. Demonstrate patching method and obtain acceptance and approval. 1 3.03 CLEANING A. After installation, clean soiled precast concrete surfaces with detergent and 1 water, using fiber brush and sponge. B. Use acid solution only to clean particularly stubborn stains after more ' conservative methods have been tried unsuccessfully. C. Use extreme care to prevent damage to precast concrete surfaces and to 1 adjacent materials. D. Rinse thoroughly with clean water immediately after using cleaner. ' 1 PRECAST CONCRETE CVO/391538A • 03400 - 6 JUNE 2010 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 3:04 FIELD QUALITY - — 1 A. Inspection: 1. With Engineer, inspect precast architectural wall panels for chips, 1 cracks, discoloration, and other damage. 2. Compare every panel to approved mockup panel and finish sample panel. 1 3. Record location and condition of damaged or nonmatching panels. B. Resolution: 1. Repair damage to satisfaction of Engineer and Owner. 2. Remove panels with damage or repairs not acceptable to Engineer. ' 3. Install new acceptable panels in place of those removed. 4. Perform reinspection and obtain acceptance by Engineer. 1 3.05 PROTECTION A. Protect precast units from chipping, spalling, cracking, or other damage to the units after delivery to Site. B. After erection, protect units from damage. END OF SECTION 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 CVO /391538A PRECAST CONCRETE JUNE 2010 03400 - 7 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 SECTION 03600 NONSHRINK GROUTING ' PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUBMITTALS 1 A. Action Submittals: 1. Product data of grouts. t 2. Proposed method for keeping existing concrete surfaces wet prior to placing grout. 3. Forming method for fluid grout placements. 4. Curing method for grout. B. Informational Submittals: ' 1. Manufacturer's Written Instructions: Mixing of grout. 2. Manufacturer's Certificate of Compliance: a. Grout free from chlorides and other corrosion- causing chemicals. b. Nonshrink grout properties of Category II and Category III, verifying expansion at 3 days or 14 days will not exceed the 28 -day expansion and nonshrink properties are not based on gas or gypsum expansion. 3. Manufacturer's Certificate of Proper Installation. ' 4. Test Reports: Test report for 24 -hour evaluation of nonshrink grout. 1.02 QUALIFICATIONS ' A. For grout suppliers not listed herein, provide completed 24 -hour Evaluation of Nonshrink Grout Test Form, attached at the end of this section. Independent testing laboratory to certify that testing was conducted within last 18 months. 1.03 GUARANTEE ' A. Manufacturer's guarantee shall not contain disclaimer on the product data sheet, grout bag, or container limiting responsibility to only the purchase price 1 of products and materials furnished. B. Manufacturer guarantees participation with Contractor in replacing or ' repairing grout found defective as a result of faulty materials, as determined by industry standard test methods. . 1 38 CVO /39 5 A NONSHRINK GROUTING JUNE 2010 03600 - 1 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 NONSHRINK GROUT SCHEDULE A. Furnish nonshrink grout for applications in grout category in the following 1 schedule: Temperature Range Max. Placing Time 40 deg F to Greater Than 1 Application 100 deg F 20 Min. 20 Min. Filling tie holes I I I Precast joints I or II II ' Column baseplates single- I or II II story 1 Machine bases 25 hp or II II II less 111 Bases for precast wall II II II sections Machine bases 26 hp and III III III up Baseplates and/or III III III ' soleplates with vibration, thermal movement, etc. 2.02 NONSHRINK GROUT A. Category I: 1 1. Nonmetallic and nongas - liberating. 2. Prepackaged natural aggregate grout requiring only the addition of water. 3. Test in accordance with ASTM C1 107 /C 1107M: a. Grout shall have flowable consistency. b. Flowable for 15 minutes. 4. Grout shall not bleed at maximum allowed water. 5. Minimum strength of flowable grout, 3,000 psi at 3 days, 5,000 psi at 7 days, and 7,000 psi at 28 days. 6. Manufacturers and Products: a. BASF Building Systems, Inc., Shakopee, MN; Construction Grout. 1 NONSHRINK GROUTING CVO/391538A 03600 - 2 JUNE 2010 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 — — -- b. Euclid - Chemical - Co — Cleveland, —OH; N- - - S Grout. c. Dayton Superior Corp., Kansas City, KS; 1107 Advantage Grout. d. US MIX Co., Denver,-CO; US Spec MP Grout. e. L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc., Omaha, NE; Duragrout. 1 B. Category II: 1. Nonmetallic, nongas - liberating. ' 2. Prepackaged natural aggregate grout requiring only the addition of water. 3. Aggregate shall show no segregation or settlement at fluid consistency at specified times or temperatures. 4. Test in accordance with ASTM C1107 /C1107M: a. Fluid consistency 20 seconds to 30 seconds in accordance with ASTM C939. b. Temperatures of 40 degrees F, 80 degrees F, and 100 degrees F. ' 5. 1 hour after mixing, pass fluid grout through flow cone with continuous flow. 6. Minimum strength of fluid grout, 3,500 psi at 1 day, 4,500 psi at 3 days, ' and 7,500 psi at 28 days. 7. Maintain fluid consistency when mixed in 1 to 9 yard loads in ready- mix truck. 8. Manufacturers and Products: a. BASF Building Systems, Inc., Shakopee, MN; Master Flow 928. b. Five Star Products Inc., Fairfield, CT; Five Star Fluid Grout 100. ' c. Euclid Chemical Co., Cleveland, OH; Hi Flow Grout. d. Dayton Superior Corp., Kansas City, KS; Sure Grip High Performance Grout. 1 e. L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc., Omaha, NE; Crystex. C. Category III: 1. Metallic and nongas- liberating. 2. Prepackaged aggregate grout requiring only the addition of water. ' 3. Aggregate shall show no segregation or settlement at fluid consistency at specified times or temperatures. 4. Test in accordance with ASTM C1 107 /C 1107M: ' a. Fluid consistency 20 seconds to 30 seconds in accordance with ASTM C939. b. Temperatures of 40 degrees F and 100 degrees F. 5. 1 hour after mixing, pass fluid grout through flow cone with continuous flow. 6. Minimum strength of fluid grout, 4,000 psi at 1 day, 5,000 psi at 3 days, and 9,000 psi at 28 days. 7. Maintain fluid consistency when mixed in 1 -yard to 9 -yard loads in ready -mix truck. CVO/391538A NONSHRINK GROUTING JUNE 2010 03600 - 3 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 8. Manufacturer and Product: a. BASF Building Systems, Inc., Shakopee, MN; EMBECO 885. b. L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc., Omaha, NE; Ferrogrout. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 NONSHRINK GROUT A. General: Mix, place, and cure nonshrink grout in accordance with grout manufacturer's representative's training instructions. B. Form Tie or Through -Bolt Holes: Provide nonshrink grout, Category I and Category II, fill space with dry pack dense grout hammered in with steel tool and hammer. Through -bolt holes; coordinate dry pack dense grout ;application with vinyl plug in Section 03100, Concrete Forming and Accessories, and 1 bonding agent in Section 03300, Cast -in -Place Concrete. C. Grouting Machinery Foundations: 1 1. Block out original concrete or finish off at distance shown below bottom of machinery base with grout. Prepare concrete surface by ' sandblasting, chipping, or by mechanical means to remove any soft material. 2. Set machinery in position and wedge to elevation with steel wedges, or use cast -in leveling bolts. 3. Form with watertight forms at least 2 inches higher than bottom of plate. 4. Fill space between bottom of machinery base and original concrete in accordance with manufacturer's representative's training instructions. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 1 A. Evaluation and Acceptance of Nonshrink Grout: 1. Provide a flow cone and cube molds with restraining plates onsite. Continue tests during Project as demonstrated by grout manufacturer's representative. 2. Perform flow cone and bleed tests, and make three 2 -inch by 2 -inch cubes for each 25 cubic feet of each type of nonshrink grout used. Use restraining caps for cube molds in accordance with ASTM C1 107 /C 1107M. 3. For large grout applications make three additional cubes and one more flow cone test. Include bleed test for each additional 25 cubic feet of nonshrink grout placed. 4. Consistency: As specified in Article Nonshrink Grout. Grout with consistencies outside range requirements shall be rejected. 1 NONSHRINK GROUTING CVO/391538A 03600 - 4 JUNE 2010 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 5. Segregation: As specified - in Article Nonshrink Grout. Grout - when -- 1 aggregate separates shall be rejected. 6. Nonshrink grout cubes shall test equal to or greater than minimum strength specified. 7. Strength Test Failures: Nonshrink grout work failing strength tests shall be removed and replaced. 8. Perform bleeding test to demonstrate grout will not bleed. 9. Store cubes at 70 degrees F. 10. Independent testing laboratory shall prepare, store, cure, and test cubes in accordance with ASTM C1 107 /C 1107M. 1 3.03 SUPPLEMENT ' A. The supplement listed below, following "End of Section," is part of this Specification. 1. 24 -Hour Evaluation of Nonshrink Grout Test Form and Grout Testing Procedures. END OF SECTION 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 CVO/391538A NONSHRINK GROUTING 1 JUNE 2010 03600 - 5 I DURHAM PHASE 5B1 1 — _ SUPPLEMENT - 1 1 (Test Lab Name) 1 (Address) 1 (Phone No.) I 24 -HOUR EVALUATION OF NONSHRINK GROUT TEST FORM OBJECTIVE: Define standard set of test procedures for an independent testing I laboratory to perform and complete within a 24 -hour period. SCOPE: Utilize test procedures providing 24 -hour results to duplicate field grouting demands. Intent of evaluation is to establish grout 1 manufacturer's qualifications. PRIOR TO TEST: Obtain five bags of each type of grout. I 1. From intended grout supplier for Project. 2. Five bags of grout shall be of same lot number. ANSWER THE FOLLOWING QUESTIONS FOR GROUT BEING TESTED FROM LITERATURE, DATA, AND PRINTING ON BAG: I A. Product data and warranty information contained in company literature and data? Yes No I B. Literature and bag information meet specified requirements? Yes No I C. Manufacturer guarantees grout as specified in Article Guarantee? Yes No I D. Guarantee extends beyond grout replacement value and allows participation with Contractor in replacing and repairing defective areas? Yes No I E. Water demands and limits•printed on bag? Yes No 1 F. Mixing information printed on the bag? Yes No G. Temperature restrictions printed on bag? Yes No 1 *Rejection of a grout will occur if one or more answers are noted NO. 1 CVO/391538A NONSHRINK GROUTING 1 JUNE 2010 03600 SUPPLEMENT - 1 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 1 GROUT TESTING PROCEDURES A. Bagged Material: 1. List lot numbers. 2. List expiration date. 1 3. Weigh bags and record weight. Engineer will disqualify grout if bag weights have misstated measure plus or minus 1 2 pounds by more than one out of five bags. (Accuracy of weights is required to regulate amount of water used in mixing since this will affect properties.) B. Mixing and Consistency Determination: 1. Mix full bag of grout in 10 gallon pail. 1 2. Use electric drill with a paddle device to mix grout (jiffy or jiffler type paddle). 3. Use maximum water allowed per water requirements listed in bag instructions. 1 4. Mix grout to maximum time listed on bag instructions. 5. In accordance with ASTM C939 (flow cone) determine time of mixed grout through the flow cone. seconds 6. Add water to attain 20 to 30 second flow in accordance with ASTM C939. 7. Record time of grout through cone at new water demand. seconds • 8. Record total water needed to attain 20 to 30 second flow. pounds 9. Record percent of water. percent C. When fluid grout is specified and additional water is required beyond grout manufacturer's listed maximum water, ASTM C1107 /C1107M will be run at new 1 water per grout ratio to determine whether grout passes using actual water requirements to be fluid. Use new water per grout ratio on remaining tests. D. Bleed Test: 1. Fill two gallon cans half full of freshly mixed grout at ambient temperatures for each category and at required consistency for each. 1 2. Place one can of grout in tub of ice water and leave one can at ambient temperature. 3. Cover top of both cans with glass or plastic plate preventing evaporation. 4. Maintain 38 degrees F to 42 degrees F temperature with grout placed in ice and maintain ambient temperature for second container for 1 hour. 5. Visually check for bleeding of water at 15- minute intervals for 2 hours. 1 NONSHRINK GROUTING CVO/391538A 03600 SUPPLEMENT - 2 JUNE 2010 DURHAM PHASE 5B 1 Perform - - 6. orm final observation at 24 hours. 1 If grout bleeds a small amount at temperatures specified, grout will be rejected. E. Extended Flow Time and Segregation Test (for Category II and Category III): ' 1. Divide the remaining grout into two 3 gallon cans. Place the cans into the 40- degree F and 100 - degree F containers and leave for 20, 40, and 60 minutes. Every 20 minutes remove and check for segregation or settlement of aggregate. ' Use a gloved hand to reach to the bottom of the can, if more than 1/4 -inch of aggregate has settled to the bottom or aggregate has segregated into clumps reject the grout. 1 2. Right after the settlement test mix the grout with the drill mixer for 10 seconds. Take a ASTM C939 flow cone test of grout and record flow time. Maintain this ' process for 1 hour at ambient temperatures of 40 degrees F and 100 degrees F. a. 20 min , sec. @ 40 degrees F. b. 40 min ,sec. @ 40 degrees F. c. 60 min , sec. @ 40 degrees F. ' d. 20 min , sec. @ 100 degrees F. e. 40 min , sec. @ 100 degrees F. 1111 f. 60 min , sec. @ 100 degrees F. All Category II and Category III grout that will not go through the flow cone with continuous flow after 60 minutes will be disqualified. 1 Qualified Disqualified 1 F. 24 -hour Strength Test: 1. Using grout left in mixing cans in accordance with ASTM C 1107 /C 1107M for ' mixing and consistency determination test and for extended time flow test, make minimum of nine cube samples. ' 2. Store cubes at 70 degrees F for 24 hours. 3. Record average compressive strength of nine cubes at 24 hours. Grout will be disqualified if 24 -hour compressive strengths are under 2,500 psi for 1 grouts claiming fluid placement capabilities. Grouts that have not been disqualified after these tests are qualified for use on the Project for the application indicated in Nonshrink Grout Schedule. 1 Signature of Independent Testing Laboratory Date Test Conducted CVO/391538A NONSHRINK GROUTING JUNE 2010 03600 SUPPLEMENT - 3 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 SECTION 03720 REPAIR OF VERTICAL AND OVERHEAD CONCRETE SURFACES ' PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DEFINITIONS ' A. Low- Pressure Spray Mortar: Mortar applied by low- pressure spraying, or in small areas by hand troweling. 1 B. Nonstructural Defects: 1. Areas with defects that meet the following: ' a. Deemed by Engineer to be superficial. b. Less than 1 inch in depth. c. Not subjected to structural loads or heavy wear. • ' C. Rebound: Shotcrete material, mostly aggregates, that bounce off a surface against which it is projected. ' D. Shotcrete: Mortar pumped through a hose and projected at high velocity. E. Structural Defects: Condition or characteristic that detracts from appearance, strength, or durability of concrete. 1. Structural defects may be in the following areas: a. Areas subject to structural loading. b. Areas subject to heavy wear. ' c. Interior of hydraulic structure. d. Belowgrade structure. e. Display defects or parts of defect that extend 1 inch or deeper into concrete and deemed by Engineer as structural defect. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: ' 1. Product data sheets for each material supplied. 2. Samples: Mesh reinforcement and mesh anchor. ' B. Informational Submittals: 1. Mortar System: ' a. Manufacturer's installation bulletin. b. Manufacturer's recommended fabric size for mesh reinforcement. ' CVO /391538A REPAIR OF VERTICAL AND OVERHEAD JUNE 2010 CONCRETE SURFACES 03720 - 1 • DURHAM PHASE 5B1 2. Mesh manufacturers installation instructions and allowable load criteria. 3. Written description of equipment proposed for hydrodemolition for surface preparation. 4. Certificates: a. Certificate of Compliance that proposed product system meets or • exceeds specified performance criteria when tested in accordance with Article Field Quality Control. b. Mortar system Manufacturer's Certificate of Proper Installation. c. Shotcrete Nozzleman: Current ACI Certification. 5. Statements of Qualification: a. Shotcrete nozzleman. b. Mortar system manufacturer's representative. 6. Mortar system manufacturer's proposed modified test procedures for ASTM C 109 /C 109M and ASTM C882 test methods. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1 A. Qualifications: 1. Mortar System Applicator: a. Experienced applicator endorsed by mortar system manufacturer. b. For low- pressure spray mortar system in lieu of endorsement, complete mortar system manufacturer's demonstration in accordance with Article Manufacturer's Services. 2. Mortar System Manufacturer's Representative: As specified in Section 01640, Manufacturers' Services. 3. Shotcrete Nozzleman: ACI Certification in accordance with ACI 506R. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SHOTCRETE MORTAR SYSTEM (STRUCTURAL) A. Mortar Materials: 1. Blend of selected portland cements, microsilica, and specially graded 1 aggregates and fibers applicable for vertical and overhead surfaces. 2. Materials shall not contain asbestos, chlorides, nitrates, added gypsum, added lime, or high aluminum cements. 3. Noncombustible before and after cure. 4. Furnish in a factory proportioned unit. 5. Workability from 1/4 inch in depth and greater. 1 REPAIR OF VERTICAL AND OVERHEAD CVO/391538A 1 CONCRETE SURFACES JUNE 2010 03720 - 2 1 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 B. Mixed- Mortar- Properties: 1. Working Time: 5 minutes to 10 minutes. 2. Finishing Time: 10 minutes to 20 minutes. ' 3. Color: Dark gray. C. Cured Mortar Properties: ' 1. Compressive strength for 2 -inch cubes and in accordance with ASTM C109 /C109M, or 3 -inch cubes in accordance with manufacturer's modification to ASTM C 109 /C 109M: ' a. 7 Days: 6,000 psi minimum. b. 28 Days: 7,000 psi minimum. ' 2. Flexural Strength (Modulus of Rupture) ASTM C78 at 28 Days: 1,100 psi minimum. 3. Tensile Strength, ASTM C496/C496M at 28 Days: 400 psi minimum. 4. Chloride Ion Penetrability Based on Charge Passed, ASTM C1202: 800 coulombs maximum. 5. Mortar shall not produce a vapor barrier. ' D. Manufacturers and Products: 1. BASF Building Systems, Shakopee, MN; MBT P &R Shotpatch 21F. 2. Sika Corp., Lyndhurst, NJ; SIKACEM 103 with fibers added in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. ' 3. Euclid Chemical Co., Cleveland, OH; Eucoshot with Tuf- Strand SF added per manufacturer's recommendations. ' 2.02 LOW - PRESSURE SPRAY MORTAR SYSTEM (STRUCTURAL) A. Mortar: 1. One component, cement based, fiber reinforced, shrinkage compensated, gray in color, with a minimum 30- minute working time. ' 2. Cured materials mixed to a flow of 70 percent at five drops shall conform to the following criteria: a. Minimum Slant Shear Bond Strength: 3,000 psi in 28 days in accordance with ASTM C882 test method modified with no bonding agent. b. Minimum Compressive Strength: 6,000 psi at 28 days in ' accordance with ASTM C109 /C109M. c. Minimum Tensile Bond Strength ACI 503R, Appendix A or ASTM C496/C496M: 300 psi in 28 days. ' d. Minimum Flexural Strength: 1,100 psi in 28 days in accordance with ASTM C348. ' CVO /391538A REPAIR OF VERTICAL AND OVERHEAD JUNE 2010 CONCRETE SURFACES 1 03720 -3 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 1 e. Chloride Ion Penetrability Based on Charge Passed, ASTM C1202: 800 coulombs maximum. f. Drying Shrinkage at 28 Days: 0.1 percent maximum in accordance with ASTM C157 Modified. g. System shall not produce a vapor barrier. B. Sprayable, extremely low permeability, sulfate resistant, easy to use and requiring only the addition of water. C. Free of chlorides and other chemicals causing corrosion. D. Manufacturers and Products: 1 1. BASF Building Systems, Shakopee, MN; MBT P& R Emaco 588CI. 2. Sika Corp., Lyndhurst, NJ; SikaRepair 224. 2.03 POLYMER - MODIFIED REPAIR MORTAR (NONSTRUCTURAL) A. Polymer - modified, cementitious based, chloride resistant, flowable, ra in g Y color, working time of 20 minutes minimum, surface renovation mortar conforming to the following properties: 1. Minimum Slant Shear Bond Strength: 2,000 psi in 28 days in accordance in with ASTM C882 test method modified with no bonding agent. 2. Compressive Strength, ASTM C109 /C109M at 28 Days: Minimum • 7,000 psi. 3. Flexural Strength, ASTM C348 at 28 Days: Minimum 1,200 psi. 4. Chloride Ion Penetrability Based on Charge Passed, ASTM C1202: 800 coulombs maximum. 5. Splitting Tensile Strength, ASTM C496/C496M at 28 days: 500 psi minimum. 6. Drying Shrinkage, ASTM C596 at 28 Days: Maximum 0.12 percent. 7. Freeze Thaw Resistance, ASTM C666/C666M, at 300 Cycles: 90 percent RDF. B. Manufacturers and Products: 1. BASF Building Systems, Shakopee, MN; MBT P &R Emaco R300 CI and R320 CI. 2. Sika Corp., Lyndhurst, NJ; SikaTop 123 Plus. 1 REPAIR OF VERTICAL AND OVERHEAD CVO/391538A 1 CONCRETE SURFACES JUNE 2010 03720 - 4 1 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 2:04 BONDING AGENT -- 1 A. Epoxy resin concrete cement adhesive, specifically formulated for bonding plastic portland cement concrete or mortar to hardened portland cement concrete. 1. Mixed Bonding Agent Properties: a. Pot Life: 75 to 105 minutes. ' b. Contact Time: 24 hours. c. Concrete Color: Gray. ' 2. Cured Epoxy Resin Portland Cement Adhesive Properties: a. Splitting Tensile Strength, ASTM C496/C496M at 28 Days: 500 psi minimum. ' b. Flexural Strength, ASTM C348: 1,000 psi minimum. c. Bond Strength, ASTM C882 at 14 Days: 1) 0 Hour Open Time: 2,500 psi minimum. ' 2) 24 Hours Open Time: 2,000 psi minimum. d. Bonding agent shall not produce a vapor barrier. e. Compatible with mortar system. B. Manufacturers and Products: 1. BASF Building Systems, Shakopee, MN; MBT P &R Emaco P24. 2. Sika Corp., Lyndhurst, NJ; Sika Armatec 110. ' 2.05 WATER A. Clean and free from oil, acid, alkali, organic matter, or other deleterious substances, meeting federal drinking water standards. 2.06 ACCESSORIES A. Mesh Reinforcement: Welded wire fabric with spacing of wires, and wire size in accordance with ASTM A185/A185M, ASTM A82/A82M, and mortar ' system manufacturer's recommendations. B. Tie Wire: 16 gauge, galvanized. C. Mesh Anchors: 1. Manufacturers and Products: a. Powers Fastening, Inc.; Tie Wire Version of Power -Stud. b. Hilti Fastener Systems; Kwik Bolt II HHDCA. c. UCAN Fastening Products; UCAN Tie Wire Wedge Anchor. ' CVO /391538A REPAIR OF VERTICAL AND OVERHEAD JUNE 2010 CONCRETE SURFACES 1 03720 -5 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 1 D. Finishing Aid: 1. Manufacturers and Products: 1 a. BASF Building Systems, Shakopee, MN; MBT P &R Confilm. b. Euclid Chemical Co., Cleveland, OH; Eucobar. c. Sika Corp., Lyndhurst, NJ; Sikafilm. E. Flexible Cementitious Reinforcing Bar Coating: 1. Manufacturers and Products: a. BASF Building Systems, Shakopee, MN; MBT P &R Emaco P22. b. Sika Corp., Lyndhurst, NJ; Armatec 110. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Concrete surface repair system may either be shotcrete mortar or low- pressure 1 spray mortar for structural repairs, and hand or low- pressure spray applied polymer - modified mortar for nonstructural surface applications. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Identify unsound and deteriorated concrete by sounding techniques and review proposed extent of repair with Engineer. B. Remove unsound, honeycombed, deteriorated or otherwise defective concrete 1 from work areas by high - pressure water blasting machine capable of removing concrete surfaces to a minimum amplitude roughness of 3/16 inch or as shown on Drawings. Where final surface is required to be flush with 1 existing surface remove existing concrete depth as required for application of minimum thickness of mortar. C. To avoid tapered shoulders square edges of patch areas by sawing or chipping. D. Collect and dispose of water from removal operations in manner and location acceptable to Owner. E. Do not use power - driven jackhammers and chipping hammers, unless water blasting is not practical or may cause other damage. 1 REPAIR OF VERTICAL AND OVERHEAD CVO/391538A 1 CONCRETE SURFACES JUNE 2010 03720 - 6 1 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 F. - - Where - reinforcin g steel -is- corroded - remove concrete- minimum -of -1- -inch- - - -- - - - - ' clear around reinforcing bar for application and bonding of new mortar to entire surface of exposed reinforcing steel if the following surface conditions exist: 1 1. 50 percent or more of reinforcing bar surface is exposed during removal of concrete. ' 2. 25 percent or more of reinforcing steel surface is exposed during removal of concrete and extent of reinforcing bar corrosion is such that more than 25 percent of material is lost. ' 3. Bond between existing concrete and reinforcement has deteriorated as determined by Engineer. ' G. Clean exposed reinforcing steel of rust and concrete per recommendations of repair material manufacturer and in accordance with recommendations ICRI 03730. Coat exposed reinforcing steel with flexible cementitious reinforcing bar coating. H. Remove slurry from prepared areas before new mortar is applied. 1 I. Clean surface of laitance and contamination. Dampen area to be patched and an area at least 6 inches beyond for at least 24 hours to prevent absorption of water from patching mortar. Provide saturated surface dry (SSD) condition for existing concrete at time of application of mortar. ' 3.03 MESH REINFORCEMENT INSTALLATION A. Provide reinforcement when existing reinforcement is not exposed, and when mortar application is more than 3 inches deep, unless otherwise shown on Drawings. B. Install mesh anchors in accordance with mesh manufacturer's instructions. ' C. Fasten reinforcement to mesh anchors with tie wire. 1 D. Lap reinforcement a minimum of one mesh spacing and secure with tie wire at intervals no less than 12 inches. 1 3.04. SHOTCRETE MORTAR APPLICATION A. Apply mortar in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. ' B. Do not reuse rebound materials. 1 C. Apply mortar utilizing dry mix process. 1 CVO /391538A REPAIR OF VERTICAL AND OVERHEAD JUNE 2010 CONCRETE SURFACES 03720 -7 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 D. Mortar shall emerge from nozzle in a steady, uninterrupted flow. If flow becomes intermittent, direct flow away from Work until flow of mortar becomes constant. E. Minimum thickness of applied mortar 1 -1/2 inches or 2 inches of cover over existing reinforcement which ever results in a thicker coat. F. Slice off excess material with a wire screed approximately 5 minutes to 10 minutes after initial set. G. Apply finish to exposed mortar surfaces to match existing surfaces and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Steel trowel finish when finish coat is not applied. Apply full strength finishing aid. H. Rebound Removal: Continuously throughout mortar application, remove rebound, sand, and miscellaneous debris. I. Nozzle Position: Hold nozzle approximately at right angles to and at a ' distance from surface in accordance with mortar system manufacturer's instructions for type of application, nozzle, and air pressure used. J. Reinforcing Steel Encasement: Modify procedure of shooting mortar to better direct material around reinforcement bars. Prevent mortar from building up on reinforcement steel when shooting on, around, through, and behind steel to eliminate voids. Provide dense void -free encasement of reinforcement steel. K. Shotcreting More than One Layer: In accordance with mortar system 1 manufacturer's instructions. 3.05 LOW - PRESSURE SPRAY MORTAR APPLICATION 1 A. Mix mortar in mortar- concrete mixer attached to pump -spray equipment for spray application. Mix with a slow speed drill and jiffler type paddle or small 1 mortar type mixer for hand trowel application. B. After priming substrate per manufacturer's recommendations, apply mortar by ' low pressure spraying equipment unless noted otherwise. C. Bonding Agent: 1 1. Use bonding agent for hand applied areas. 2. Application of repair mortar over the bonding agent shall be completed within time frame recommended by bonding agent manufacturer. 3. Consult with manufacturer for optimum and minimum acceptable degrees of surface tackiness of coat. 1 REPAIR OF VERTICAL AND OVERHEAD CVO/391538A 1 CONCRETE SURFACES JUNE 2010 03720 -8 1 • DURHAM PHASE 5B1 D. - Work-mortar-firmly and- quickly into - repair - area. 1 E. Finish mortar with hand float application to smooth even surface matching adjacent concrete or steel trowel finish. Provide finishing aid at full strength. 3.06 POLYMER - MODIFIED REPAIR MORTAR APPLICATION (NONSTRUCTURAL) A. Mix mortar in mortar- concrete mixer attached to pump -spray equipment for spray application. Mix with a slow speed drill and jiffler type paddle or small ' mortar type mixer for hand trowel application. B. Hand Troweling: Apply bond coat of the repair mortar to the SSD prepared substrate before application of mortar. Do not apply more of the bond coat ' than can be covered with mortar before the bond coat dries. Do not retemper this bond coat. C. Place mortar by hand or low- pressure spray and trowel to specified surface finish. 3.07 CURING A. Prior to curing, apply water fog to mortar system in accordance with mortar system manufacturer's instructions. B. Commence water curing after mortar system application and when curing will 1 not cause erosion of mortar. C. Continuously cure mortar system for a period of 7 days. ' D. Do not membrane cure, unless method is part of mortar system manufacturer's instructions and approval is obtained from Engineer. E. Cure intermediate layers of mortar in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL ' A. Testing laboratory will be retained by Owner and will test the following per "modified" ASTM C 109 /C 109M and ASTM C882. 1. Production Samples of mixed materials during construction for compliance with the Specifications. A minimum of three Samples will be tested for each 1,000 square feet of mortar repair. 1 1 CVO/391538A REPAIR OF VERTICAL AND OVERHEAD JUNE 2010 CONCRETE SURFACES 1 03720 - 9 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 2. Core Samples from the completed p pleted repair Work. a. Two Samples will be tested for each 2,000 square feet of mortar repair. b. Cores will be 2 -1/2 inches or 3 inches in diameter to a depth equal to a minimum of 2.5 times repair mortar thickness. 3. Bond strength of mortar to structural concrete. Failure or movement of Sample when subjected to a minimum of 300 psi in direct tension will be unacceptable. B. Repair and fill holes using same repair mortar where core Samples have been removed. 1 C. Remove and replace unacceptable Work. 3.09 MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES 1 A. Provide mortar system manufacturer's representative at Site for installation assistance, inspection and Certification of Proper Installation, and training of mortar system applicators. 3.10 PROTECTION 1 A. Protect adjacent surfaces, and equipment, from being damaged by overshooting shotcrete mortar or low- pressure spray mortar. 3.11 CLEANING A. Remove overshot mortar and rebound materials as Work proceeds. Remove from Work waste materials, unsound material from concrete surfaces, material chipped from walls, and water used in preparation of application and finishing. END OF SECTION 1 1 1 1 REPAIR OF VERTICAL AND OVERHEAD CVO/391538A 1 CONCRETE SURFACES JUNE 2010 03720 - 10 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 — – - -- SECT -ION- 03722-- ' REPAIR OF HORIZONTAL CONCRETE SURFACES PART 1 GENERAL ' 1.01 SUBMITTALS 1 A. Action Submittals: Mortar system manufacturer's test and product data. B. Informational Submittals: ' 1. Mortar System Manufacturer's: a. Certificate of Compliance that repair products are one component ' with added water only, shrinkage compensated, specially designed for use on horizontal surfaces that are weather exposed, and receive traffic. 1 b. Confirmation material meets the requirements of ASTM C928. c. Confirmation latex bonding agents conform to ASTM C1042. d. Manufacturer's Certificate of Proper Installation. 1 e. Recommended preparation and installation instructions. 2. Written test report for each production and core Sample. 3. Statements of Qualification: a. Independent Testing Laboratory. b. Mortar System Applicator. 1.02 QUALIFICATIONS A. Independent Testing Laboratory: Meet criteria stated in ASTM E699. ' B. Mortar System Applicator: Trained and approved by mortar system manufacturer. ' 1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING ' A. Package mortar system products in 55 -pound moisture- resistance bags, 50 -pound pails, or 3,300 -pound bulk bags. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MORTAR SYSTEMS 1 A. System No. 2: ' 1. Slant Shear Bond: ASTM C882, 1 day, 2,500 psi minimum. 2. Application Temperature Range: 20 degrees F to 85 degrees F. 1 CVO /391538A REPAIR OF HORIZONTAL JUNE 2010 CONCRETE SURFACES 03722 - 1 DURHAM PHASE 5B 1 3. Compressive Strength: ASTM C109 /C109M, 1 day, 4,500 psi minimum. 4. Resistant to freeze -thaw cycles. 5. Modulus of Elasticity: ASTM C469, 1 day, 3.8 x 10 6. Flexural Strength: ASTM C348, 1 day, 850 psi minimum. 7. Split Tensile Strength: ASTM C496/C496M, 1 day, 850 psi minimum. 8. Scaling Resistance: ASTM C672 and weight loss (lbs /ft in accordance with ASTM C672: a. 25 Cycles: CaC12 0.003 and NaC1 0.067, maximum weight loss. b. 50 Cycles: CaC12 0.005 and NaC1 0.084, maximum weight loss. 9. Chloride Ion Penetrability Based on Charge Passed, ASTM C1202: 3 days moist cured and 39 days air cured, 960 coulombs maximum. 10. Manufacturer and Product: BASF Building Systems; Emaco:T415. B. System No. 3: 1 1. One - component cement based, rheoplastic, flowable shrinkage compensated repair mortar system: a. Slant Shear Bond: ASTM C882 modified, 7 days, 2,150 psi minimum. b. Application Temperature Range: 40 degrees F to 100 degrees F. c. Compressive Strength: ASTM C109 /C109M, 7 days, 6,000 psi minimum. d. Resistant to freeze -thaw cycles and deicing chemicals. e. Flexural Strength: ASTM C348, 28 days, 770 psi minimum. f. High slump design for improved placement, 4 inches to 6 inches. g. Chloride Ion Penetrability Based on Charge Passed, ASTM C1202: 650 coulombs at 28 days. h. Sulfate Resistance: ASTM C1012, maximum 0.006 percent length 1 change after 6 months. i. Modulus of Elasticity: ASTM C469, 28 days, 5.9 x 10 2. Manufacturer and Product: BASF Building Systems; Emaco 566 -CI. 1 2.02 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Flexible Cementitious Reinforcing Bar Coating: BASF Building Systems; 1 Emaco P22. B. Epoxy Bonding Agent: BASF Building Systems; Concresive LPL liquid or Anvil Bond. C. Finishing Aid: 1 1. Containing a yellow fugitive dye. 2. Manufacturer and Product: BASF Building Systems; Confilm. REPAIR OF HORIZONTAL CVO/391538A CONCRETE SURFACES JUNE 2010 03722 - 2 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 D. - - Membrane - Forming-Curing Compounds: BASF - Building Systems; - -- - - - ' Masterkure 200W. 2.03 MIXING 1 A. In accordance with mortar manufacturer's instructions. PART 3 EXECUTION ' • 3.01 PREPARATION A. General: 1. For patch areas 1/4 inch or deeper, follow IRIC Guideline 03730. 2. Remove unsound and deteriorated concrete by special 16,000 psi to 20,000 psi chisel pointed jack hammers capable of removing concrete to depths of 3/16 -inch minimum amplitude roughness when measured with a straightedge. 3. Square edges of patch areas by sawing or chipping to avoid tapered shoulders. 4. Collect and dispose of water from removal operations in manner and location acceptable to Owner. 5. Remove concrete adjacent to reinforcing bar to a minimum of 1 -inch clearance around reinforcing bar to permit new mortar to bond to entire periphery of exposed reinforcing bar if following surface conditions exist: a. 50 percent or more of periphery around reinforcing bar is exposed during concrete removal. ' b. 25 percent or more of periphery around reinforcing bar is exposed during concrete removal and corrosion is present to extent that loss of section has occurred. ' c. Otherwise evident that bond between existing concrete and reinforcement has been destroyed. 6. Clean exposed reinforcing bars of loose rust and concrete. ' 7. Replace deteriorated reinforcing with new reinforcing equivalent in cross - sectional area to original reinforcing. 8. Coat exposed reinforcing bar with flexible cementitious reinforcing bar ' coating before repair mortar is applied. 9. Keep areas from which concrete has been removed free of dirt, dust, and water blasting slurry. Remove contaminates from prepared areas before ' new mortar is placed. 10. Areas to receive mortar Systems No. 2 or 3 shall be saturated and surface dry at time of application. CVO /391538A REPAIR OF HORIZONTAL JUNE 2010 CONCRETE SURFACES 03722 - 3 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 B. Spalled Joints: 1. Saw edge 1 inch deep and 6 inches back from the old joint. 2. Remove unsound concrete between saw cut and the joint. 3. Place wood or fiber spacer to thickness of joint at joint line. C. Overlays: 1. Square cut edges to a minimum of 1/4 inch deep. 1 2. Do not feather edge area. 3. Perform special preparation recommended by mortar manufacturer. 3.02 APPLICATION A. System No. 2: Patches, joints, or overlays 1/2 inch to 3 inches thick. Return to 1 service in 3 hours to 7 days. B. System No. 3: Patches, joints, or overlays 1 inch or greater in thickness. 1 Return to service in 7 days or more. 3.03 INSTALLATION 1 A. Systems No. 2 or 3: 1. Remove standing water. 2. Apply bond coat slurry to prepared surface. 3. Immediately place mixed repair mortar into prepared area from one side to the other. 4. Work material firmly into bottom and sides of patch to assure a good bond. 1 5. Level repair mortar and screed to elevation of existing concrete. 6. Finish to same texture as existing concrete around patch. B. Joint Repair: 1. Remove joint spacer when repair mortar is hard enough that a pointed trowel will only penetrate surface less than 1/2 inch. 2. When repair mortar is cured and ready for use, fill joint in accordance with mortar system manufacturer's instructions. 3.04 BONDING A. Provide a slurry coat of mortar for mortar Systems No. 2 and 3 in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1 REPAIR OF HORIZONTAL CVO/391538A CONCRETE SURFACES JUNE 2010 03722 - 4 1 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 3.05 - - -F-IN-ISHING -- — — — ' A. Spray full strength finishing aid on fresh concrete to prevent rapid drying during hot and windy weather. 1 3.06 CURING A. Systems No. 2 or 3: ' 1. Provide water -based wax emulsion in accordance with moisture retention requirements of ASTM C309, Type 1 when applied at ' 250 square feet per gallon. Apply in compliance with EPA 40 CFR 52.254. 2. Apply membrane forming curing compound at no more than 250 square ' feet per gallon, as soon as finishing operation is complete. 3. Apply second coat of curing compound at no more than 250 square feet per gallon, after 3 hours, or when first coat is not tacky to the touch. 3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL ' A. Tests and Inspection: 1. Production Samples: 2. Prepare and cure Samples of mixed mortar material from mixer. 3. Provide minimum of three compressive Samples per ASTM C109 /C109M for each test specified for each 200 square feet of 1 mortar repair. B. Chain drag or light hammer tap repaired areas listening for hollow sound to ' determine areas that have not properly bonded to the old concrete: 1. Mark hollow areas for removal and replacement. 1 2. Saw hollow sounding areas to a new square edge, and reapply mortar as specified. C. Core Samples: 1. Core two 2 -1/2- or 3- inch - diameter Samples for each 2,000 square feet of repair work. 2. Cut cores through cured mortar repair and into base concrete to total depth equal to at least 2.5 times the repair mortar thickness. 1 3. Sawcut cores after removal to trim base concrete thickness to same thickness as mortar so bond line is at center of prepared Sample. 4. Bond Samples to steelplates at each end using epoxy bonding agent. ' 5. Perform tension testing using calibrated independent test laboratory equipment and eyebolts or threaded connectors tapped and threaded into ' CVO /391538A REPAIR OF HORIZONTAL JUNE 2010 CONCRETE SURFACES 1 03722 - 5 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 1 the baseplate so that the tension load is concentric with the center of the core Sample. 6. Bond line shall sustain'minimum of 300 psi in direct tension without failure or movement. D. Retest mortar repairs that do not meet test requirements. 1 E. Fill and repair test holes as specified herein. END OF SECTION 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 REPAIR OF HORIZONTAL CVO/391538A 1 CONCRETE SURFACES JUNE 2010 03722 - 6 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 -- SECTION- 03740— — — CRACK REPAIR EPDXY INJECTION GROUTING PART 1 GENERAL ' 1.01 DEFINITIONS 1 A. Crack: Complete or incomplete separation of concrete into two or more parts produced by breaking or fracturing. ' B. Crack Injection: Method of sealing or repairing cracks by injecting a polymer. C. Large Cracks: Wider than 0.015 inch. D. Small Cracks: Width equal to 0.015 inch or less. ' 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: ' 1. Physical and chemical properties for epoxy adhesives. 2. Technical data for metering, mixing, and injection equipment. B. Informational Submittals: ' 1. Manufacturer's recommended surface preparation procedures and application instructions for epoxy adhesives. 2. Installation instructions for repairing core holes with epoxy grout. ' 3. Manufacturer's Certificate of Compliance: Certified test results for each batch of epoxy adhesive. 4. Statements of Qualification for Epoxy Adhesive: ' a. Manufacturer's Site representative. b. Injection applicator. c. Injection pump operating technician. ' 5. Epoxy adhesive two component ratio and injection pressure test records for concrete crack repair work. ' 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications for Epoxy Injection Staff: ' 1. Manufacturer's Site Representative: a. Capable of instructing successful methods for restoring concrete structures utilizing epoxy injection process. CVO/391538A CRACK REPAIR EPDXY JUNE 2010 INJECTION GROUTING 1 03740 - 1 DURHAM PHASE 5B 1 b. Understands and is capable of explaining technical aspects of correct material selection and use. c. Experienced in the operation, maintenance, and troubleshooting of application equipment. 2. Injection crew and job foreman shall provide written and verifiable evidence showing compliance with the following requirements: a. Licensed and certified by epoxy manufacturer. b. Minimum 3 years' experience in successful epoxy injection for at least 10,000 linear feet of successful crack injection including 2,000 linear feet of wet crack injection to stop water leakage. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING ' A. Packing and Shipping: Package adhesive material in new sealed containers and label with following information: 1. Manufacturer's name. 2. Product name and lot number. 3. ANSI Hazard Classification. 4. ANSI recommended precautions for handling. 5. Mix ratio by volume. B. Storage and Protection: Store adhesive containers at ambient temperatures below 110 degrees F and above 45 degrees F. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Materials, equipment, and accessories specified in this section shall be products of: 1. BASF Building Systems, Shakopee, MN; SCB Concresive Series. , 2. Sika Corp., Lyndhurst, NJ; Sikadur Series. 3. Euclid Chemical Co., Cleveland, OH; Euco Series. 2.02 EPDXY ADHESIVE A. Two - component A and B structural epoxy adhesive for injection into cracks 1 or other voids in concrete structures for bonding or grouting. B. Adhesive Properties: ' Test Method 1 7 -day, Tensile Strength, psi ASTM D638 5,000 min. CRACK REPAIR EPDXY CVO/391538A 1 INJECTION GROUTING JUNE 2010 03740 -2 1 1 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 1 Test Method I Tensile Elongation @ Break, ASTM D638 1.0% min. percent 1 Compressive Yield Strength, 7 days ASTM D695a 8,000 min. @ 73 °F, psi I Compressive Modulus, psi ASTM D695a 1.5x10 m Heat Deflection Temperature, °F ASTM D648a 120 min.a I Water absorption @ 24 hours, ASTM D570 1.0 Maximum I Bond Strength @ 2 days psi ASTM C882 1,000 min. Bond Strength @ 14 days psi ASTM C882 1,500 min. I Slant Shear Strength: (5,000 psi AASHTO T237b Compressive Strength Conc.) Where test results are available psi. 1 Cured 3 days @ 40 deg F —Wet Concrete 3,500 min. 01 Cured 1 day @ 77 deg F —Dry Concrete 5,000 min. Cured 3 days @ 77 deg ± 3 deg F 5,000 min. aCure test specimens so that peak exothermic temperature of adhesive does 1 not exceed 100 °F. bSee referenced specifications for preparation method of test specimens. 1 2.03 SURFACE SEAL A. Sufficient strength and adhesion for holding injection fittings firmly in place, 1 and to resist pressures preventing leakage during injection. B. Capable of removal after injection adhesive has cured. I 2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL I A. Test Requirements: Perform tests for each batch of adhesive. B. Pot Life Test: I 1. Condition Components A and B to required temperature. 2. Measure components in ratio of Component B as stated on 1 manufacturer's label into an 8 -fluid ounce paper cup. I CVO/391538A CRACK REPAIR EPDXY JUNE 2010 INJECTION GROUTING 1 03740 -3 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 1 3. Start stopwatch immediately and mix components for 60 seconds using wooden tongue depressor, take care to scrape sides and bottom of cup periodically. 4. Probe mixture once with tongue depressor every 30 seconds, starting 2 minutes prior to minimum specified pot life. 5. Pot Life Definition: Time at which a soft stringy mass forms in center of cup. C. Fabrication of Slant Shear Specimens for Testing Bond of Injectable 1 Adhesives to Wet Concrete at 40 Degrees F: 1. Scope: Test method for preparation of diagonal concrete mortar blocks 1 used in determining slant shear strength of low viscosity injectable • adhesives in accordance with AASHTO T237 when concrete is wet. 2. Materials: a. Diagonal concrete mortar blocks prepared in accordance with AASHTO Test Method T237 and cured to produce a mortar with compressive strength of 5,000 psi or greater. b. Paraffin wax. c. Masking Tape: 3/4 inch wide. d. Suitable 20 -mil -thick shim stock. 3. Preparation: a. Place a 20 -mil shim between diagonal faces of two blocks and align so ends and sides are square. b. Bind block with masking tape covering gap between blocks. c. Leave a gap between blocks on one face uncovered for removal of 1 shim and application of adhesive. d. Paint melted paraffin wax over masking tape. e. Shallow dam may be built up around opening using paraffin wax 1 or modeling clay to help retain adhesive. f. Apply suitable capping compound to each end of specimen producing smooth surfaces perpendicular to longitudinal axis of block. g. Remove shim stock from gap opening. h. Soak specimen in water at 40 degrees F, plus or minus 3 degrees F for at least 24 hours. i. After soaking, remove specimen, shake free water from surface and gap opening. j. Prepare liquid adhesive. k. Within 5 minutes after removing specimen from water, start flowing adhesive into crack without entrap air bubbles. 1. Place specimen in 40 degrees F, plus or minus 3 degrees F ambient for curing within 15 minutes after removing specimen CRACK REPAIR EPDXY CVO/391538A 1 INJECTION GROUTING JUNE 2010 03740 - 4 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 -- -from -water for bonding. Do not expose specimen to beyond 77 degrees F during the 15- minute period. m. Cure specimen for 72 hours, plus or minus 4 hours at 40 degrees F, plus or minus 3 degrees F. ' PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL ' A. Structurally repair cracks in structures as specified in Section 03300, Cast -in- Y P P ' Place Concrete. B. Cracks: ' 1. Repair by injection of epoxy adhesive. 2. Repair cracks where specified or as shown. ' 3.02 PREPARATION A. Free cracks from loose matter, dirt, laitance, oil, grease, salt, and other contaminants. 01/ B. Clean cracks in accordance with epoxy adhesive manufacturer's instructions. C. Clean surfaces adjacent to cracks from dirt, dust, grease, oil, efflorescence, and other foreign matter detrimental to bond of surface seal system. D. Do not use acids and corrosives for cleaning, unless neutralized prior to injecting epoxy. 1 103 APPLICATION A. Sealing: Apply surface seal in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to designated crack face prior to injection. Seal surface of crack to prevent escape of injection epoxy. ' B. Entry Ports: ' 1. Establish openings for epoxy entry in surface seal along crack. 2. Determine space between entry ports equal to thickness of concrete member to allow epoxy to penetrate to the full thickness of the wall. ' 3. Provide a means to prevent concrete dusts and fines from contaminating the crack or ports when drilling. 4. Space entry ports closer together to allow adjustment of injection ' pressure to obtain minimum loss of epoxy to soil at locations where: a. Cracks extend entirely through wall. ' CVO/391538A CRACK REPAIR EPDXY JUNE 2010 INJECTION GROUTING 1 03740 - 5 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 1 b. Backfill of walls on one side. c. Difficult to excavate behind wall to seal both crack surfaces. 5. Core drill to verify epoxy depth where only one side of wall is exposed. C. Epoxy Injection: 1. Store epoxy at minimum of 70 degrees F. 2. Start injection into each crack at lowest elevation entry port. 3. Continue injection at first port until adhesive begins to flow out of port at next highest elevation. 4. Plug first port and start injection at second port until adhesive flows from next port. 5. Inject entire crack with same sequence. D. Finishing: 1 1. Cure epoxy adhesive after cracks have been completely filled to allow surface seal removal without draining or runback of epoxy material from cracks. 2. Remove surface seal from cured injection adhesive. 3. Finish crack face flush with adjacent concrete. 4. Indentations or protrusions caused by placement of entry ports are not acceptable. 5. Remove surface seal material and injection adhesive runs and spills from concrete surfaces. 3.04 EQUIPMENT A. Portable, positive displacement type pumps with in -line metering to meter and mix two adhesive components, and inject mixture into crack. B. Pumps: 1. Electric or air powered with interlocks providing positive ratio control of proportions for the two components at nozzle. 2. Primary injection pumps for each material of different mix ratio, including a standby backup pump of similar ratio. 3. Capable of immediate compensation for changes in resins. 4. Do not use batch mix pumps. C. Discharge Pressure: Automatic pressure controls capable of discharging mixed adhesive at pressures up to 200 psi, plus or minus 5 percent, and able to maintain pressure. 1 CRACK REPAIR EPDXY CVO/391538A 1 INJECTION GROUTING JUNE 2010 03740 - 6 1 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 D. Component A- and B reservoirs for stopping machine automatically when only one component is being pumped to mixing head. ' E. Proportioning Ratio Tolerance: Maintain epoxy adhesive manufacturer's prescribed mix ratio within a tolerance of plus or minus 5 percent by volume at discharge pressure up to 160 psi. 1 F. Ratio /Pressure Check Device: 1. Two independent valved nozzles capable of controlling flow rate and pressure by opening or closing valve to restrict material flow. 2. Pressure gauge capable of sensing pressure behind each valve. 1 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Epoxy Adhesive Two Component Ratio Tests: 1. Disconnect mixing head and pump two adhesive components simultaneously through ratio check device. 1 2. Adjust discharge pressure to 160 psi for both adhesive components. 3. Simultaneously discharge both adhesive components into separate calibrated containers. 4. Compare amounts simultaneously discharged into calibrated containers during same time period to determine mix ratio. ' 5. Complete test at 160 psi discharge pressure and repeat procedure for 0 psi discharge pressure. 6. Run ratio test for each injection unit at beginning and end of each injection work day, and when injection work has stopped for more than 1 hour. 7. Document and maintain complete accurate records of, ratios and pressure checks. B. Injection Pressure Test: 1 1. Disconnect mixing head of injection equipment and connect two adhesive component delivery lines to pressure check device. 2. Pressure Check Device: ' a. Two independent valved nozzles capable of controlling flow rate and pressure by opening or closing of valve. ' b. Pressure gauge capable of sensing pressure buildup behind each valve. 3. Close valves on pressure check device and operate equipment until gauge pressure on each line reads 160 psi. CVO/391538A CRACK REPAIR EPDXY JUNE 2010 INJECTION GROUTING 1 03740 - 7 DURHAM PHASE 5B 1 1 4. Stop pumps and observe pressure; do not allow pressure gauge to drop below 150 psi within 3 minutes. 5. Run pressure test for each injection equipment unit: a. Beginning and end of each injection work day. b. When injection work as stop for more than 45 minutes. 6. Check tolerance to verify equipment capable of meeting specified ratio tolerance. C. Crack Injection Tests: 1 1. Initial Cores: a. 4 -inch diameter for full crack depth taken from Engineer selected locations. b. Take three cores in first 100 linear feet of crack repaired and one core sample for each 500 linear feet thereafter. 2. Provide suitable containers for storage, curing, and transportation of test specimens. 3. Methods of Testing Cores: a. Penetration: Visual examination. b. Bond Strength/Compression Test: Concrete failure prior to adhesive failure. 4. Test Requirements: a. Penetration: Minimum of 90 percent of crack shall be full of epoxy adhesive. b. Bond Strength/Compression Test: Concrete failure before adhesive failure, or 6,500 psi with no failure of either concrete or adhesive. 5. Evaluation and Acceptance of Tests: a. If initial cores pass tests as specified, epoxy adhesive injection 1 Work at area represented by cores will be accepted. b. If initial cores fail either by lack of penetration or bond strength, crack repair Work shall not proceed further until areas represented by cores are reinjected or repaired and retested for acceptance. c. Obtain verifying core samples, number and location as selected by Engineer, after rework of areas represented by failed initial cores is complete. 6. Core Hole Repair: a. Correct Work as result of testing upon notification from Engineer. b. Refill initial and verifying core holes with an epoxy grout tamped and rodded in -place to form a dense fill. c. Finish surface to blend with adjacent concrete. END OF SECTION CRACK REPAIR EPDXY CVO/391538A 1 INJECTION GROUTING JUNE 2010 03740 - 8 1 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 — — — — SECTION 04230 — CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUBMITTALS 1 A. Action Submittals: 1. Shop Drawings: ' a. Information illustrating horizontal joint reinforcement and preformed control joint materials proposed. b. Grout proportions. 1 c. Letter of certification stating grout aggregates and mortar sand meet requirements of ASTM C33, including nonreactivity. ' B. Informational Submittals: 1. Method of placing grout. 1 2. Certified field test results within 5 days of performing specified tests. 3. Letter of certification from masonry unit manufacturer stating that units comply with IBC Table 2105.2.2.1.2. 4. Statement of acknowledgement of Quality Assurance Plan in accordance with IBC Section 1705.3 • 5. Method and materials for removal of efflorescence. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE ' A. Comply with the requirements and criteria of the NCMA, BIA, ASTM C90, ASTM C216, and ACI 530.1 for masonry finish and appearance, dimension tolerances, tolerances of construction, joint tolerances, and wall plumb tolerances. 1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Storage and Protection: Keep lime and other ingredients dry. ' 1.04 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Temperature: Do not lay masonry when ambient temperature is below ' 32 degrees F on a rising temperature, or below 40 degrees F on a falling temperature, or when there is a probability of such conditions occurring within 48 hours, unless written approval of procedures for protection from ' freezing is obtained from Engineer. CVO/391538A O/39 538A CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT JUNE 2010 04230 - 1 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 1 B. Moisture Protection: Protect masonry construction from loss of moisture during curing period of 7 days when ambient air temperature is 90 degrees F or greater and when relative humidity is less than 50 percent. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF MASONRY A. Minimum 28 -Day Compressive Field Strength (f m) of Completed 1 Assemblage: 1,500. psi. 2.02 MASONRY UNITS 1 A. General: 1. Furnish or cut special shapes for corners, jambs, lintels, and other areas shown or required. 2. Special units shall match color and texture of standard units. 1 3. Where units are placed so end of unit is exposed, such as at a corner or intersection, exposed end of that block shall have surface to match color and texture of sides of other units. 4. Furnish sound, dry, clean units free of cracks, prior to placing in structure. 5. Vertical Cells to be Grouted: Capable of alignment sufficient to maintain clear, unobstructed continuous vertical cell dimensions in accordance with ACI 530.1, Table 7. 6. Masonry unit size and shape shall allow for all placement patterns to prevent materials, such as grout or poured insulation, from escaping from cell being filled to adjacent cells where material is not intended to be placed. B. Concrete Masonry Units (CMU): 1. ASTM C90: Medium weight. 2. Nominal Size: 16 inches long by 8, inches high by thickness shown on Drawings. 3. Compressive Strength: 1,900 psi minimum, in accordance with ASTM C90, Table 2. 4. Color of Units: Natural gray. 5. Surface Texture on Exposed Surfaces: Ground smooth. 2.03 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS 1 A. Cement: ASTM C150, Type II, portland cement. B. Lime: ASTM C207, Type S hydrated. 1 CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT CVO/391538A 04230 -2 JUNE 2010 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 1 C. - Aggregates; -- -- — -- 1 1. Mortar: ASTM C144, sand. 2. Grout: ASTM C404. 1 D. Water: Fresh, clean, and potable. E. Mortar Plasticizer Admixture: 1. May be used instead of lime. 2. Manufacturer and Product: American Colloid Co.; Easy /Spred Plasticizer. F. Grout Admixture: ' 1. Controlled expansion additive. 2. .Manufacturer and Product: Sika Corporation, Lyndhurst, NJ; Grout Aid. ' 2.04 REINFORCEMENT 1 A. Deformed Bars: As specified in Section 03210, Reinforcing Steel. 2.05 MORTAR MIXES A. Minimum average mortar 28 -day compressive strength 1,800 psi. ' B. Proportions: 1. In accordance with ASTM C270, Type S. ' 2. Mortar plasticizer admixture may be substituted for lime. Batch in accordance with ICC, ICBO, BOCA, or Standard Building Code Current Reports for specified mortar type and strength. 1 C. Mixing: ' 1. Machine mix in approved mixers. 2. Keep mixer drums clean and free of debris and dried mortar. 3. Mix by placing 1/2 water and 1/2 aggregate in operating mixer. 4. Add cement. 5. Add remaining aggregate and water and mix for at least 2 minutes. 6. Add lime and continue mixing as long as needed to secure a uniform I mass, but no less than 3 minutes after addition of lime. Time addition of admixture in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Procedure used for adding it to mix shall provide good dispersion. 8. Follow manufacturer's instructions for mortar plasticizer admixture. CVO/391538A CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT JUNE 2010 04230 - 3 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 1 2.06 GROUT MIXES A. Proportions: Conform to ASTM C476 for coarse grout and as follows: 1 1. Compressive Strength: Minimum 2,000 psi at 28 days. 2. For Pouring: a. Fluid consistency (suitable for pouring without segregation) • meeting requirements of ASTM C476. b. Conform to IBC Table 2103.10, except as noted. 3. For Pumping: Fluid consistency with minimum seven sacks of cement in each cubic yard. B. Mixing: 1. Onsite: Follow procedure specified in Article Mortar Production. 1 2. Transit -Mixed Grout: Meet requirements of ASTM C476. 3. Add approved grout expansion admixture in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Premix admixture with water and add resulting solution to grout mix and thoroughly mix. Do not exceed quantity of admixture recommended by manufacturer. 1 2.07 WATER REPELLENT MASONRY SEALER A. Characteristics: 1. Water -based blend of silanes and siloxanes. 2. VOC compliant. 3. 12 percent solids /active content by weight, with density of 8.2 pounds per gallon. B. Manufacturer and Product: W. R. Grace & Co.; Infiniseal DB Sealer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Protect masonry construction to prevent efflorescence. Provide measures to prevent moisture from entering incomplete walls. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Prepare surface contact area of foundation concrete for initial mortar placement by one of following methods: 1. Sandblasting foundation and reinforcing dowels after concrete has fully cured to remove laitance and spillage and to expose sound aggregate. 1 CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT CVO/391538A 04230 - 4 JUNE 2010 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 2. Water blasting foundation- and -g reinforcing dowels -after concrete has partially cured to remove laitance and spillage and to expose sound aggregate. 3. Green cutting fresh concrete with high pressure water and hand tools to ' remove laitance and spillage from foundation and reinforcing dowels and to expose sound aggregate. ' B. Clean surfaces of loose material prior to initial mortar placement. C. Prevent surface damage to foundation concrete that will be exposed to view ' outside of contact area. 3.03 LAYING MASONRY UNITS A. General: 1. Conform to building code applicable to this Project and as 1 supplemented by these Specifications. 2. Do not start laying masonry units unless foundation wall is plumb ' within 1/4 inch in 10 feet or not straight within 5/16 inch in 10 feet. 3. Finish Tolerances (Measured on Interior Surfaces): a. Maximum permissible variation from plumb of masonry wall or of line of joints in masonry wall: 1/16 inch per foot of height and 1/4 inch in total height of wall. b. Maximum permissible variation from horizontal line along base of ' wall or for lines of horizontal joints: 1/16 inch per block and 1/4 inch per 50 feet of wall with proportionately greater tolerance for longer walls up to 1/2 inch in total length of wall. ' 4. Place units with chipped edges or corners such that chipped area is not exposed to view. ' B. Wall Units: 1. General: ' a. If necessary to move a unit after once set in- place, remove from wall, clean, and set in fresh mortar. b. Toothing of masonry units is not permitted. ' 2. Running Bond: a. Unless otherwise shown, lay up walls in straight, level, and uniform courses using a running bond pattern. ' b. Place units for continuous vertical cells and mortar joints to prevent materials, such as grout or poured insulation, from escaping from cell being filled to adjacent cells where material is not intended to be placed. CVO/391538A CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT JUNE 2010 04230 - 5 • DURHAM PHASE 5B1 C. Special Shapes: 1. Provide and place such special units as comer block, doorjamb block, ' lintel block fillers, and similar blocks as may be required. 2. Use required shapes and sizes to work to corners and openings, maintaining proper bond throughout wall. 3.04 BUILT -IN ITEMS A. Position door frames, windows, vents, louvers, and other items to be built in wall, and construct wall around them. B. Install masonry anchors to secure items to wall. C. Fill spaces around items with mortar or grout. D. Do not place electrical, instrumentation, or water conduits in a cell containing reinforcement, unless approved in writing by Engineer. Pipes, sleeves, and ' conduits shall not be placed closer than three diameters, center -to- center, nor shall they impair strength of construction. 3.05 MORTAR JOINTS A. General: 1. Straight, clean, with uniform thickness of 3/8 inch. 2. Horizontal and vertical mortar joints shall have full mortar coverage on face shells. 3. Vertical Head Joints: a. Butter well on each unit for a width equal to face shell,of unit, shove tightly so mortar bonds well to both units. b. Solidly fill joints from face of block to at least depth of face shell. 4. As units are laid, remove excess mortar from grout space of cells to be ' filled. 5. Place mortar before initial setting of cement takes place. Do not retemper mortar that has started to set or is not used within 1 hour. Retempering of colored mortar is not allowed. B. Exposed Joints: 1. Tool joints exposed to view after final construction, unless otherwise noted or shown. 2. Cut joints flush and as mortar takes its initial set tool to provide a concave joint. 3. Perform tooling when mortar is partially set but still sufficiently plastic to bond. 1 CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT CVO/391538A 04230 - 6 JUNE 2010 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 O 4. - -Per- form - tooling -with- tool -that compacts mortar, pressing- excess - mortar - - - - I out rather than dragging it out. 5. Rake out joints that are not tight at time of tooling, point, and then tool. 6. Rake and tool joints at split -face surfaces, interior and exterior. 1 3.06 REINFORCING ' A. Foundation Dowels: 1. Size, number, and location of foundation dowels shall match vertical wall reinforcing, unless otherwise noted. ' 2. When foundation dowel does not line up as intended, with vertical core, do not slope more than 1 horizontal to 6 vertical to bring it into ' alignment. B. Vertical Reinforcing: 1 1. Use deformed bars. 2. Hold in position near the ends of bars by wire ties to dowels or by ' reinforcing positioners. 3. Lap reinforcing bars as shown, where spliced and wire tie together. 4. Minimum Bar Clearance: One bar diameter from masonry and from additional parallel bars in same grout space. 5. Hold in position at maximum intervals of 160 bar diameters by reinforcing positioners. C. Horizontal Reinforcing: 1. Use deformed bars. 1 2. Lay on webs of bond beam units and place as wall is built. 3. Lap reinforcing bars as shown, where spliced and wire tie together. 4. Minimum Bar Clearance: One bar diameter from masonry and from additional parallel bars in same grout space. 5. Terminate reinforcing bars 2 inches clear from control joints as shown. 1 3.07 MORTAR PRODUCTION ' A. General: 1. Mix ingredients 3 minutes to 5 minutes after all ingredients are introduced. 2. Provide volumetric control by using batching box or similar measuring device. Do not use shovel to introduce materials directly into batch. ' 3. Keep sand damp and loose. 4. Use cool mix water. CVO/391538A CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT JUNE 2010 04230 - 7 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 1 3.08 GROUTING A. General: 1. Do not mix, convey, or place with equipment constructed of aluminum. 2. Secure vertical and horizontal reinforcement, ties, bolts, anchors, and other required embedments in place; inspect and verify before placing grout. 3. Grout beams over openings in one continuous operation. 4. Maintain vertical alignment in ACI 530.1, Table 7. 5. Place grout as soon as possible after mortar has set to reduce shrinkage cracking of vertical joints. 6. Vertical Reinforcement: a. First wire tie to foundation dowels, then build wall around it. • b. Provide reinforcing positioners or approved cross bracing to secure top of steel in place. c.' Do not drop in vertical steel after block is laid, unless reinforcing positioners are provided in the course above previously grouted course. B. Grouting Requirements: 1. Slump: 8 inches to 11 inches. 2. Do not start grouting until wall has cured for 24 hours, minimum. 3. Solid Grouting Requirements: Solid grout all walls. 4. Form horizontal construction joints between pours by stopping grout pour 1 -1/2 inches below a mortar joint, except at a bond beam; stop pour 1/2 inch below top of masonry unit. 5. Fully embed horizontal steel with grout in an uninterrupted pour. 6. Do not construct wall more than one course above top of grout pour prior to placing grout. 7. Vibration: a. Use internal "pencil" type, low energy vibrator to thoroughly consolidate grout and reduce amount of air voids. Do not use concrete vibrators. 1 b. After waiting sufficient time to permit grout to become plastic, but before it has taken any set, reconsolidate grout. c. Waiting period will vary depending upon weather conditions and 1 block absorption rates, but under "normal" weather conditions with average masonry units the waiting period should be between 30 minutes to 60 minutes. 8. Cleanouts: a. Provide for grout pours over 5 feet in height. b. Provide of sufficient size to permit cleaning of cell, positioning of reinforcing, and inspection at bottom of every vertical cell containing reinforcing. CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT CVO/391538A 04230 - 8 JUNE 2010 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 • Location: - c. ocation: Concealed from view after final construction, unless otherwise approved by Engineer. d. After wall has been inspected and approved and prior to grouting, cap cleanouts in a manner that will seal them from grout leakage ' and provide a flush finish. 3.09 WATER REPELLENT MASONRY SEALER 1 A. Apply where indicated in Interior Finish Schedule. B. Remove efflorescence prior to applying water repellents. Dispose of waste 1 generated. ' C. Apply to weather exposed exterior concrete masonry walls. D. Repoint loose, cracked, or disintegrating mortar at least 7 days prior to application. Ensure joint sealants and caulking are fully cured and wall surfaces are clean, dry, and free of chemical cleaners, efflorescence, dirt, oils, mortar smears, and other surface contaminants. E. Follow manufacturer's recommendations for weather conditions during application. F. Test a 5 -foot by 5 -foot wall area to assure proper coverage, desired water repellency properties, and desired surface appearance when sealer is fully dried. ' G. Apply with spray, brush, or roller following manufacturer's recommendations, at a coverage rate of 50 square feet to 150 square feet per gallon, as 1 determined by testing. Use two coat application where recommended by manufacturer. 3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Special Inspection of masonry in accordance with IBC Section 1704.5. B. Masonry shall be tested by testing agency retained by Owner, in accordance with ASTM C1314, Method B, as modified by ACI 530.1 /ASCE 6. ' C. Masonry test prisms, when required, shall be constructed onsite with same materials and workmanship to be used for Project. ' D. Provide adequate facilities for safe storage and proper curing of masonry prisms, mortar samples, and grout samples, as applicable, onsite for first 24 hours, and for additional time as may be required before transporting to test lab. CVO/391538A CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT JUNE 2010 04230 - 9 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 1 E. Masonry Testing: 1. Unit Strength Method: 1 a. Method and frequency for mortar, grout, and masonry unit sampling and testing in accordance with IBC 2105.2.2.1. b. Provide masonry units for test samples required. F. Corrective Action: 1. If compressive strength tests made prior to construction of permanent structure fail to meet Specifications, adjustments shall be made to mix designs for mortar, or grout, or both, as needed to produce specified strength. Masonry units shall also be tested to verify compliance to requirements of ASTM C90, Type 1. 2. If strength tests performed on materials representative of in -place construction fail to meet Specifications, prisms or cores shall be cut from constructed walls in sufficient locations to adequately determine strength in accordance with IBC 2105.3. 3.11 CLEANING A. Immediately after completion of grouting, clean masonry surfaces of excess mortar, grout spillage, scum, stains, dirt, and other foreign substances using clean water and fiber brushes. B. Clean walls not requiring painting or sealing so there are no visible stains. 3.12 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK A. Do not allow grout and mortar stains to dry on face of exposed masonry. ' B. Protect tops of walls at all times. Cover tops of walls with waterproof paper when rain or snow is imminent and when the Work is discontinued. C. Adequately brace walls until walls and roof are completed. D. Provide sufficient bracing to protect walls against damage from elements, including wind and snow. E. Protect masonry against freezing for minimum 72 hours after being laid. F. Protect masonry from damage until final acceptance of the Work. Damaged 1 units will not be accepted. END OF SECTION 1 1 CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT CVO/391538A 04230 - 10 JUNE 2010 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 SECTION 05050 WELDING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DEFINITIONS 1 A. CJP: Complete Joint Penetration. B. CWI: Certified Welding Inspector. ' C. MT: Magnetic Particle Testing. D. NDE: Nondestructive Examination. E. NDT: Nondestructive Testing. ' F. PJP: Partial Joint Penetration. ' G. PQR: Procedure Qualification Record. H. PT: Liquid Penetrant Testing. I. RT: Radiographic Testing. ' J. UT: Ultrasonic Testing. K. VT: Visual Testing. ' L. WPQ: Welder/Welding Operator Performance Qualification. M. WPS: Welding Procedure Specification. ' 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Shop and field WPSs and PQRs. ' 2. NDT procedure specifications prepared in accordance with ASME BPVC SEC V. 3. Welding Data (Shop and Field): a. Show on Shop Drawings or a weld map complete information regarding base metal specification designation, location, type, size, and extent of welds with reference called out for WPS and ' NDE numbers in tails of combined welding and NDE symbols as indicated in AWS A2.4. b. Distinguish between shop and field welds. CVO /391538A WELDING JUNE 2010 05050 - 1 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 c. Indicate, by welding symbols or sketches, details of welded joints and preparation of base metal. Provide complete joint welding details showing bevels, groove angles, and root openings for welds. d. For pipe fittings, provide a joint weld beveling diagram. Refer to AWS D1.1 /D1.1M, Annex P Local Dihedral Angle that can be used to calculate bevels for weld joint details of intersecting pipes. e. Welding and NDE symbols shall be in accordance with AWS A2.4. f. Welding terms and definitions shall be in accordance with AWS A3.0. g. Submit welding data together with shop drawings as a complete package. B. Informational Submittals: 1. WPQs. 2. CWI credentials. 3. Testing agency personnel credentials. 4. CWI reports. 5. Welding Documentation: Submit on appropriate forms in referenced welding codes. 1.03 QUALIFICATIONS A. WPSs: In accordance with AWS D1.1 /D1.1M (Annex N Forms) and ASME BPVC SEC IX (Forms QW -482 and QW -483). B. WPQs: In accordance with AWS D1.1 /D1.1M (Annex N Forms) and ASME BPVC SEC IX (Form QW -484). C. CWI: Certified in accordance with AWS QC1, and having prior experience with the welding codes specified. Alternate welding inspector qualifications require approval by the Engineer. D. Testing Agency: Personnel performing tests shall be NDT Level II certified in 1 accordance with ASNT SNT- TC -1A. 1.04 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING 1 A. Unless otherwise specified, all Submittals required in this section shall be submitted and approved prior to commencement of welding operations. 1 1 WELDING CVO/391538A 05050 - 2 JUNE 2010 • DURHAM PHASE 5B1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS - 1 2.01 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. CWI shall be present whenever shop welding is performed. CWI shall 1 perform inspection, as necessary, prior to assembly, during assembly, during welding, and after welding. CWI shall perform inspections as required in ' AWS D1.1 /D1.1M or referenced welding code and as follows: 1. Verifying conformance of specified job material and proper storage. 2. Monitoring conformance with approved WPS. 3. Monitoring conformance of WPQ. 4. Inspecting weld joint fit -up and performing in- process inspection. ' 5. Providing 100 percent visual inspection of welds. 6. Supervising nondestructive testing personnel and evaluating test results. 7. Maintaining records and preparing report confirming results of ' inspection and testing comply with the Work. PART 3 EXECUTION 1 3.01 GENERAL A. Welding and Fabrication by Welding: Conform to governing welding codes referenced in attached Welding and Nondestructive Testing Table. 3.02 NONDESTRUCTIVE WELD TESTING REQUIREMENTS ' A. Weld Inspection Criteria: 1 1. Selection of welds to be tested unless 100 percent NDT is specified herein, shall be as agreed upon between Engineer and Contractor. 2. Unless otherwise specified, perform NDT of welds at a frequency as 1 shown below or in the attached table in accordance with the referenced welding codes as follows. Perform UT on CJP groove welds that cannot be readily radiographed. In case there is a conflict the higher frequency ' level of NDT shall apply: a. CJP Butt Joint Welds: 10 percent random RT. b. CJP Groove Welds: 10 percent random UT. c. Fillet Welds and PJP Groove Welds: 10 percent random PT or MT. ' d. All Welds: 100 percent VT. 3. Weld Acceptance: a. VT: 1) Structural Pipe and Tubing: AWS D1.1 /D1.1M, Paragraph 6.9, Visual Inspection, Tubular Connections. CVO /391538A WELDING JUNE 2010 05050 - 3 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 1 2) All Other Structural Steel: AWS D1.1 /D1.1M, Paragraph 6.9, Visual Inspection, Statically Loaded Nontubular Connections. 3) Stud Connections: AWS D1.1 /D1.1M, Paragraph 7.8.1. b. UT: Perform UT of CJP groove welds in accordance with AWS D1.1 /D1.1M, Paragraph 6.13.3, C1ass Indications. c. RT: Perform RT of CJP butt joint welds in accordance with AWS D1.1 /D1.1M, Paragraph 6.12.1. d. PT or MT: 1) Perform on fillet and PJP groove welds in accordance with AWS D1.1 /D1.1M, Paragraph 6.10. 2) Acceptance shall be in accordance with VT standards specified above. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 1 A. The CWI shall be present whenever field welding is performed. The CWI shall perform inspection, as necessary, prior to assembly, during assembly, during welding, and after welding. CWI shall perform inspections as required in AWS D1.1 /D1.1M or referenced welding code and as follows: 1 1. Verifying conformance of specified job material and proper storage. 2. Monitoring conformance with approved WPS. 3. Monitoring conformance of WPQ. 4. Inspecting weld joint fit -up and performing in- process inspection. 5. Providing 100 percent visual inspection of all welds. 6. Supervising nondestructive testing personnel and evaluating test results. 7. Maintaining records and preparing report confirming results of inspection and testing comply with the Work. 1 3.04 WELD DEFECT REPAIR A. Repair and retest rejectable weld defects until sound weld metal has been 1 deposited in accordance with appropriate welding codes. 3.05 SUPPLEMENT 1 A. The supplement listed below, following "End of Section," is a part of this Specification. 1. Welding and Nondestructive Testing Table. 1 END OF SECTION 1 1 WELDING G CVO/391538A 05050 - 4 JUNE 2010 1 I DURHAM PHASE 5B1 1 I • Welding and Nondestructive Testing Submit • Onsite Written NDT I Specification Governing Welding Codes Submit Submit CWI Procedure WPQ Req'd S Section or Standards WPS Specifications NDT Requirements 03400 AWS D1.1 /D1.1M, Structural Yes Yes Yes Yes 100% VT; see Precast Concrete Welding Code - Steel and Section 03400 I AWS D 1.4/D1.4M, Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel 05500 AWS D1.1 /D1.1M, Structural Yes Yes Yes Yes 100% VT; sec I Metal Fabrications Welding Code —Steel or Section 05500 AWS D1.2 /D1.2M, Structural Welding Code - Aluminum or AWS D1.6/D1.6M, Structural I Welding Code - Stainless Steel 05520 AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Structural No No No No 100% VT; see Metal Railings Welding Code - Steel or Section 05520 I AWS D1.2/D1.2M, Structural Welding Code - Aluminum 05530 AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Structural No No No No 100% VT; see I Metal Gratings Welding Code - Steel or • Section 05530 AWS D1.2/D1.2M, Structural Welding Code - Aluminum 0 . 1 1 1 1 1 1 • CVO /391538A WELDING I JUNE 2010 05050 SUPPLEMENT - 1 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 — SECTION 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 GENERAL ' 1.01 DEFINITIONS A. Exterior Area: Location not protected from the weather by a building or other enclosed structure. B. Interior Dry Area (Electrical Room): Location inside building or structure where floor is not subject to liquid spills or washdown, nor where wall or roof slab is common to a water - holding or earth- retaining structure. ' C. Interior Wet Area (Compactor Room): Location inside building or structure where floor is sloped to floor drains or gutters and is subject to liquid spills or washdown, or where wall, floor, or roof slab is common to a water - holding or earth- retain structure. D. Submerged: ing Location at or below top of wall of open water - holding structure, such as a channel or sump, or wall, ceiling or floor surface inside a covered water - holding structure, or exterior belowgrade wall or roof surface of water - holding structure, open or covered. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: ' 1. Shop Drawings: a. Metal fabrications, including welding and fastener information. b. Specific instructions for concrete anchor installation, including ' drilled hole size, preparation, placement, procedures, and instructions for safe handling of anchoring systems. ' B. Informational Submittals: 1. Concrete and Masonry Drilled Anchors: ' a. Manufacturer's product description and installation procedures. b. Current test data or ICC Evaluation Report. c. Adhesive Anchor Installer Certification. ' 2. Passivation method for stainless steel members. • 1 CVO /391538A METAL FABRICATIONS JUNE 2010 05500 - 1 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 1 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1 • 1. Adhesive Anchor Installers: Trained and certified by manufacturer. 2. Galvanized Coating Applicator: Company specializing in hot -dip galvanizing after fabrication and following procedures of Quality Assurance Manual of the American Galvanizers Association. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Insofar as practical, factory assemble items specified herein. Assemblies that 1 due to necessity have to be shipped unassembled shall be packaged and tagged in manner that will protect materials from damage and will facilitate identification and field assembly. B. Package stainless steel items in a manner to provide protection from carbon impregnation. 1 C. Protect painted coatings and hot -dip galvanized finishes from damage due to 1 metal banding and rough handling. Use padded slings and straps. • D. Store fabricated items in dry area, not in direct contact with ground. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL 1 A. For hot -dip galvanized steel that is exposed to view and does not receive paint, limit the combined phosphorus and silicon content to 0.04 percent. For 1 steels that require a minimum of 0.15 percent silicon (such as plates over 1.5 inches thick for A36 steel), limit the maximum silicon content to 0.21 percent and the phosphorous content to 0.03 percent. 1 B. Unless otherwise indicated, meet the following requirements: Item ASTM Reference Steel Shapes and Plates A36/A36M Steel Pipe A501 or A53/A53M, Type E or S, Grade B Structural Steel Tubing A500, Grade B Stainless Steel: Bars and Angles A276, AISI Type 316 (316L for welded connections) 1 METAL FABRICATIONS CVO/391538A 05500 - 2 JUNE 2010 • I DURHAM PHASE 5B1 1 Item ASTM Reference I Shapes A276, AISI Type 304 (304L for welded connections) I Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip A240/A240M, AISI Type 316 (316L for welded connections) I Bolts, Threaded Rods, F593, AISI Type 316, Condition CW Anchor Bolts, and Anchor Studs Nuts F594, AISI Type 316, Condition CW Steel Bolts and Nuts: I Carbon Steel A307 bolts, with A563 nuts High - Strength A325, Type 1 bolts, with A563 nuts I Anchor Bolts and Rods F1554, Grade 55, with weldability supplement S 1. I Eyebolts A489 Threaded Rods A36/A36M II Flat Washers (Unhardened) F844 Flat and Beveled Washers F436 (Hardened) 1 Thrust Ties for Steel Pipe: Threaded Rods A193/A193M, Grade B7 1 Nuts A 194/A 194M, Grade 2H Plate A283/A283M, Grade D 1 Welded Anchor Studs A108, Grades C -1010 through C -1020 I Aluminum Plates and Structural B209 and B308/B308M, Shapes Alloy 6061 -T6 Aluminum Bolts and Nuts F468, Alloy 2024 -T4 I Cast Iron A48, Class 35 I C. Bolts, Washers, and Nuts: Use stainless steel, hot -dip galvanized steel, zinc - plated steel, and aluminum material types as indicated in Fastener Schedule at end of this section. 1 1 CVO/391538A METAL FABRICATIONS JUNE 2010 05500 - 3 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 2.02 D ANCHOR BOLTS AND ANCHOR BOLT SLEEVES A. Cast -In -Place Anchor Bolts: 1 1. Headed type, unless otherwise shown on Drawings. 2. Material type and protective coating as shown in Fastener Schedule at end of this section. B. Anchor Bolt Sleeves: 1. Plastic: a. Single unit construction with corrugated sleeve. b. Top of sleeve shall be self - threading to provide adjustment of threaded anchor bolt projection. c. Material: High density polyethylene. d. Manufacturer: Sinco Products, Inc., Middletown, CT, (800) 243 -6753. 2. Fabricated Steel: ASTM A36/A36M. 2.03 CONCRETE AND MASONRY DRILLED ANCHORS A. General: 1. AISI Type 316 stainless, as shown in Fastener Schedule at end of this section. 2. Current evaluation and acceptance reports by ICC or other similar code organization. 1 B. Wedge Anchors: 1. Manufacturers and Products: a. ITW Ramset /Red Head, Addison, IL; Trubolt Wedge Anchor. b. Hilti, Inc., Tulsa, OK; Kwik - Bolt -3 (KB -3) Anchor. c. Powers Fasteners, New Rochelle, NY; Power -Stud Anchor. d. Simpson Strong -Tie Co., Inc., Pleasanton, CA; Wedge -All Anchor. e. Wej -It Corp., Tulsa, OK; ANKRtite Wedge Anchor. f. Adhesives Technology, Pompano Beach, FL; Kingpin Wedge Anchor. g. Unitex, Kansas City, MO; Pro -Poxy 300 and Pro -Poxy 300 Fast Epoxy Adhesive Anchors. C. Expansion Anchors: 1. Nondrilling Anchors: Flush type for use with zinc - plated or stainless 1 steel bolt, or stud type with projecting threaded stud. 1 METAL FABRICATIONS CVO/391538A 05500 - 4 JUNE 2010 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 2. -- Manufacturers and Products: ' a. ITW Ramset/Red Head, Addison, IL; Multi -Set II Drop -In and Self Drill Anchor. b. Hilti, Inc., Tulsa, OK; Hilti HDI Drop -In Anchor. ' c. Powers Fasteners, New Rochelle, NY; Steel Drop -In Anchor. d. Simpson Strong -Tie Co., Inc., Pleasanton, CA; Drop -In Anchor. ' D. Undercut Anchors: 1. Manufacturers and Products: ' a. USP Structural Connectors; DUC Undercut Anchor. b. Hilti, Inc., Tulsa OK; HDA Undercut Anchor. ' E. Sleeve Anchors: 1. Manufacturers and Products: ' a. ITW Ramset /Red Head, Addison, IL; Dynabolt Hex Nut Sleeve Anchor. b. Powers Fasteners, New Rochelle, NY; Hex Head Power -Bolt ' Anchor. c. Simpson Strong -Tie Co., Inc., Pleasanton, CA; Sleeve -All Hex Head Anchor. d. Wej -It Corp., Tulsa, OK; Wej -It Sleeve Anchor. e. Hilti, Inc., Tulsa, OK; HSL -3 Heavy Duty Sleeve Anchor. ' F. Adhesive Anchors: 1. Threaded Rod: ' a. ASTM F593 stainless steel threaded rod, diameter as shown on Drawings. b. Length as required, to provide minimum depth of embedment. c. Clean and free of grease, oil, or other deleterious material. ' d. For hollow -unit masonry, provide galvanized or stainless steel wire cloth screen tube to fit threaded rod. I . Adhesive: a. Two- component, designed to be used in adverse freeze /thaw environments, with gray color after mixing. ' b. Cure Temperature, Pot Life, and Workability: Compatible for intended use and environmental conditions. c. Nonsag, with selected viscosity base on installation temperature and overhead application where applicable. 3. Packaging and Storage: a. Disposable, self - contained cartridge system capable of dispensing ' both components in the proper mixing ratio and fitting into a manually or pneumatically operated caulking gun. CVO/391538A METAL FABRICATIONS JUNE 2010 05500 - 5 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 b. Store adhesive cartridges on pallets or shelving in covered storage area, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. c. Cartridge Markings: Include manufacturer's name, product name, material type, batch or serial number, and adhesive expiration date. d. Dispose of cartridges if shelf life has expired. 4. Manufacturers and Products: a. Adhesives Technology, Pompano Beach, FL; Ultrabond 1 Epoxy Anchor System. b. Hilti, Inc., Tulsa, OK; HIT HY 150 Adhesive Anchor System, (use HIT HY 20 for hollow masonry). c. ITW Ramset /Red Head, Addison, IL; C6 Adhesive Anchor System or A7 Adhesive Anchor System. (Use A7 Adhesive Anchor System for hollow masonry.) d. Simpson Strong -Tie Co., Inc., Pleasanton, CA; ET Epoxy -Tie Adhesive or Acrylic -Tie Adhesive. (Use Acrylic -Tie Adhesive for temperatures below 40 degrees F.) 1 e. Unitex, Kansas City, MO; Pro -Poxy 300 Adhesive Anchors or Pro -Poxy 300 Fast Epoxy Adhesive Anchors. f. USP Structural Connectors CIA -Gel 7000 Epoxy Anchoring , System. 2.04 WELDED ANCHOR STUDS A. Headed anchor studs (HAS), as indicated on Drawings. 1. Stainless Steel: ASTM F593, AISI Type 316, Condition CW, where indicated. B. Manufacturers: 1. Nelson Stud Welding, FabriSteel Co., Elyria, OH. 2. Stud Welding Associates, Inc., Elyria, OH. 2.05 EMBEDDED STEEL SUPPORT FRAMES FOR FLOOR PLATE AND GRATING I A. Steel angle support frames to be embedded in concrete shall be stainless steel, ASTM A276, AISI Type 316, unless indicated otherwise. B. Welded anchors for stainless steel support frames shall also be stainless steel. 2.06 FLOOR PLATE 1 A. Material: 1. Stainless Steel: ASTM A793, AISI Type 304. 2. Aluminum: ASTM B632/B632M, Alloy 6061 -T6. METAL FABRICATIONS CVO/391538A 05500 - 6 JUNE 2010 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 B. Minimum Thickness: — — — 1 1. Steel: 1/4 inch, unless shown otherwise on Drawings. 2. Aluminum: 3/8 inch, unless shown otherwise on Drawings. C. Surface shall be raised -lug pattern or diamond tread, unless shown otherwise on Drawings. 2.07 ACCESSORIES A. Antiseizing Lubricant for Stainless Steel Threaded Connections: ' 1. Resists washout. 2. Manufacturers and Products: 1 a. Bostik, Middleton, MA; Neverseez. b. Saf -T -Eze Div., STL Corp., Lombard, IL; Anti- Seize. 1 2.08 FABRICATION A. General: ' 1. Finish exposed surfaces smooth, sharp, and to well - defined lines. 2. Furnish necessary rabbets, lugs, and brackets so work can be assembled in neat, substantial manner. 3. Conceal fastenings where practical; where exposed, flush countersink. 4. Drill metalwork and countersink holes as required for attaching hardware or other materials. 5. Grind cut edges smooth and straight. Round sharp edges to small uniform radius. Grind burrs, jagged edges, and surface defects smooth. 1 6. Fit and assemble in largest practical sections for delivery to Site. B. Materials: 1. Use steel shapes, unless otherwise noted. 2. Fabricate aluminum in accordance with AA Specifications for Aluminum Structures — Allowable Stress Design. C. Welding: ' 1. Weld connections and grind exposed welds smooth. When required to be watertight, make welds continuous. ' 2. Welded fabrications shall be free from twisting or distortion caused by improper welding techniques. 3. Steel: Meet fabrication requirements of AWS D1.1, Section 5. 1 4. Aluminum: Meet requirements of AWS D1.2. 5. Stainless Steel: Meet requirements of AWS D1.6. CVO /391538A METAL FABRICATIONS JUNE 2010 05500 - 7 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 6. Welded Anchor Studs: Prepare surface to be welded and weld with stud welding gun in accordance with AWS D1.1, Section 7, and manufacturer's instructions. t. 7. Complete welding before applying finish. D. Painting: 1 1. Shop prime with rust- inhibitive primer as specified in Section 09900, Painting and Coating, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Coat surfaces of galvanized steel and aluminum fabricated items to be in direct contact with concrete, grout, masonry, or dissimilar metals, as specified in Section 09900, Painting and Coating, unless indicated otherwise. 3. Do not apply protective coating to galvanized steel anchor bolts or galvanized steel welded anchor studs, unless indicated otherwise. E. Galvanizing: 1 1. Fabricate steel to be galvanized in accordance with ASTM A143, ASTM A384, and ASTM A385. Avoid fabrication techniques that could cause distortion or embrittlement of the steel. 2. Provide venting and drain holes for tubular members and fabricated . assemblies in accordance with ASTM A385. 3. Remove welding slag, splatter, burrs, grease, oil, paint, lacquer, and other deleterious material prior to delivery for galvanizing. 4. Remove by blast cleaning or other methods surface contaminants and coatings not removable by normal chemical cleaning process in the galvanizing operation. 5. Hot -dip galvanize steel members, fabrications, and assemblies after fabrication in accordance with ASTM Al23/Al23M. 6. Hot -dip galvanize bolts, nuts, washers, and hardware components in accordance with ASTM A153/A153M. Oversize holes to allow for zinc alloy growth. Shop assemble bolts and nuts. 7. Galvanized steel sheets in accordance with ASTM A653. 8. Galvanize components of bolted assemblies separately before assembly. 1 Galvanizing of tapped holes is not required. F. Fitting: Where movement of fabrications is required or shown, cut, fit, and align items for smooth operation. Make corners square and opposite sides parallel. G. Accessories: Furnish as required for a complete installation. Fasten by welding or with stainless steel bolts or screws. 1 1 METAL FABRICATIONS CVO/391538A 05500 - 8 JUNE 2010 1 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 2:09 SOURCE QUALITY- CONTROL — — A. Visually inspect all fabrication welds and correct any deficiencies. 1. Steel: AWS D1.1, Section 6 and Table 6.1, Visual Inspection 1 Acceptance Criteria. 2. Aluminum: AWS D1.2. ' 3. Stainless Steel: AWS D1.6. PART 3 EXECUTION 1 3.01 INSTALLATION OF METAL FABRICATIONS A. General: ' 1. Install metal fabrications plumb or level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects. 2. Install rigid, substantial, and neat in appearance. 3. Install manufactured products in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 1 4. Obtain Engineer approval prior to field cutting steel members or making adjustments not scheduled. B. Aluminum: 1. Do not remove mill markings from concealed surfaces. 1 2. Remove inked or painted identification marks on exposed surfaces not otherwise coated after installed material has been inspected and approved. 1 3. Fabrication, mechanical connections, and welded construction shall be in accordance with the AA Aluminum Design Manual. 1 3.02 CAST -IN -PLACE ANCHOR BOLTS A. Accurately locate and hold anchor bolts in place with templates at the time concrete is placed. B. Use anchor bolt sleeves for location adjustment and provide two nuts and one washer per bolt of same material as bolt. C. Minimum Bolt Size: 1/2 -inch diameter by 12 inches long, unless otherwise 1 shown. 3.03 CONCRETE AND MASONRY DRILLED ANCHORS 1 A. Begin installation only after concrete or masonry to receive anchors has attained design strength. CVO/391538A METAL FABRICATIONS JUNE 2010 05500 - 9 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 B. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Provide minimum embedment, edge distance, and spacing as follows, unless indicated otherwise by anchor manufacturer's instructions or shown otherwise on Drawings: Min. Spacing Anchor Min. Embedment Min. Edge Distance (bolt Type (bolt diameters) (bolt diameters) diameters) Wedge 9 6 12 Expansion 4 6 12 and Sleeve Undercut 9 12 16 1 Adhesive 9 9 13.5 D. Use only drill type and bit type and diameter recommended by anchor manufacturer. Clean hole of debris and dust with brush and compressed air. E. For undercut anchors, use special undercutting drill bit and rotary hammer drill and apply final torque as recommended by anchor manufacturer. F. When embedded steel or rebar is encountered in the drill path, slant drill to clear obstruction. If drill must be slanted more than 10 degrees to clear obstruction, notify Engineer for direction on how to proceed. 1 G. Adhesive Anchors: 1. Do not install adhesive anchors when temperature of concrete is below 40 degrees F (25 degrees F for Simpson Strong -Tie Acrylic -Tie Adhesive) or above 100 degrees F. 1 2. Remove any standing water from hole with oil -free compressed air. Inside surface of hole shall be dry where required by manufacturer's instructions. 1 3. For hollow -unit masonry, install screen tube in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 4. Do not disturb anchor during recommended curing time. 5. Do not exceed maximum torque as specified in manufacturer's instructions. H. Prestressed Concrete: Do not use drilled -in anchors in prestressed or post - tensioned concrete members without Engineer's prior approval unless specifically shown on Drawings. 1 1 METAL FABRICATIONS CVO/391538A 05500 - 10 JUNE 2010 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 3.04 E-L-EC- T-ROLYTIC PROTECTION 1 A. Aluminum and Galvanized Steel: 1. Coat surfaces of galvanized steel and aluminum fabricated items to be in 1 direct contact with concrete, grout, masonry, or dissimilar metals, as specified in Section 09900, Painting and Coating, unless indicated otherwise. 2. Do not apply protective coating to galvanized steel anchor bolts or galvanized steel welded anchor studs, unless indicated otherwise. 3. Allow coating to dry before installation of the material. ' 4. Protect coated surfaces during installation. 5. Should coating become marred, prepare and touch up in accordance with paint manufacturer's written instructions. B. Titanium: Where titanium equipment is in contact with concrete or dissimilar metal, provide full -face neoprene insulation gasket, 3/32 -inch minimum thickness and 70- durometer hardness. C. Stainless Steel: ' 1. During handling and installation, take necessary precautions g g ry p caut ons to prevent carbon impregnation of stainless steel members. 2. After installation, visually inspect stainless steel surfaces for evidence of iron rust, oil, paint, and other forms of contamination. ' 3. Remove contamination in accordance with requirements of ASTM A380 and ASTM A967. 4. Brushes used to remove foreign substances shall utilize only stainless ' steel or nonmetallic bristles. 5. After treatment, visually inspect surfaces for compliance. 3.05 PAINTING AND REPAIR OF GALVANIZED STEEL A. Painted Galvanized Surfaces: Prepare as specified in Section 09900, Painting ' and Coating. B. Repair of Damaged Hot -Dip Galvanized Coating: 1 1. Conform to ASTM A780. 2. For minor repairs at abraded areas, use sprayed zinc conforming to ASTM A780. 3. For flame cut or welded areas, use zinc -based solder, or zinc sticks, conforming to ASTM A780. ' 4. Use magnetic gauge to determine that thickness is equal to or greater than the base galvanized coating. CVO /391538A METAL FABRICATIONS JUNE 2010 05500 - 11 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 3.06 FIELD CONTROL QUALITY CON OL A. Concrete and Masonry Drilled Anchors: Special inspection and testing will be 1 provided by Owner where indicated on Drawings. 3.07 FASTENER SCHEDULE 1 A. Unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings, provide fasteners as follows: Service Use and Location Product Remarks 1 1. Anchor Bolts Cast Into Concrete for Structural Steel, Metal Fabrications and Castings Interior Dry Areas Stainless steel headed anchor bolts, unless indicated otherwise. Exterior and Stainless steel Interior Wet Areas headed anchor bolts. Submerged Stainless steel See Section 09900, Painting headed anchor bolts and Coating with fusion bonded coating 2. Anchor Bolts Cast Into Concrete for Equipment Bases Interior Dry Areas Stainless steel headed anchor bolts, 1 unless otherwise specified with 1 equipment Submerged, Stainless steel See Section 09900, Painting Exterior, Interior headed anchor bolts and Coating Wet with fusion bonded coating, unless otherwise specified with equipment 3. Drilled Anchors for Metal Components to Cast -in -Place Concrete (e.g., Ladders, Handrail Posts, Electrical Panels, and Equipment) Interior Dry Areas Stainless steel wedge or expansion 1 anchors 1 METAL FABRICATIONS CVO/391538A 05500 - 12 JUNE 2010 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 1 Service Use ' and Location Product Remarks Submerged, Adhesive stainless ' Exterior, Interior steel anchors Wet 4. Anchors in Grout - Filled Concrete Masonry Units Exterior and Stainless steel Interior Wet and adhesive anchors ' Dry Areas 5. Connections of Aluminum Components ' Submerged, Exterior and Stainless steel bolted connections, Interior Wet and unless otherwise ' Dry Areas specified with equipment 6. All Others Exterior and Stainless steel Interior Wet and fasteners Dry Areas B. Antiseizing Lubricant: Use on all stainless steel threads. ' C. Do not use adhesive anchors to support fire- resistive construction or where ambient temperature will exceed 120 degrees F. END OF SECTION 1 1 1 1 CVO/391538A METAL FABRICATIONS JUNE 2010 05500 - 13 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 SECTION 05520 METAL RAILINGS PART 1 GENERAL ' 1.01 DEFINITIONS A. Handrails: Synonymous with terms; i.e., guardrail system, railing system, ramp -rail system, and stair -rail system. Handrails are comprised of a framework of vertical, horizontal, or inclined members, grillwork or panels, 1 accessories, or combination thereof. B. ICC Evaluation Services Report for concrete anchor manufacturers. C. Special Inspection: As governed by the ICC IBC. D. Toeboards: Vertical barrier at floor level usually erected on handrails along exposed edges of floor or wall openings, platforms, ramps, or stairs to prevent miscellaneous items from falling through. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Shop Drawings: ' a. Indicate handrail profiles, sizes, connections, anchorage, size and type of fasteners, and accessories. Project- specific scale plans and elevations of handrails. ' b. Manufacturer's literature and catalog data of handrail and components. c. Design Data: Calculations or test data using design performance 1 loads and include the following: 1) Bending stress in, and deflection of posts in accordance with ASTM E985. 1 2) Stress in post base connection. 3) Calculation of anchorage forces and comparison of these forces to ICC IBC recommendations regarding safe ' allowable design loads of anchorages. 4) For concrete anchor spacings less than 12 anchor diameters ' and edge distances less than six anchor diameters, make reduction in allowable pullout and shear values. Provide independent laboratory inspection service for ICC Evaluation Services Report values with Special Inspection. 1 CVO/391538A METAL RAILINGS JUNE 2010 05520 - 1 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 1 B. Informational Submittals: 1. Manufacturer's assembly and installation instructions. 1 2. Special Inspection: a. Manufacturer's instructions for Special Inspection of concrete anchors. b. Special Inspection report in accordance with Article Tests and Inspections. 3. Test Reports: Test data may supplement load calculations providing data covers the complete handrail system, including anchorage: a. Test data for handrail and components showing load and deflection due to load, in enough detail to prove handrail is strong enough and satisfies national, state, local standards, regulations, code requirements, and OSHA 29 CFR 1910, using design loads specified. Include test data for the following: 1) Railing and post connections. 2) Railing wall connections. 3) Post and base connections. 4) Railing expansion joint connections. b. Deflection Criteria: In accordance with ASTM E985 and design 1 loads specified. c. Aluminum Rail Piping:. Test data showing yield strength of pipe as- delivered equals or exceeds values specified in this section. d. Concrete Anchors: Calculations and test data for review prior to use, on anchors other than those specified. 4. Manufacturer's written recommendations describing procedures for 1 maintaining handrails including cleaning materials, application methods, and precautions to be taken in the use of cleaning materials. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: Calculations required for design data stamped by a registered 1 civil or structural engineer licensed in the state where the Project will be constructed. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Handrails adequately packaged and wrapped to prevent scratching and 1 denting during shipment, storage, and installation. Maintain protective wrapping until railing is completely installed. B. Aluminum Handrails: 1. Shop assemble into practical modules of lengths not exceeding 24 feet for shipment. 2. Deliver toeboards loose for field assembly. 1 METAL RAILINGS CVO/391538A 05520 - 2 JUNE 2010 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 3. - Deliver clear anodized handrail pipe and posts with protective- plastic - - - ' wrap. 1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS 1 A. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movement resulting from the following maximum range in ambient temperature in design, fabrication, and ' - installation of handrails to prevent buckling, opening up of joints, over stressing of components, connections and other detrimental effects. Base design calculation on actual surface temperatures of materials due to both 1 solar heat gain and night time sky heat loss. Temperature change is difference between high or low temperature and installation temperature. 1. Temperature Change Range: 70 degrees F, ambient; 100 degrees F, ' material surfaces. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 DESIGN PERFORMANCE 1 A. Structural Performance of Handrails: Design, test, fabricate, and install handrails to withstand the following structural loads without exceeding allowable design working stress or allowable deflection. Apply each load to produce maximum stress and deflection in each of the respective components comprising handrails. 1. Top Rail of Handrails: Capable of withstanding the following load cases applied: ' a. Concentrated load of 200 pounds applied at any point and in any direction in accordance with ICC IBC. b. Uniform load of 50 pounds per linear foot applied in any direction ' in accordance with ICC IBC. c. Concentrated load need not be assumed to act concurrently with uniform loads in accordance with ICC IBC. 2. Mid -rails with corner returns to withstand a 300 -pound concentrated vertical load applied at any point or direction without damage and loosening of pipe, fittings, or attachment hardware. ' 3. Concrete Anchors for Handrail Wall Brackets: Anchors with a strength required by calculations with concrete strength assumed at 4,000 psi and in conformance with ICC IBC. ' 4. Concrete Anchors: In accordance with ICC IBC for size, length, embedment, spacing, and edge distance to match required loads shown in calculations. 1 CVO/391538A METAL RAILINGS JUNE 2010 05520 - 3 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 1 2.02 ALUMINUM HANDRAILS A. General: 1. Furnish pre- engineered and prefabricated three rail handrails. 1 2. Pop rivets and glued railing construction not permitted. B. Manufacturers: 1. Thompson Fabricating Co., Birmingham, AL. 2. Moultrie Manufacturing, Moultrie, GA; Wesrail II. C. Rails, Posts, and Formed Elbows: Extruded Alloy 6105 -T5 or 6061 -T6, minimum tensile strength of 38,000 psi and minimum yield strength of 35,000 psi. 1 1. Miscellaneous Aluminum Parts: 6063 -T6 or 6061 -T6 extruded aluminum of adequate strength for all loads. 1 2. Post and Railing: Nominal 1 -1/2 -inch diameter. a. Rails: 1.900 -inch outside diameter by 0.145 -inch wall thickness, Schedule 40. b. Posts: 1.900 -inch outside diameter by 0.200 -inch wall thickness, Schedule 80. c. Solid dowel interconnectors of 6105 -T5 or 6061 -T6 aluminum. D. Fittings: 1. Handrail and Post Fittings: Extruded, machined bar stock, permanent mold castings, or die castings of sufficient strength to meet load requirements. Fittings shall match color of pipe in handrails. Sand cast parts not permitted. 2. Concrete Top Mount Post Base: a. Four holes in base for concrete anchors. For narrow walls or curbs, furnish two holes in base for concrete anchors with required edge distance. b. Manufacturers and Products: 1) Thompson Fabricating Co.; Part No. TBF -3.4 and Part No. TBF -3.2 for narrow walls and curbs. 2) Moultrie Manufacturing Co.; Part No. WII4HB and WII2HB for narrow walls and curbs. 3. Concrete Side Mounted Handrail Bracket: Extruded aluminum, Alloy 6063 -T6 with four holes for bolts or concrete anchors. a. Manufacturers and Products: 1) Thompson Fabricating Co.; Part No. TSM -1.5. 2) Moultrie Manufacturing Co.; Part No. WIISMB. 1 METAL RAILINGS CVO/391538A 05520 - 4 JUNE 2010 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 4. -- - Concrete Anchors- for - Securing- Bases -and- Brackets- to - Concrete: ' Type 304 or Type 316 stainless steel 1/2 -inch concrete anchors. 5. Handrail Connections for Metal Stairway Stringers: a. Extruded aluminum bracket, Alloy 6063 -T6. • ' b. Brackets bolts 1/2 -inch diameter Type 304 or Type 316 stainless steel bolts. c. Offset Adjustable Stair Fitting: ' 1) Thompson Fabricating Co.; Part No. ASF of cast Al -mag. 2) Moultrie Manufacturing Co.; Standard and custom elbow angles, Part No. W51XXX (numbers vary based on angle). ' d. Additional Offset Adjustable Fitting for Picket Railing System: Thompson Fabricating Co.; Part No. APF of cast Al -mag. e. Base Connection: 1) Manufacturers and Products: a) Thompson Fabricating Co.; Part Nos. SMB -2 or SMB -3, ASF, APF. b) Moultrie Manufacturing Co.; Part No. WIISMBEXT. 6. Handrail Connections for Metal Beams: a. Extruded aluminum bracket, Alloy 6063 -T6. ' b. Bracket bolts 1/2 -inch diameter Type 304 stainless steel bolts. c. Manufacturers and Products: 1) Thompson Fabricating Co.; Part Nos. SMB -2 or SMB -3. Use Part No. TSM -1.5 if bracket is attached to flat side of channel. 2) Moultrie Manufacturing Co.; Part No. WIISMBEXT. Use Part No. WIISMB if bracket is attached to flat side of channel. ' 7. Handrail Wall Brackets: Adjustable wall fitting, with provision for three 3/8 -inch Type 304 stainless steel bolts or concrete anchors. a. Manufacturers and Products: ' 1) Thompson Fabricating Co.; Part No. AWF cast Al -mag aluminum bracket. 2) Moultrie Manufacturing Co.; Part No. W41100. 8. Miscellaneous Rail to Post Fittings: a. Aluminum Tee Fittings: 1) Manufacturers and Products: ' a) Thompson Fabricating Co.; Part Nos. TF -1 and TX -1. b) Moultrie Manufacturing Co.; Part Nos. WIIT40, WIIT40 /05, WIIT80, and WIIT80 /05. ' b. Aluminum Ell Fittings: 1) Manufacturers and Products: a) Thompson Fabricating Co.; Part Nos. TE -1, TE -2, and ' TE -3. b) Moultrie Manufacturing Co.; Part No. 51900. CVO/391538A METAL RAILINGS JUNE 2010 05520 - 5 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 c. Aluminum Splice Lock: 1) Manufacturers and Products: a) Thompson Fabricating Co.; Part No. SL -1. b) Moultrie Manufacturing Co.; Part No. WIIS40. d. Aluminum Expansion Joint Splice: 1) Manufacturers and Products: a) Thompson Fabricating Co.; Part No. ES -1. b) Moultrie Manufacturing Co.; Part No. WII40, omit set screws on one side. e. Formed Aluminum Wall Flange: 1) Manufacturers and Products: a) Thompson Fabricating Co.; Part No. CF -2. b) Moultrie Manufacturing Co.; Part No. 41250. 9. Toeboards and Accessories: a. Material: Molded or extruded 6063 or 6061 aluminum. b. Manufacturers: 1) Thompson Fabricating Co. 1 2) Moultrie Manufacturing Co.; Part No. WIIKP20. 10. Castings for Handrails: a. Cast Al -mag with sufficient strength to meet load and test requirements. b. Anodizable grade finish with excellent resistance to corrosion when subject to exposure of sodium chloride solution intermittent spray and immersion. E. Concrete Embedded Metal Anchorages: In accordance with Section 05500, Metal Fabrications. F. Finishes: 1. Handrail Pipe and Post: In accordance with AA DAF45, designation AA- M32- C22 -A41. 2. Cast Fittings and Toeboards: In accordance with AA DAF45, designation AA -M 10- C22 -A41. 2.03 FABRICATION OF ALUMINUM HANDRAILS A. Shop Assembly: ' 1. Post Spacing: Maximum 6 -foot horizontal spacing. 2. Railing Posts Bolted to Metal or Concrete: a. In lieu of field cutting, provide approved fitting with sufficient post overlap, containing provisions for vertical adjustment. b. Field fit -up is required. 3. Free of buns, nicks, and sharp edges when fabrication is complete. 4. Welding is not permitted. METAL RAILINGS CVO/391538A 05520 - 6 JUNE 2010 • DURHAM PHASE 5B1 B. Shop /Factory Finishing: 1 1. Use same alloy for uniform appearance throughout fabrication for railings. • 2. Handrail and Post Fittings: Match fittings with color of pipe in handrail. 3. Sand cast parts not permitted. ' C. Tolerances: 1. Shop assemble rails, posts, and formed elbows with a close tolerance for tight fit. 1 2. Fit dowels tightly inside posts. PART 3 EXECUTION ' 3.01 GENERAL A. Provide railing posts longer than needed and field cut to exact dimensions required in order to satisfy vertical variations on the actual structure. Install railing with a base that provides plus or minus 1/4-inch vertical adjustment 1 inside base fitting. If adjustment is required in the field and exceeds plus or minus 1/4 -inch, reduce post length not to exceed beyond bottom of lowest set- 111 screw or bolt in base fitting. B. Field fabrication of aluminum railing systems not permitted. C. Modification to structure not permitted where handrail is attached. 3.02 HANDRAIL INSTALLATION 1 A. Assembly and Installation: Perform in accordance with manufacturer's written recommendations for installation. B. Protection from Entrapped Water: 1. Make provisions in exterior and interior installations subject to high humidity to drain water from railing system. 2. Posts mounted in concrete, bends, and elbows occurring at low points ' drill weep holes of 1/4 -inch diameter at lowest possible elevations, one hole per post or rail. Drill hole in the plane of the rail. C. Expansion Joints: 1. Maximum intervals of 54 feet on center and at structural joints. ' 2. Slip joint with internal sleeve extending 2 inches beyond each side of joint. Provide 1/2 -inch slip joint gap to allow for expansion. CVO/391538A METAL RAILINGS JUNE2010 05520 -7 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 Fasten using 3/8-inch set-screw. 3. asters to one side us g /8 mch diameter set screw. Place set -screw at bottom of pipe. 4. Locate joints within 12 inches of posts. Locate expansion joints in rails that span expansion joints in structural walls and floors supporting the posts. - ' D. Setting Posts: 1. Embedded: 1 a. Clean dust and foreign matter from sleeves or blockouts. b. Moisten interior of hole and surrounding surface with clean water. Fill hole with nonshrink grout prior to installing post. c. Brace railing until grout sets. d. Posts installed outside and exposed to freezing temperatures, drill weep hole through post approximately 1/2 inch above level of grout inside post and in plane of rail to prevent entrapment and freezing of water inside post. 2. Surface Mounted: a. Bolt post baseplate connectors firmly in place. b. Shims, wedges, grout, and similar devices for handrail post alignment not permitted. E. Posts and Rails: 1. Set posts plumb and aligned to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet. 2. Set rails horizontal or parallel to slope of steps to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet. 3. Install posts and rails in same plane. Remove projections or irregularities and provide a smooth surface for sliding hands continuously along top rail. Use offset rail for use on stairs and platforms if post is attached to web of stringers or structural platform supports. 4. Support 1 -1/2 -inch rails directly above stairway stringers with offset fittings. F. Handrail Wall Brackets: 1. Support wall rails on brackets spaced maximum 6 feet on centers for steel and 5 feet for aluminum as measured on the horizontal projection. 2. Install wall anchor backplates on solid blocking in stud walls. G. Toeboard: 1 1. Provide at handrails, except where 4 -inch or higher concrete curbs are installed or at gates. 1 METAL RAILINGS CVO/391538A 05520 - 8 JUNE 2010 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 2. Accurately easure in field for comet - — y o co ect length; — after- handrarl post ' installation cut and secure to posts. 3. Dimension between bottom of toeboard and walking surface not to exceed 1/4 inch. ' 4. Aluminum Toeboards: Provide expansion and contraction connections between each post. ' 3.03 FIELD FINISHING A. Corrosion Protection: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion ' caused from direct contact with concrete and dissimilar metals by coating metal surfaces as specified in Section 09900, Painting and Coating. ' 3.04 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS A. Perform Special Inspection for anchors where ICC Evaluation Services Reports require them for anchor strength value used. ' B. Provide an independent test laboratory to perform Special Inspection. p rY p P P 3.05 CLEANING A. Wash railing system thoroughly using clean water and soap. Rinse with clean water. B. Do not use acid solution, steel wool, or other harsh abrasive. ' C. If stain remains after washing, restore in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations or replace stained handrails. END OF SECTION 1 1 CVO/391538A METAL RAILINGS JUNE 2010 05520 - 9 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 SECTION 05530 — METAL GRATINGS PART 1 GENERAL U 1.01 SUBMITTALS ' A. Action Submittals: 1. Shop Drawings: ' a. Grating: Show dimensions, weight, size, and location of connections to adjacent grating, supports, and other Work. b. Grating Anchorage: Show details of anchorage to supports to 1 prevent displacement from traffic impact. c. Product data for grating, grating clips, anchors, accessories, and other manufactured products specified herein. d. Manufacturer's specifications, including coatings, surface treatment, and finishes. B. Informational Submittals: 1. Special handling and storage requirements. 2. Installation instructions. 1.02 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 1 A. Insofar as is practical, factory assemble items. ' B. Package and clearly tag parts and assemblies that are, due to necessity, shipped unassembled. 1 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS 1 A. Materials, equipment, and accessories specified in this section shall be products of: ' 1. Alabama Metal Industries Corporation (AMICO), Birmingham, AL. 2. IKG Industries, Houston, TX. 3. Ohio Gratings, Inc., Canton, OH. 4. Seidelhuber Metal Products, Inc., South San Francisco, CA. 1 . CVO/391538A METAL GRATINGS JUNE 2010 05530 - 1 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 2.02 GRATING MATERIALS A. Aluminum: 1. Bearing Bars and Banding: ASTM B221 Alloy 6061 -T6 or 6063 -T3. 2. Swaged Crossbars: a. Rods: ASTM B221 Alloy 6061 or 6063, or ASTM B210 Alloy 3003. 2.03 METAL BAR GRATING A. General Requirements: 1 1. Maximum Service Load: a. Light Duty (Type A): 100 psf uniformly distributed load. 1 2. Maximum Deflection: Span/240 or 1/4 inch, whichever is less. 3. Bearing Bar Spacing: a. Light Duty: 1 -3/16 inch maximum, center -to- center. 4. Cross Bar Spacing: 4 inches maximum, center -to- center. 5. Bearing Bars, Cross Bars and Banding: Minimum thickness as specified 1 in NAAMM MBG 531 or as shown on Drawings. B. Grating Materials: Aluminum pressure - locked rectangular bar grating fabricated by swaging crossbars between rectangular bearing bars or pressure - locked rectangular bar grating fabricated by pressing rectangular crossbars into slots in rectangular bearing bars or welded. C. Surface: Plain. D. Stair Treads: 1 1. Material and Type: Same as grating material and grating type as furnished for connecting walkway or work surface. 2. Nosings: Integral ribbing and serrated edge on one long axis of tread, or nonslip abrasive on each tread along one long edge. 3. Carrier Plate or Angle: Furnish at each end for connection to stair stringers. 2.04 ACCESSORIES 1 A. Embedded Frames: As indicated on Drawings and as specified in Section 05500, Metal Fabrications. B. Grating Clamps: 1. Use at flanged beam and bolted angle frame supports. 2. Removable from above grating walkway surface. METAL GRATINGS CVO/391538A 05530 - 2 JUNE 2010 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 3. Provide hat bracket, recessed -bolt,-and bottom - clamp - ofsame material ' as grating. 4. Manufacturers and Products: a. Direct Metals Company, LLC, Kennesaw, GA; Grating Clamp. ' b. Grating Fasteners, Inc., Harvey, LA; G -Clip. C. Anchor Stud and Saddle Clip: 1. Use at embedded angle frame supports with stud anchor and nut recessed below top of grating surface. ' 2. Removable from above grating walkway surface. 3. Provide Type 316 stainless steel welded threaded stud anchor, nut, washer, and saddle clip. ' 4. Manufacturers and Products: a. Welded Stud Anchor: 1) Nelson Stud Welding, Inc., Elyria, OH. 2) Stud Welding Associates, Inc. Elyria, OH. b. Saddle Clip: 1) Direct Metals Company, LLC, Kennesaw, GA; Saddle Clip. ' 2) Grating Fasteners, Inc., Harvey, LA; Saddle Clip. 3) Struct -Fast, Inc., Baltimore, MD; Gratefast. 2.05 FABRICATION A. General: 1 1. In accordance with NAAMM MBG 531 or NAAMM MBG 532. 2. Conceal fastenings where practical. 3. Drill metalwork and countersink holes as required for attaching hardware or other materials. 4. Cutouts: ' a. Fabricate in grating sections for penetrations indicated. b. Arrange to permit grating removal without disturbing items penetrating grating. c. Edge band openings in grating that interrupt four or more bearing bars with bars of same size and material as bearing bars. 5. Do not notch bearing bars at supports to maintain elevation. ' 6. Field measure areas to receive grating. Verify dimensions of new fabricated supports, and fabricate to dimension required for specified clearances. 1 7. Section Length: Sufficient to prevent section from falling through clear opening when oriented in the span direction and one end is touching either the concrete or the vertical leg of grating support. 1 8. Minimum Bearing: 1 inch for grating depth up to 2 -1/4 inches and 2 inches for grating depth greater than 2 -1/4 inches. CVO/391538A METAL GRATINGS JUNE 2010 05530 - 3 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 1 9. Banding and Toe Plates: Same material as grating and welded to bearing bars in accordance with requirements of NAAMM MBG 531 and NAAMM MBG 532. B. Metal Bar Grating: A single grating section shall be not less than 1.5 feet or greater than 3 feet in width, or weigh more than 150 pounds. C. Supports: 1. Same material as ratio except that supports which are to be g g� p PP embedded in concrete shall be Type 316 stainless steel, unless part of an extruded aluminum system. 2. Coordinate dimensions and fabrication with grating to be supported. PART 3 EXECUTION 1 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Until grating sections are securely fastened in place, area shall be appropriately barricaded or flagged to alert people working in the area of potential fall hazard. 1 B. Install manufactured products in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. C. Install supports such that grating sections have a solid bearing on both ends, and that grating sections will not rock or wobble under design loads. 1 D. Install grating supports plumb and level as applicable. E. Install sections of welded frames with anchors to straight plane without offsets. F. Field locate and install fasteners to fit grating layout. G. Anchor grating securely to supports using minimum of four fastener clips and bolts per grating section. H. Each grating section shall be easily removable and replaceable. I. Completed installation shall be rigid and neat in appearance. . END OF SECTION ' 1 1 METAL GRATINGS CVO/391538A 05530 - 4 JUNE 2010 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 SECTION 05810 — ' EXPANSION JOINT COVER ASSEMBLIES PART 1 GENERAL 1 1.01 SUBMITTALS ' A. Action Submittals: 1. Shop Drawings: ' a. Product data including Engineer's identification mark, size, and description of components. b. UV performance of exterior covers. c. Movement performance of each cover. d. Details of blockout and anchorage required. 2. Samples: a. Manufacturer's flexible material in standard colors as applicable for color selection. b. Base material with surface finish. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain expansion joint cover assemblies from a single manufacturer. 1 1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Ship metal pieces with protective film covering. ' B. Deliver and store products in original containers at not less than 70 degrees F ambient temperature for not less than 24 hours immediately before installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS ' 2.01 GENERAL A. Design joint covers for dynamic structural movement without material degradation or fatigue in nonfire -rated construction as tested in accordance with ASTM E1399. 1 2.02 FLOOR EXPANSION JOINT COVERS A. Material: Heavy -duty, extruded aluminum construction, mill finish, with ' replaceable elastomeric gasket, water stop, and complete with anchors. CVO/391538A EXPANSION JOINT COVER ASSEMBLIES JUNE 2010 05810 - 1 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 B. Manufacturers anufacture s and Products: 1. Exposed Concrete Floors: ' a. MM Systems Corporation; Series FSS -200. b. Construction Specialties; Model GFS. c. Pawling; Styles EFTE. d. Watson Bowman Acme; Model LPP -200. 2.03 FLOOR TO WALL EXPANSION JOINT COVERS ' A. Material: Extruded aluminum construction, clear anodized finish, with replaceable elastomeric gasket, and complete with anchors. 1 B. Manufacturers and Products: 1. MM Systems Corporation; Series FSSE -200. 2. Construction Specialties; Model GFSW -200. 2.04 WALL EXPANSION JOINT COVERS A. Manufacturers and Products: ' 1. Watson Bowman Acme; Jeane Structural Sealing Joint System. 2. Construction Specialties; Model SF -500. 3. Pawling; Series SWR. 4. MM Systems Corporation; Series VSS -500. 2.05 ROOF EXPANSION JOINT COVERS ' A. Elastomeric bellows with galvanized steel flange, factory- formed joints, and required fasteners. B. Factory formed transitions to exterior wall joint covers. C. Manufacturer and Product: MM Systems Corporation; Series ERJ. PART 3 EXECUTION , 3.01 PREPARATION A. Examine surfaces and structures to receive work of this section. B. Field measure and fabricate work to suit. ' C. Coordinate and furnish anchorages, setting drawings, templates, and instructions for installation of expansion joint cover assemblies to be embedded in or anchored to concrete or to have recesses formed into edges of concrete slab for later placement and grouting -in of frames. EXPANSION JOINT COVER ASSEMBLIES CVO/391538A 05810 -2 JUNE 2010 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 - 3:02 INSTALLATION- A. Install floor, floor to wall, wall, and roof expansion joint covers as detailed and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. 1 B. Maintain continuity of expansion joint cover assemblies with a minimum number of end joints and align metal members mechanically using splice 1 joints. C. Cut and fit ends to produce joints that accommodate thermal expansion and contraction of metal to avoid buckling of frames. ' D. Securely anchor covers in their proper locations, plumb and level and without distortion. Adhere and seal, watertight, cross joints in covers. ' 3.03 CLEANING ' A. When protective material is removed, clean exposed metal surfaces to comply with manufacturer's instructions. 1 3.04 PROTECTION A. Do not remove protective material until finish work in adjacent areas is complete. END OF SECTION 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 CVO/391538A EXPANSION JOINT COVER ASSEMBLIES 1 JUNE 2010 05810 - 3 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 SEC -T -ION 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY ' PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUBMITTALS • ' A. Action Submittals: 1. Product Data: a. Sheathing. b. Metal framing anchors. 1 B. Informational Submittals: 1. Wood treatment manufacturer's instructions for handling, storing, ' installation, and finishing of treated material. 2. Certificates: • a. For each type of preservative treated wood product, include 1 certification by treatment plant stating type of preservative solution and pressure process used, net amount of preservative retained, and compliance with applicable standards. b. For waterborne treated products include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels indicated prior ' to shipment to Site. 1.02 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Immediately upon delivery to Site, place materials in area protected from weather. Do not store seasoned materials in wet or damp areas. B. Protect sheet materials from breaking corners and damaging surfaces while unloading. C. Store materials a minimum of 6 inches above ground on framework or blocking and cover with waterproof covering, providing for adequate air circulation and ventilation. Store sheet materials flat, not on edge. ' D. For lumber pressure treated with waterborne chemicals, place spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. ' E. Store materials for which a maximum moisture content is specified in areas where humidity can be controlled. i CVO/391538A ROUGH CARPENTRY JUNE 2010 06100 - 1 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 PA ' RT 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL 1 A. Lumber Standards: 1. Lumber manufactured in accordance with DOC PS 20 and with applicable grading rules and wood species certified by ALSC. Design values for wood members equal to those published in supplement to AF &PA's "National Design Specification for Wood Construction." 2. Stamp or brand each unexposed piece of lumber with grade, species, and moisture content at time of mill surfacing. B. Lumber sizes shown on Drawings are nominal, unless shown otherwise. Provide actual sizes as required by DOC PS 20 for use. ' C. Dressed lumber S4S, unless shown otherwise on Drawings. D. Moisture content of lumber not to exceed 19 percent, unless otherwise specified and marked "DRY ". E. Each plywood panel identified with designated grade trademark of APA. 2.02 LUMBER A. Furnish lumber as follows, unless specified otherwise: Usage Minimum Grade Nailers Douglas Fir -Larch No. 2, Hemlock, Southern Pine Stud grade, nondense pressure treated 2.03 GYPSUM SHEATHING A. Water- Resistant Core Board: 1. Noncombustible gypsum core incorporating water - resistant material, surfaced on face, back, and long edges with water - repellent paper; complying with ASTM C1396/C1396M. 2. Type: Type X with special fire- resistant properties. 3. Edge and End Configuration: Square. 4. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 1 Y ROUGH CARPENTRY CVO/391538A 06100 - 2 JUNE 2010 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 2.04 - PRESERVATIVE WOOD TREATMENT BY PRESSURE- PROCESS 1 A. General: Where lumber is indicated as preservative treated wood, in accordance with AWPA C2 (Lumber). Mark and grade each treated item in accordance with SPIB 1003. ' 1. Kiln-dry after treatment to maximum moisture content of 19 percent. p cent. 2. Treat wood in contact with roofing or flashing. 3. Treat wood in contact with masonry or concrete. 4. Treat wood less than 18 inches above grade. ' B. Aboveground Materials: Pressure treat items with waterborne preservatives to a minimum retention of 0.25 pcf. For interior uses, after treatment, kiln -dry 1 lumber and plywood to maximum moisture content, respectively, of 19 percent and 15 percent. Treat the following items: 1. Wood nailers, equipment support bases, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, and waterproofing. 2.05 HARDWARE A. Conform to ASTM F1667. B. Nails: 1. Conform to ASTM F1667. 1 2. Steel common nails. 3. Use hot - dipped zinc - coated nails wherever exposed. ' C. Screws: Conform to ASTM A307, galvanized where exposed. PART 3 EXECUTION 1 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify surfaces to receive rough carpentry materials are prepared to exact grades and dimensions. ' 3.02 GENERAL A. Lay out, cut, fit, and install rough carpentry items. Anchor sufficiently to ' ensure rigidity and permanence. B. Install items accurate to dimension, true to line, level, and square unless I shown otherwise on Drawings. Provide for installation and support of other Work. CVO/391538A ROUGH CARPENTRY JUNE 2010 06100 - 3 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 C. Discard units of material with defects that impair quality of rough carpentry construction and that are too small to use in fabricating rough carpentry with minimum joints or optimum joint arrangement. D. Countersink nail heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes. E. Make rovisions for temporary construction loads, and provide p p ry p o de temporary bracing sufficient to maintain structure in true alignment and safe condition until completion of erection and installation of permanent bracing. F. Field cuts and holes in pressure - treated lumber shall be field treated with preservative in accordance with AWPA M4. G. Holes shall be 1/16 inch larger than nominal bolt diameter, except holes for cast -in -place anchor bolts shall be 3/16 inch larger than nominal bolt diameter. Tight holes requiring forcible driving of bolts shall be enlarged by reaming. H. Provide washers under bolt heads and nuts bearing on wood. 3.03 INSTALLATION ' A. Sills and Plates: Set level and flush with outside face of foundation or as shown on Drawings. Anchor as noted on Drawings. B. Gypsum Sheathing: 1. Abut ends of sheathing at center of supports. Stagger end joints. 2. Attach sheathing fasteners spaced at 8 inches on center on supports. 3.04 PRESERVATIVE TREATED WOOD PRODUCTS A. Provide preservative treated wood for framing, blocking, furring, nailing strips built into exterior masonry walls, wood in contact with concrete or masonry and in conjunction with gravel stops, and built -up roofing. B. Apply two brush coats of same preservative used in original treatment to sawed or cut surfaces of treated lumber. END OF SECTION 1 1 1 ROUGH CARPENTRY CVO/391538A 06100 - 4 JUNE 2010 • DURHAM PHASE 5B1 SECTION 07530 -- ' ETHYLENE- PROPYLENE- DIENE- MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING ' PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Layout of tapered insulation. 2. Project specific details of roof penetrations and perimeter conditions. 3. Layout and details of mechanical fastening system. 4. List of materials proposed for use including roofing materials, ' accessories, insulation, and fasteners. 5. Manufacturer's specifications selected for use, including a description of the complete system from the deck up. 6. Documentation that anchoring system meets uplift requirements. B. Informational Submittals: • ' 1. Manufacturer's Certificate of Compliance, in accordance with Section 01640, Manufacturers' Services. 2. Manufacturer's installation instructions. 3. A letter or other documentation from roofing materials manufacturer stating that installer has been trained and approved to apply the roof. 1 4. Sample copy of guarantee to be provided. 5. Record of Preroofing Conference. ' 6. Inspection reports for inspections conducted by membrane manufacturer's representative, including written instructions or recommendations as conditions to special guarantee. 1 7. Manufacturer's Certificate of Proper Installation, in accordance with Section 01640, Manufacturers' Services. t C. Technical Operation and Maintenance Information: 1. Operation and Maintenance Data: As specified in Section 01782, Operation and Maintenance Data. 2. Include sketches where applicable; recommendations for periodic inspections, care, and maintenance; identify common causes of damage ' with instructions for temporary patching until permanent repair can be made. t CVO/391538A ETHYLENE- PROPYLENE - DIENE- JUNE 2010 MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING 1 07530 - 1 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 1 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer: 1. Trained and approved by roof membrane manufacturer. 2. Experience: 3 years, minimum, in the installation of the specific roofing and flashing system specified. 3. Shall be responsible for roofing work to include new and repairs to existing. B. Materials, including insulation used in roofing system, shall be furnished by 1 or approved by manufacturer whose roofing system is selected for use. C. Preroofing Conference: 1. Attendees: Conduct Preroofing Conference with Engineer, roofing installer, roofing manufacturer, installers of related Work, and other entities concerned with roofing performance including (where applicable) Owner's insurer, test agencies, governing authorities, and Owner. 2. Agenda: Follow outline in NRCA's Waterproofing Manual; including acceptability of deck, roofing system materials, manufacturer's specifications selected, flashing details, roof guarantee, and protection of furnished roofing system. 3. Record discussions and agreements; furnish copy to each participant and entity invited. D. Membrane manufacturer's inspection as required to meet conditions of guarantee. 1 1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in their original, unopened containers, clearly labeled with manufacturer's name, brand name, and such identifying numbers as are appropriate. B. Storage: 1. Store materials at temperatures between 60 degrees F and 80 degrees F. 1 Should they be exposed to lower temperatures, restore to 60 degrees F prior to use. 2. Store rigid roof insulation materials on clean, raised platform. 3. Do not store uncured flashing membrane on roof or at temperatures exceeding 75 degrees F. ETHYLENE - PROPYLENE - DIENE- CVO/391538A 1 MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING JUNE 2010 07530 - 2 1 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 C. -- Protect materials against wetting, absorption, - and -con -- - - -- - g g, rp construction ' traffic. 1.04 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Weather: Do not install roofing during precipitation or when it is probable. B. Temperature: ' 1. Install roofing when ambient temperature is 50 degrees F or above. 2. When temperature is below 50 degrees F, install only with approval of, ' and under supervision of, membrane manufacturer. 1.05 SPECIAL GUARANTEE A. Product: Furnish manufacturer's extended guarantee or warranty, with Owner named as beneficiary, in writing as special guarantee. Special guarantee shall ' provide for correction or removal and replacement of roofing membrane, flashing, insulation, and accessories found defective during a period of ft d Subal , w,no d and obligati15 years ons a er for correction ate of or stanti removal Completion and replacement ith of ollar defecti ve W Duties ork shall 1 be as specified in General Conditions. B. Coverage and Conditions: • 1. Costs for repairs required to maintain roofing system, flashing, ' expansion joint covers, and roof vents in watertight condition. 2. Natural deterioration of roofing system as a result of ordinary wear and tear by elements. 3. Defects as a result of faulty materials or workmanship during application. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS 1 A. Carlisle SynTec, Inc.; Sure -Seal Systems. B. Firestone Building Products; RubberGard EPDM. C. Johns Manville; EPDM Single Ply. 1 1 CVO/391538A ETHYLENE- PROPYLENE- DIENE- JUNE 2010 MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING 1 07530 - 3 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 1 F 2.02 ROOFING SYSTEM STEM A. Complete system including: 1. Roof Insulation. 2. Vapor Retarder. 3. Membrane. 4. Flashings. 5. Accessory Materials. B. Meeting these specifications and approval of membrane manufacturer to 1 provide a fully adhered EPDM system meeting the following: 1. UL Class A fire resistance rating. 2. FM Loss Prevention Data 1 -28 requirements for I -90 wind uplift rating. 2.03 MEMBRANE MATERIALS A. Membrane: ASTM D4637, Type II, reinforced minimum 0.060 -inch thick Ethylene Propylene Diene Monomer (EPDM) compounded elastomer. B. Membrane Sheet Size: Maximum of 40 -foot width, or largest sheet possible, determined by Project conditions. C. Color: White. 2.04 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Furnish bonding adhesive, splicing primer and cement, mechanical fasteners, pourable sealant, lap sealant, water cutoff mastic, night seal, and prefabricated pipe seals approved by membrane manufacturer. B. Flashings: EPDM, 0.060 inch thick. 1 C. Anchoring System: Membrane manufacturer's standard metal bars or battens with screw anchors, screw - anchored plates to which membrane is bonded, or nonpenetrating anchors. D. Asphalt: ASTM D312, Type III. E. Asphalt Primer: ASTM D41. F. Roofing Felt: No. 15, asphalt saturated, perforated, organic felt, ASTM D226, 1 Type 1. 1 ETHYLENE - PROPYLENE - DIENE- CVO/391538A 1 MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING JUNE 2010 07530 - 4 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 2.05 RIGID -ROOF INSULATION A. Average Aged R -Value for Total Thickness of Rigid Roof Insulation: Minimum R =19. B. Insulation Board: Any one of the following materials may be used on this Project, provided roofing materials manufacturer will guarantee roofing ' system: 1. Polyisocyanurate Foam Board: ASTM C1289, Type II, with Factory ' Mutual Class I approval, minimum size: 2 feet by 4 feet, as manufactured by: a. Carlise; Polyisocyanurate HP -H. b. Firestone Building Products; ISO 95 +. c. Johns Manville; E'NRG'Y 2. 2. Tapered Board System: ' a. Factory precut or field- tapered insulation board, minimum 1 -inch thick with top surface cut to a uniform, continuous slope of 1/4 inch per foot. ' b. Fabricate miters and edges to match abutting blocks. c. Manufacturers and Products: 1) Carlise; Polyisocyanurate HP -H. 2) Firestone; ISO 95+ Tapered. 3) Johns Manville; Tapered E'NRG'Y 2 Plus System. 1 2.06 FASTENERS A. Into Wood: Zinc - coated, 12 -gauge roofing nails with 1 -inch diameter metal caps or heads and deformed shanks. B. Into Insulation: Nails as manufactured by: 1. Simplex Nail and Manufacturing Co.; Tube -Loc nail with 1 -inch diameter cap. 2. E. G. Building Fasteners Corp.; Insuldeck Loc -Nail. PART 3 EXECUTION 1 3.01 PREPARATION 1 A. Verify deck is firm, dry, clean, free of sharp edges, burrs, loose and foreign materials, oil, and grease, and reasonably smooth. ' B. Report immediately to Engineer cracks, breaks, holes, or other unusual irregularities in the surface. ' CVO/391538A ETHYLENE- PROPYLENE- DIENE- JUNE 2010 MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING ' 07530 - 5 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 C. Fill surface joints and cracks � a d c ac s wider than 1/4 inch with pourable sealer. D. Correct irregularities to deck/substrate that may cause ponding longer than 1 48 hours. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install a complete UL listed Class A system of compatible materials that will create a monolithic watertight single -ply roof membrane. B. In accordance with membrane manufacturer's instructions for installation of complete, warrantable roof system. ' C. In accordance with membrane manufacturer's standard details for flashing and termination conditions. 1 D. Meet FM Loss Prevention Data 1 -28 requirements for I -90 wind uplift rating. 3.03 VAPOR RETARDER INSTALLATION A. Prime concrete as required by roofing materials manufacturer. 1 B. Apply two plies of roofing felt with 19 -inch lap, mopped in with asphalt. C. Flash vapor retarder roofing felts at roof edges and penetrations with an additional ply of roofing felt, mopped in with asphalt. D. Apply 20 pounds of asphalt per 100 square feet between plies and as top 1 surface. 3.04 INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Install thickness necessary for R =19 in two or more layers. B. Provide sumps around roof drains. C. Install insulation so that it will meet uplift requirements of FM Global. 1 D. Install additional layers with joints staggered or offset from those below. E. On Vapor Retarder: Set insulation boards in hot asphalt applied at equiviscosity temperature plus or minus 25 degrees F, and at rate of 1 23 pounds per 100 square feet. F. Do not install more insulation each day than can be covered with membrane before end of day or start of inclement weather. ETHYLENE - PROPYLENE - DIENE- CVO/391538A MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING JUNE 2010 07530 - 6 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 • 3.05 - MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES- - 1 A. Provide manufacturer's representative at Site in accordance with Section 01640, Manufacturers' Services, for installation assistance, inspection 1 and certification of proper installation, and training of Owner's personnel for maintaining specified system. ' B. Provide Engineer with copies of inspection reports. 3.06 CLEANUP A. Remove spots and smears of adhesive, sealant, asphalt, or other material resulting from the Work in this section from flashing, gravel stops, and other surfaces not intended to be coated with such material. ' B. During removal of spots and smears, ensure no damage will be done to the surfaces. ' C. Use solvents, if necessary, to satisfactorily clean the materials. 1 3.07 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK A. Limit traffic of personnel and equipment on completed roof to that deemed essential for completion of Project. END OF SECTION 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 CVO/391538A ETHYLENE- PROPYLENE- DIENE- JUNE 2010 . MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING 1 07530 - 7 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 SECTION 07620 - — — ' SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM ' PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 1 A. General: Sheet metal flashing and trim shall withstand wind loads, structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failing, rattling, leaking, and fastener disengagement. I B. For Wind Zone and Wind Loading Information: Refer to structural general notes. ' C. Thermal Movements: 1. Provide' sheet metal flashing and trim that allows for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of 1 joints, hole elongation, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. 2. Provide clips that resist rotation and avoid shear stress as a result of sheet metal and trim thermal movements. 3. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime -sky heat loss. ' 4. Temperature Change (Range): 120 degrees F, ambient; 180 degrees F, material surfaces. 1 D. Water Infiltration: Provide sheet metal flashing and trim that does not allow water infiltration to building interior. 1 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Standard: Comply with SMACNA's 1 "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Conform to dimensions and profiles shown, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. 1 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Show joints, types and location of fasteners, and special shapes. b. Catalog data for stock manufactured items. 2. Samples: Color Samples for items to be factory finished. CVO/391538A SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM JUNE 2010 07620 - 1 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 1.04 DELIVERY, ELIVERY, HANDLING, AND STORAGE A. Inspect for damage, dampness, and wet storage stains upon delivery to Work 1 Site. B. Remove and replace damaged or permanently stained materials that cannot be 1 restored to like -new condition. C. Carefully handle to avoid damage to surfaces, edges, and ends. D. Do not open packages until ready for use. E. Store materials in dry, weathertight, ventilated areas until immediately before installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PREFABRICATED METAL SYSTEMS A. Coping System: 1. Snap -on system, stucco embossed pattern aluminum, 0.050 -inch minimum thickness. 2. Include ancillary items, such as mitered and welded corners, and end caps, where shown and as required for complete system. 3. Manufacturers and Products: a. W.P. Hickman Co.; Permasnap Coping. b. MM Systems Corp.; Snap -Lok Coping. B. Finish: Factory finished with full strength fluoropolymer coating (Kynar polyvinylidene fluoride resin) in color semi -gloss black from manufacturer's standard color chart. 2.02 ANCILLARY MATERIALS A. Sealing Tape: Polyisobutylene sealing tape. 1 B. Isolation Paint: ASTM D1187, asphalt. C. Isolation Tape: Butyl or polyisobutylene, internally reinforced, or 20 -mil thick 1 minimum polyester. D. Fasteners: 1. For Aluminum Work: Stainless steel or aluminum. 1 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM CVO/391538A 07620 - 2 JUNE 2010 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 - PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify nailing strips and blocking are properly located. ' B. Verify membrane termination and base flashings are in place, sealed, and secure. 3.02 INSTALLATION 1 A. Prefabricated Metal Systems: 1. Follow system manufacturer's printed instructions. 1 2. Place color variations in pieces so no extremes are next to each other. 3.03 FINISH 1 A. Exposed Surfaces of Prefabricated Metal Systems: Free of dents, scratches, abrasions, or other visible defects, and clean and ready for painting where 1 applicable. 3.04 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and weathering. 1 B. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder and sealants. C. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim are installed. On completion of installation, clean finished surfaces, including removing unused fasteners, metal filings, pop rivet stems, ' and pieces of flashing. Maintain in a clean condition during construction. D. Replace prefabricated metal systems that have been damaged or that have ' deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. END OF SECTION 1 CVO/391538A SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM JUNE 2010 07620 - 3 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 SECTION 07700 ROOF SPECIALTIES AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 GENERAL ' 1.01 SUBMITTALS 1 A. Action Submittals: 1. Shop Drawings of each item specified showing materials, details, ' flashing, anchorage, and relation to adjacent structure. 2. Catalog cuts of each item specified item. 1 1.02 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Coordination: Schedule and coordinate work of this section with work of Section 07530, Ethylene - Propylene - Diene- Monomer Roofing. PART 2 PRODUCTS 1 2.01 SKYLIGHT SUPPORT CURBS 01 • A. Prefabricated Galvanized Steel: Minimum 12- inch -high curb with counterflashing, factory installed insulation, and treated wood nailer as required for conditions shown on Drawings. 1 B. Metal Gauge and Reinforcement: To suit imposed loads of equipment to be supported. ' C. Fabricate curbs to fit roof slope. ' D. Manufacturers and Products: 1. Pate Co.; ES -2. 2. ThyCurb; Model TEMS -3. 3. RPS Corporation; ER -2A. ' 2.02 ANCILLARY MATERIALS A. Isolation Paint: ASTM D1187, asphalt. 1 B. Isolation Tape: Butyl or polyisobutylene, internally reinforced, or 20-mil- thick minimum polyester. 1 C. Fasteners: Stainless steel of type required. ' CVO/391538A ROOF SPECIALTIES • JUNE 2010 AND ACCESSORIES ' 07700 - 1 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION 1 A. Examine surfaces and structures to receive the Work of this section. B. Take measurements at Site and fabricate work to suit. No changes shall be made in supporting structure to accommodate this Work. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. General: 1 1. Install roof specialties and accessories as detailed in approved shop drawings and in conformance with manufacturer's instructions, recommendations, and standards. 2. Make Work weathertight and free of expansion and contraction noise. 3. Maintain separation between aluminum surfaces and concrete or dissimilar metals with isolation tape. END OF SECTION 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ROOF SPECIALTIES CVO/391538A 1 AND ACCESSORIES JUNE 2010 07700 - 2 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 SECTION 07900 JOINT SEALANTS ' PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUBMITTALS 1 A. Action Submittals: 1. Shop Drawings: Surface preparation instructions. Indicate where each ' product is proposed to be used. 2. Samples: Material proposed for use showing color range available. B. Informational Submittals: 1. Installation instructions. 2. Documentation showing applicator qualifications. 3. Manufacturer's Certificate of Compliance, in accordance with Section 01640, Manufacturers' Services. ' 4. Special guarantee. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: Minimum of 5 years' experience installing sealants in projects of similar scope. 1 1.03 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Ambient Temperature: Between 40 degrees F and 80 degrees F (4 degrees C and 27 degrees C) when sealant is applied. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges. 1 PART 2 PRODUCTS ' 2.01 SEALANT MATERIALS A. Characteristics: ' 1. Uniform, homogeneous. • 2. Free from lumps, skins, and coarse particles when mixed. 3. Nonstaining, nonbleeding. 4. Hardness of 15 minimum and 50 maximum, measured by ASTM C661 method. 5. Immersible may be substituted for nonimmersible. CVO/391538A JOINT SEALANTS 'JUNE 2010 07900 - 1 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 B. Color: Unless specifically noted, match color of the principal material adjoining area of application. C. Type 2— Multipart Polyurethane, Self- leveling, Immersible: 1. Polyurethane base, multicomponent, chemical curing; ASTM C920, . 1 Type M, Grade P, Class 25. 2. Capable of being continuously immersed in water. 3. Manufacturers and Products: a. BASF; Sonneborn, SL -2. b. Pecora Corp.; Urexspan NR -200. c. Tremco; THC- 900/901. d. Sika Chemical Corp.; Sikaflex 2c SL. D. Type 3— Multipart Polyurethane, Nonsag, Immersible: 1 1. Polyurethane base, multicomponent, chemical curing; ASTM C920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 25. 2. Capable of being continuously immersed in water. 3. Manufacturers and Products: a. Pecora; DynaTrol II. b. Tremco; Dymeric 240. c. BASF; Sonneborn NP -2. d. Sika Chemical Corp.; Sikaflex 2c NS. E. Type 5— One -part Polyurethane, Immersible: 1. Polyurethane base, single- component, moisture curing; ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS or P, Class 25. 2. Capable of being continuously immersed in water. 3. Manufacturers and Products for Nonsag: a. Sika Chemical Corp.; Sikaflex -la. b. Tremco; Vulkem 116. 4. Manufacturers and Products for Self- leveling: a. BASF; Sonneborn, SL -1. b. Tremco; Vulkem 45. c. Sika Chemical Corp.; Sikaflex lc SL. F. Type 7— Multipart Polysulfide, Immersible: 1 1. Polysulfide base, two- component, chemical curing; ASTM C920, Type M, Grade P or NS, Class 25. 2. Capable of being continuously immersed in water. 3. Manufacturers and Products: a. W. R. Meadows; Deck -O -Seal Gun Grade, two -part. b. BASF; Sonolastic, two -part Polysulfde. 1 JOINT SEALANTS CVO/391538A 07900 - 2 JUNE 2010 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 2.02 BACKUP MATERIAL A. Nongassing, extruded, closed -cell round polyurethane foam or polyethylene foam rod, compatible with sealant used, and as recommended by sealant ' manufacturer. B. Size: As shown or as recommended by sealant material manufacturer. Provide for joints greater than 3/16 inch wide. C. Manufacturers and Products: 1. Sonneborn; Sonolastic Closed -cell Backing Rod. 2. Tremco; Closed -cell Backing Rod. 3. Pecora Corporation; Green Rod. ' 2.03 ANCILLARY MATERIALS ' A. Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape as recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. B. Joint Cleaner: Noncorrosive and nonstaining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer; compatible with joint forming materials. C. Primer: Nonstaining type recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Use of more than one material for the same joint is not allowed unless approved by sealant manufacturer. B. Install joint sealants in accordance with ASTM C1193. ' C. Horizontal and Sloping Joints up to 1 Percent Maximum Slope: Use self - leveling (Grade P) joint sealant. ' D. Steeper Sloped Joints, Vertical Joints, and Overhead Joints: Use nonsag (Grade NS) joint sealant. E. Use joint sealant as required for the applicable application and as follows: Joint Size Sealant Type ' Less than 1" 2, 3, 5, or 7 Less than 2" 2, 3, or 7 CVO/391538A JOINT SEALANTS JUNE 2010 07900 - 3 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 1 Joint Size Sealant Type Over 2" Follow manufacturer's recommendation 1 3.02 PREPARATION A. Verify that joint dimensions, and physical and environmental conditions, are acceptable to receive sealant. B. Surfaces to be sealed shall be clean, dry, sound, and free of dust, loose mortar, oil, and other foreign materials. 1. Mask adjacent surfaces where necessary to maintain neat edge. 2. Starting of work will be construed as acceptance of subsurfaces. 3. Apply primer to dry surfaces as recommended by sealant manufacturer. 1 C. Verify joint shaping materials and release tapes are compatible with sealant. D. Examine joint dimensions and size materials to achieve required width /depth ratios. E. Follow manufacturer's instructions for mixing multi- component products. 3.03 INSTALLATION • A. Use joint filler to achieve required joint depths, to allow sealants to perform intended function. 1 1. Install backup material as recommended by sealant manufacturer. 2. Where possible, provide full length sections without splices; minimize number of splices. B. Use bond breaker where recommended by sealant manufacturer. 1 C. Seal joints around door frames, expansion joints, and elsewhere as indicated. D. Joint Sealant Materials: Follow manufacturer's recommendation and 1 instructions, filling joint completely from back to top, without voids. E. Joints: Tool slightly concave after sealant is installed. 1 1. When tooling white or light color sealant, use a water wet tool. 2. Finish joints free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags. F. Tape Sealant: Compress to 50 percent of expanded thickness and install in 1 accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1 JOINT SEALANTS CVO/391538A 07900 - 4 JUNE 2010 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 3.04 CLEANING -- — ' A. Clean surfaces next to the sealed joints of smears or other soiling resultant of sealing application. ' B. Replace damaged surfaces resulting from joint sealing or cleaning activities. 3.05 JOINT SEALANT SCHEDULE 1 A. This schedule lists the sealant types acceptable for each joint location. Use as few different sealant types as possible to meet the requirements of Project. Joint Locations Sealant Type(s) Expansion /Contraction and Control Joints At: Concrete Walls (except water - holding and 3, 5, 7 belowgrade portions of structures) Concrete Floor Slabs (except for water - holding 2, 5 ' Structures) Slabs Subject to Vehicle and Pedestrian Traffic 2, 5 Material Joints At: Metal Door Frames (Exterior) 5 1 Metal Door Frames (Interior) 5 Wall Penetrations (Exterior) 5 Wall Penetrations (Interior) 5 Floor Penetrations 5, 7 Roof Penetrations 5 Precast Concrete Wall Panels 3, 5, 7 1 Other Joints: Threshold Sealant Bed 5 END OF SECTION 1 CVO/391538A 38 JOINT SEALANTS JUNE 2010 07900 - 5 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 SECTION 08001 - ' DOOR AND HARDWARE SCHEDULE PART 1 GENERAL ' 1.01 SUBMITTALS A. Submittal requirements are specified in appropriate product sections. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL ' A. Products and materials referred to in this section are specified in the appropriate product sections. 1 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Requirements for incorporation of scheduled products into the Work are specified in the appropriate product sections. 3.02 SUPPLEMENTS ' A. The supplements listed below, following "End of Section," are a part of this Specification. ' 1. Door and Hardware Schedule: A tabulation of door, frame, and finish hardware characteristics for each opening numbered on Drawings. Provide items as scheduled. ' 2. Door Types. 3. Door Frame Types. END OF SECTION 1 1 1 CVO/391538A DOOR AND HARDWARE SCHEDULE JUNE 2010 08001 - 1 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 DOOR AND HARDWARE SCHEDULE ABBREVIATIONS: NOTES: AL Aluminum MATL Material No. 1 See end of this Specification section for door and frame types. AS As Selected MET Metal No. 2 For door details, see Design Details. CLSR Closer MS Manufacturer's Standard No. 3 Letter- number codes in hardware columns refer to items of hardware in Specification Section 08710. COL Color P -P Push -Pull No. 4 Numbers in "Fnsh" column refer to paint systems in Specification Section 09900. . CONSTR ' Construction RFS Roll -Up Fire Shutter No. 5 Codes in "COL" column refer to color list in Specification Section 09000. FCTY Factory SC Solid Core Wood No. 6 For glass types, see Specification Section 08800. FNSH Finish SIM Similar No. 7 All door hardware by door manufacturer, except for keyfob operated locks. FRP Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic SST Stainless Steel No. 8 Color semi -gloss black to be selected from manufacturer's standard color chart. HC Hollow Core TSHD Threshold No. 9 Match new door and door frame colors to new overhead coiling door color. HM Hollow Metal VIN Vinyl No. 10 Match new overhead coiling door color. KEY Key Group W -S Weatherstripping K -PL Kick Plate WW Window Wall Opening Fire Size Door Frame Details Hardware Protec- Other lion Require - No. Width Height Constr Type Glass Fnsh Col Matl Type Fnsh Col Head Jamb Sill Hinge Lock Exit Clsr P -P Stop Bolt K -PL Tshd W -S Misc Rating ments 312A 3' -0" 7' -0" HM G SG 106 Note HM F -1 106 Note 8101 8102 8701 H1 LI - C6 - - - K2 T2 WI MI "COMPACTOR 9 9 ROOM" 312B 3' -0" 7' -0" HM G SG 106 Note HM F -1 106 Note 8101 8102 8701 Hl L1 - C6 - - - K2 T2 WI Ml "COMPACTOR 9 9 ROOM" 312C 11' -0" 16' -0" MET OCD - FCTY Note MET F -2 5 Note 8303 8304 8304 - L2 - - - - - - - - - 1- Note 7 8 10 312D 11%0" 15' -9" MET OCD - FCTY Note MET F -2 5 Note 8303 8304 8304 - - - - - - - - - - - - Note 7 8 10 312E 11' -0" 16' -0" MET OCD - FCTY Note MET F -2 5 Note 8303 8304 8304 - L2 - - - - - - - - - - Note 7 8 10 313A 3' -0" 7' -0" HM G - 106 Note HM F -1 106 Note 8101 8102 8701 1-11 LI X -1 C6 - - - K2 T2 WI Ml - "ELECTRICAL 9 9 ROOM" 313B 3' -0" 7' -0" HM F - 106 Note HM F -1 106 Note 8101 8102 8701 H1 LI X -1 C6 - - - K2 T2 WI Ml - "ELECTRICAL (2) 9 9 (2) (2) (2) ROOM" I CVO/391538A DOOR AND HARDWARE SCHEDULE JUNE 2010 08001 SUPPLEMENT - 1 I DURHAM PHASE 5B 1 1 I DOOR I DOOR WIDTH �WI DTHH co 1 I GLAZING i r ;'1 AS SCHEDULED, I w cc cc 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 F G P I r DOOR WIDTH I 2 I ec 0 _ I OVERHEAD COILING DOOR 1 OCD 1 DOOR TYPES 1 DOOR AND HARDWARE CVO / 391538A SCHEDULE I JUNE 2010 08001 SUPPLEMENT - 1 • 1 DURHAM PHASE 5B 1 1 1 1 2" DOOR 72" DOOR 1r WIDTH WIDTH N 1 1 1 H I H REMOVABLE _ MULLION AT 0 I PAIRS OF DOORS W _m_______ I I cc 0 I 0 11 0 0 1 1 * 1 1 _ i • III F -1 F -2 I 1 1 1 1 NOTES: I 1. OPENINGS IN CONCRETE WALLS ARE ROUGH OPENING DIMENSIONS. FABRICATE FRAME TO FIT ROUGH OPENING • I WITH SHIMS AND SEALANT JOINTS ALL AROUND AS NOTED IN DETAILS. 1 DOOR FRAME TYPES 1 DOOR AND HARDWARE CVO / 391538A SCHEDULE 1 JUNE 2010 08001 SUPPLEMENT - 1 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 SECTION 08002- ' RELIGHT SCHEDULE ' PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUBMITTALS 1 A. Submittal requirements are specified in appropriate material sections. PART 2 PRODUCTS 1 2.01 GENERAL ' A. Products and materials referred to in this section are specified in appropriate product sections. 1 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL 1 A. Requirements for incorporation of scheduled products into the Work are specified in appropriate product sections. 3.02 SUPPLEMENTS ' A. The supplements listed below, following "End of Section," are a part of this Specification. 1 1. Relight Schedule: A tabulation of window, glazing, and treatment characteristics for each opening numbered on Drawings. Provide items as scheduled. 2. Relight Types. END OF SECTION 1 1 1 1 CVO /391538A RELIGHT SCHEDULE 1 JUNE 2010 08002 - 1 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 • RELIGHT SCHEDULE WINDOW TYPE ABBREVIATIONS: OTHER ABBREVIATIONS: F Fixed CLR Clear FCTY Factory HM Hollow Metal • NOTES: No. 1 For frame types, see following page. No. 2 For frame details, see Design Details. No. 3 For glass types, see Specification Section 08800. No. 4 Match hollow metal door frame as scheduled in Section 08001. No. 5 Numbers in Fnsh column refer to paint systems in Specification Section 09900. Opening Frame Size Window Details Blinds Other Requirements No. Width Height Type Glass Col Matl Type _ Fnsh Col Head Jamb Sill Y/N Col R313 2' -0" 4' -0" F SG Note 3 HM R -1 106 Note 4 8107 8111 8112 - - Sill at 3'-4" above Electrical Room floor • CVO/391538A RELIGHT SCHEDULE JUNE 2010 08002 SUPPLEMENT - 1 1 DURHAM PHASE 5B 1 1 1 1 ' RELIGHT WIDTH a 2" TYP N 1 _ GLAZING TY SPECIFIED, 1 J w = R -1 • 1 1 1 1 1 1 • 1 RELIGHT TYPES 1 CVO / 391538A RELIGHT SCHEDULE 1 JUNE 2010 08002 SUPPLEMENT - 1 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 SECTION 08110 METAL DOORS AND FRAMES ' PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: Applicable information for each type of door and frame, including: 1. Frame conditions and complete anchorage details, supplemented by suitable schedules covering doors and frames. 2. Glass opening sizes and locations in doors. 3. Connections of door frames to structural steel framing concealed in frames. 4. Location and field splice joints for frames too large to ship in one piece; indicate complete instructions for making field splices. 5. Joints required to accommodate expansion joint movement. I 6. Relate to door numbers used in Contract Drawings. 1.02 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Properly identify each item with number used in Contract Drawings. B. Store doors upright, in protected dry area, at least 1 inch off ground or floor and at least 1/4 inch between individual pieces. PART 2 PRODUCTS ' 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Materials, equipment, and accessories specified in this section shall be products of: ' 1. Curries Manufacturing. 2. The Ceco Corp. 3. Steelcraft Manufacturing Co. 1 2.02 MATERIALS ' A. Basic Metal Material: ASTM A1008 /A1008M; sheet steel, cold - rolled, stretcher level. 1 1 CVO/391538A METAL DOORS AND FRAMES JUNE 2010 08110 - 1 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 1 B. Hollow Metal Frames: 1. Products of hollow metal door manufacturer. 1 2. ANSI 250.8, except as modified herein. 3. Frames for Doors: 14 -gauge for exterior, welded type, of cross - section shown. 4. Prepare floor and wall anchors, reinforcement, and cutouts for hardware to meet requirements of BHMA A156.115 and ANSI A250.6. 5. Finished size, shape, and profile of frame members as shown. 6. Concealed fasteners or welding are preferred to through- the -face fasteners. 7. Identification: Stamp opening number, as shown on Drawings, on center hinge reinforcement of each frame. C. Hollow Metal Doors: ANSI A250.8, except as modified herein. 1 BHMA A156.115 and ANSI A250.6 to receive hardware specified in Door and Hardware Schedule. 1. Exterior: a. Flush Panel Doors: 16- gauge, Level 3, Model 1. b. Double Doors: Overlapping astragals for active leaf, except as noted or detailed otherwise. c. Flush end closure at top of doors. d. R- Value: 10. D. Glazing: 1. Doors: Furnish with formed flush -type glazing strips with butt corner joints to permit selection of secure side in field. 2. Glazing Arrangements: Accommodate glass of type and thickness indicated and as specified in Section 08800, Glazing. 2.03 MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS 1 A. Furnish manufacturer's standard core filler, anchors, fasteners, and other ancillary items. 2.04 FACTORY FINISHING REQUIREMENTS 1 A. Galvanized with A60 zinc coating in accordance with ASTM A653/A653M (Wipe Coat galvanized coating is not acceptable). B. Phosphate treat metal for paint adhesion. C. One shop coat of baked -on rust- inhibiting prime coating compatible with 1 finish coating as specified in Section 09900, Painting and Coating. 1 METAL DOORS AND FRAMES CVO/391538A 08110 - 2 JUNE 2010 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION ' A. Frames: 1. Follow ANSI A250.11 and manufacturer's instructions. a. Maintain scheduled dimensions, hold head level, and maintain jambs plumb and square. b. Secure anchorages and connections to adjacent construction. ' c. Wherever possible, leave frame spreader bars intact until frames are set perfectly square and plumb and anchors are securely attached. B. Doors: 1. Hollow Metal Doors: ANSI A250.8. 1 2. Hardware: In accordance with manufacturer's templates and instructions. ' a. Adjust operable parts for correct function. b. Remove hardware, with exception of prime coated items, tag, box, and reinstall after finish paint work is completed. 3.02 FIELD PAINTING A. Where prime coat has been damaged, sand smooth and touch up with same ' primer as applied at shop. 1. Remove rust before painting. ' 2. Touch Up: Not obvious. 3. Perform immediately after door and frame installation. ' 3.03 PROTECTION A. Protect installed doors and frames against damage from other construction 1 work. 3.04 SCHEDULES 1 A. For tabulation of door and frame characteristics, such as size, type, detail, and finish hardware requirements, see Section 08001, Door and Hardware 1 Schedule. END OF SECTION 1 CVO/391538A METAL DOORS AND FRAMES JUNE 2010 08110 -3 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 SECTION 08333 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS PART 1 GENERAL ' 1.01 SUBMITTALS ' A. Action Submittals: 1. Construction and installation details and electrical characteristics and control diagrams for motor operators. 2. Seismic anchorage and bracing drawings and cut sheets, as required by Section 01612, Seismic Anchorage and Bracing. B. Informational Submittals: 1. Seismic anchorage and bracing calculations as required by Section 01612, Seismic Anchorage and Bracing. 2. Installer's factory authorization. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: Experienced, factory authorized installer. PART 2 PRODUCTS • 2.01 MANUFACTURED UNITS ' A. Description: Complete, interior face - mounted, insulated rolling service door assemblies, weather sealed and able to withstand wind load of 25 pounds per square foot. B. Features: ' 1. Curtain: Interlocking flat, minimum 20 -gauge steel insulated slats with maximum U -value of 0.16 and backing to match face slat, thermally separated from face slat. ' 2. Hood: Match curtain material. 3. Slide Guides: ASTM A36 steel, shapes as appropriate for conditions. 4. Brackets, Gears, and Barrel: Manufacturer's standard items. 5. Bottom Bar: Steel bottom bar with flexible weatherstripping astragal on all exterior doors. Provide limit switch and AUTOMATIC stop and reversing feature in astragal. 6. End Locks and Wind Locks: End locks at ends of each slat, of material compatible with curtain. Provide wind locks at ends of every other slat minimum on exterior doors. CVO/391538A OVERHEAD COILING DOORS JUNE 2010. 08333 - 1 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 1 7. Weather Seals: a. Rubber, neoprene, or vinyl water seal at hood to prevent airflow around coil on exterior doors. b. Weather seal sealing strip on guide to close space between guide and curtain on exterior doors. 8. Finish: a. Curtain Slats, Bottom Bar, and Hood: Manufacturer's standard powder coat finish or baked on polyester finish, in color as indicated in Section 08001, Door and Hardware Schedule. b. Other Steel Surfaces: Corrosion - inhibiting prime paint, compatible with finish paint specified in Section 09900, Painting and Coating. 9. Electrical Wiring and Equipment: Meet requirements of National Electrical Code (NFPA 70) for location hazard classification noted on electrical drawings. C. Electrical: 1 1. Operator: Motor shall be 480 volts, three- phase, suitable for operation in a Class 1, Division 2 hazardous area. 2. Pushbutton Control Station: Provide three pushbuttons (UP, DOWN, STOP) in a NEMA 250' enclosure type as indicated in the Area Designations Table in Section 16010, Electrical Work, General. 3. Provide endless chain or crankshaft for emergency operation. D. See Section 08001, Door and Hardware Schedule, for doors requiring keyless entry locks. E. Manufacturers and Products: 1. The Cookson Co.; FMWI. 2. Cornell Iron Works; ESD20. 3. Overhead Door Corp.; 625. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Follow manufacturer's instructions for installation of components of assembly. . 1 1 i OVERHEAD COILING DOORS CVO/391538A 08333 -- 2 JUNE 2010 I DURHAM PHASE 5B1 1 3.02 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING 1 A. Adjust doors and operators for smooth, easy operation. B. Leave door assemblies clean, ready for paint. ' END OF SECTION 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 CVO/391538A OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 1 JUNE 2010 08333 - 3 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 SECTION -08710 DOOR HARDWARE ' PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Shop Drawings: ' a. Product Data: Manufacturer's literature for each item of finish hardware required herein, clearly marked. b. Finish Hardware Schedule: Furnish complete and detailed schedule, show product items, numbers, and finishes for hardware for each separate opening. c. Special Tools: Provide listing and description of usage. t B. Informational Submittals: ' 1. Operation and Maintenance Data as specified in Section 01782, Operation and Maintenance Data. 2. Manufacturer's Field Service Report. 3. Certification of Hardware Consultant. 4. Manufacturer's Certificate of Proper Installation, in accordance with Section 01640, Manufacturers' Services. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1 A. Qualifications of Supplier: Recognized supplier of architectural finish hardware, with warehousing facilities, who has been furnishing hardware in vicinity of Project for not less than 5 years, and who is, or who employs, ' architectural hardware consultant. B. Qualifications of Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC): Certified by Door and Hardware Institute. 1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Before delivery, clearly identify and tag each item of hardware with respect to specified description and location of installation. B. Provide secure storage for finish hardware until installation is made. 1 1.04 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Special Tools: Two sets for installation and maintenance of hardware. CVO/391538A DOOR HARDWARE JUNE 2010 08710 - 1 DURHAM PHASE 5B 1 PART 2 PRODUCTS 1 2.01 MATERIALS A. Provide end products of one manufacturer for each product in order to achieve standardization for appearance, maintenance, and replacement. 1 B. Finishes: BHMA A156.18. . 2.02 FASTENERS A. Stainless steel. 1 2.03 BUTT HINGES A. BHMA A156.1. 1 B. Quantity per Door Leaf (Minimum): Door Height Hinges Up to 5' -0" 1 pair 5' -1" to 7' -7" 1 -1/2 pair 7' -8" to 10' -0" 2 pairs 0 1 10' -1" to 12' -6" 2 -1/2 pairs C. Hinge Height (Minimum): Door Width Hinge Height 1 Up to 3' -0" 4-1/2" 3'-1" to 4' -0" 5" 1 Over 4' -0" 6" D. Width: Minimum for clearance of trim and 180- degree swing. 1 E. Exterior Hinges: Nonremoveable pin. F. Joint Tolerance: 0.012 inch maximum, gauged in CLOSED position. G. Finish: Satin stainless steel No. 630. 1 1 1 DOOR HARDWARE CVO/391538A 08710 -2 JUNE 2010 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 H. Types and Manufacturers: No. Type Description Stanley Mc- Kinney Lawrence BHMA HI Regular weight, two ball- FBB191 -32D TB2314 BB4101 -32D A5112 ' races, full mortise, stainless steel 2.04 LOCKS AND LATCH SETS ' A. Locks and Latches: As directed by the Owner, match existing in manufacturer, design, finish, and keying. No substitutions allowed. ' B. Types and Manufacturers: No. Type Description TRILOGY L 1 Proximity reader; mortise with Trilogy + Prox lever PDL 3000 L2 Proximity reader; mortise with Trilogy + Prox lever PDK 3000 C. Keying: 1. Lock Cylinders: Operate by master key system that allows for future expansion. ' 2. Keylocks: Key new locks into existing master key system, as directed by Owner. 3. Keys: Two per lock; tag with schedule information. 1 4. Master Keys: Four; send by registered mail to Owner. 5. Furnish lock manufacturer's removable core maximum security keying system. 2.05 CONSTRUCTION KEY SYSTEM ' A. Removable construction core system for locks. B. See Article Manufacturer's Services under Part 3, Execution. ' 2.06 CLOSERS ' A. BHMA A156.4. B. Size closers in accordance with manufacturer's standards. Mount parallel arm closers on push side of doors. CVO/391538A DOOR HARDWARE JUNE 2010 08710 - 3 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 C. Finish: Manufacturer's standard painted or powder coated finish, with special rust inhibiting (SRI) pretreatment, in color selected by Engineer from manufacturer's standard color range. D. Types and Manufacturers: No. Type/Description LCN Sargent BHMA C6 Parallel arm with 4110H Cush -N- 351 -PSH CO2061 1 integral stop and Stop Series Series hold -open 1 2.07 EXIT DEVICES A. BHMA A156.3. 1 B. Key Lockable, Removable Mullion: Aluminum construction, by exit device manufacturer. C. Trim: 1. Levers: Sargent ETJ; Von Duprin 03. D. Finish: 1. Exit Device: Satin chromium- plated No. 626. 2. Removable Mullion: Mill aluminum. 1 E. Types and Manufacturers: No. Type Description Sargent VonDuprin BHMA X1 Rim type, active leaf; 8813ETJ 99L Type 1 with removable 08 mullion for pairs 2.08 KICKPLATES 1 A. Solid metal, not plated. Bevel four edges. B. Width of door leaf less than 1 -1/2 inches at single leaf and less than 1 inch at pairs. C. Finish: Satin stainless steel No. 630. 1 1 DOOR HARDWARE CVO/391538A 08710 - 4 JUNE 2010 I DURHAM PHASE 5B1 D. Types and Manufacturers: Builders Br -- - yp ass Works, Baldwin, or Cipco as I follows: 1. K2: 36 inches high by 0.05 inch thick. 1 2.09 THRESHOLDS A. Thresholds: One -piece full width of opening; extend beyond jamb where 1 indicated. B. Provide with stainless steel machine screws in threaded expansion anchors at 1 concrete. C. Finish: Mill finish aluminum, unless indicated otherwise. I D. Types and Manufacturers: No. Type Description Pemko Reese T2 Saddle (serrated, 4" x 1/4 ") 270A S404A I 2.10 WEATHERSTRIP 0 A. Finish: Clear anodized aluminum, unless indicated otherwise. B. Seal Types and Manufacturers: I No. Type Description Pemko Reese I W1 Rubber or vinyl bulb at jambs S88D 797B and head, and at meeting stiles of pairs 1 Door shoe 222AV DB596AF Rain drip 346C R201C I 2.11 MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS 1 A. Provide as indicated in Door and Hardware Schedule. I M1 Nameplate as specified in Section 10400, Signage, in text noted in Door and Hardware Schedule 1 CVO/391538A DOOR HARDWARE I JUNE2010 08710 -5 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 PART 3 EXECUTION 1 3.01 INSTALLATION 1 A. In accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Make Work neat and secure, develop full strength of components, and provide proper function. C. Prevent marring, scratching, or otherwise damaging adjacent finishes during hardware installation. D. Latchbolts: 1. Install to engage in strikes automatically, whether activated by closers or manually. 2. In no case shall additional manual pressure be required to engage latchbolt in strike. 1 E. Stops and Holders: Set to allow doors to open as far as possible. F. Wall Mounted Hardware: Install over solid structural backing or solid blocking in hollow walls. G. Thresholds: 1. Cope ends neatly to profile of jamb. 2. Set in sealant and seal ends to jambs. H. Hardware: Adjust for easy, noise -free operation. 1 I. Replace damaged hardware items. 3.02 MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES 1 A. Delivery permanent lock cores to Site. B. Remove temporary construction cores and insert permanent cores. C. Inspect each lock set to ensure permanent cores are operating satisfactorily. 1 D. Deliver to Owner change and control keys for permanent system. E. Return temporary construction cores to manufacturer. 1 1 DOOR HARDWARE CVO/391538A 08710 - 6 JUNE 2010 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 F. Furnish manufacturer's representative for the following -services-at-Site-or p g - ' classroom as designated by Owner, for a minimum person -days listed below, travel time excluded: ' 1. 2 person -days for installation assistance, inspection, and Manufacturer's Certificate of Proper Installation. 2. 1 person -day for functional and performance testing. 1 3.03 MOUNTING DIMENSIONS A. Standard Door Hardware Locations: As recommended and published by Door 1 and Hardware Institute, except as noted or detailed otherwise. 3.04 PROTECTION 1 A. Cover and protect exposed surfaces of hardware during installation and until Substantial Completion. ' B. Fit, dismantle, and reinstall finish hardware as required for finish painting work. C. Protect and prevent staining of hardware during construction in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. D. Remove protective measures and permanent lock cylinders installed prior to final cleaning. 1 3.05 DOOR AND HARDWARE SCHEDULE A. Door and Hardware Schedule in Section 08001, Door and Hardware Schedule, is guide to functional requirements of each opening. B. Provide finish hardware as scheduled. Sizes omitted shall be as recommended by manufacturer. END OF SECTION 1 1 1 CVO/391538A DOOR HARDWARE JUNE2010 08710 -7 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 SECTION 08800 GLAZING ' PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: • 1. Shop Drawings: a. Complete schedule of glass and glazing material to be used for each purpose. b. Catalog cuts of glazing materials with inclusion of glass edge 1 cutting procedures.. c. Seismic anchorage and bracing drawings and data sheets, as required by Section 01612, Seismic Anchorage and Bracing. 1 2. Samples: a. Two of each different type of glass at least 12 inches by 12 inches properly labeled. 1 b. Two of each different type of glazing materials. B. Informational Submittals: 1. Seismic anchorage and bracing calculations as required by Section 01612, Seismic Anchorage and Bracing. 1 2. Manufacturer's Certificate of Compliance for each type of glazing, in accordance with Section 01640, Manufacturers' Services. ' 3. Details and methods of glazing for each type of glazing condition; include manufacturer's recommendations for setting, sealing materials, and installing each type of glazing. 4. Documentation declaring compatibility and adhesion test reports from sealant manufacturer indicating that glazing materials were tested for compatibility and adhesion with glazing sealants and other glazing materials. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1 A. Factory Label Glass: Nonlabeled glass will be rejected. B. Single Source Fabrication Responsibility: Fabrication processes, including 1 laminating, shall be fabricated by a single fabricator. 1 l A CVO /39 538 GLAZING 1 JUNE 2010 08800 - 1 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 1 1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Storage: ' 1. Support cases on both sides when stored vertically. 2. After unpacking, place interleaving protection between lites. 3. Keep glass and interleaving dry by storing inside where temperatures are above dewpoint, or if outside storage is necessary, cover the glass interleaving with opaque tarpaulins or plastic and inspect periodically. Wet interleaving can stain glass. 4. Avoid exposing stored glass to direct sunlight. B. Handling: 1. Stack individual lites on edge and lean them against sturdy uprights at a ' slope of 5 degrees to 7 degrees from vertical. 2. Cushion bottom edges with soft, firm pads free of dirt, grit, glass chips, or other foreign material. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Products of the following manufacturers, that meet these Specifications, may be used on this Project: 1. Laminated Safety Glass: a. AFG Industries, Inc. b. Arch Aluminum & Glass Co. c. Cardinal LG. d. Interpane Glass Company. e. TPG Technical Glass Products. 2.02 GLAZING MATERIALS A. Laminated Safety Glass (S.G.): ASTM C1172, 7 mm minimum total ' thickness, consisting of two lights of float glass, bonded to minimum 0.030 -inch clear polyvinyl butyral (PVB) interlayer, meeting 16 CFR 1201, Class 1 (transparent), as applicable, and ANSI Z97.1 and testing of 16 CFR 1201 for Category II materials. 2.03 ANCILLARY MATERIALS ' A. Glazing Tape: Preformed, semisolid, polymeric -based material of proper size and compressibility. Use only where glazing rabbet is designed for tape and 1 tape is recommended by glass or sealant manufacturer. 1 GLAZING CVO/391538A 08800 - 2 JUNE 2010 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 B. Glazing Sealant: One - component nonsag silicone - elastomeric sealant - -- - ' ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use G, or AAMA 800. PART 3 EXECUTION 1 3.01 PREPARATION A. Do not perform glazing work in damp, foggy, or rainy weather, or when temperatures are not within range recommended by GANA "Glazing Manual ". B. Surfaces: Smooth, even, sound, dry, and clean. C. Priming: Complete and cured. ' D. Measure size of frames to receive glass and compute actual glass size allowing for edge clearances. E. Use laminated safety glass in all doors. 1 F. Verify functioning weep system is present. G. Do not proceed with glazing until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 GLAZING INSTALLATION 1 A. General: Follow recommendations of glass manufacturer GANA "Sealant Manual, GANA "Glazing Manual" and the following: ' 1. Cutting: a. Make concealed edges clean, straight cut, and free from chips and ' fissures. b. Shop cut all glass. Nipping glass on job not allowed. c. Allow for maximum grip on all edges. ' 2. Positioning Glass: a. Set glass with equal bearing on entire width of pane. b. Position sheets of glass with setting blocks of hardness, ' chemically compatible with sealants used, and sizes recommended by glass and sealant manufacturers. c. Orient pattern and draw of glass pieces in same direction. d. Place glass waves parallel or horizontal to floor. e. Set glass with one translucent surface, with smooth surface, on weather side. 1 3. Glass shall not move or rattle. CVO/391538A GLAZING JUNE 2010 08800 - 3 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 3.03 HOSE TEST 1 A. Use 3/4 -inch minimum hose without nozzle. With full stream, flood glazing 1 from bottom to top. B. Correct any leaks disclosed by hose test by reglazing and retesting until 1 eliminated. 3.04 CLEANING 1 A. Leave glass and glazing in undamaged condition and ready for final cleaning. B. Remove excess glazing compound from installed glass. C. Remove labels from glass surface at time of final cleaning. 1 D. Wash and polish both faces of glass. 3.05 PROTECTION OF COMPLETED WORK A. Protection: 1 1. Keep glass free from contamination by materials capable of staining glass. 2. Install tape across lights secured to frames or structure. 3. No tape or marking allowed on glass. B. Replacements and Repairs: Prior to Substantial Completion, replace broken, defective, or scratched glass and repair damaged compounds. END OF SECTION 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 GLAZING CVO/391538A 08800 - 4 JUNE 2010 1 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 SECTION 08950 TRANSLUCENT PANEL SKYLIGHT ASSEMBLIES PART 1 GENERAL ' 1.01 SUBMITTALS ' A. Action Submittals: 1. Shop Drawings: Indicate fabrication and erection of insulated ' translucent panels. Include engineering calculations and details for subframes, where applicable. 2. Samples: 1 a. Assembled panel at least 24 inches by 24 inches, with specified translucent facings, properly labeled. b. Aluminum extrusions finished with specified colors. B. Informational Submittals: 1. Test Reports: Certified test reports made by independent testing organization for each type and class of panel system. Reports shall verify that material will meet performance requirements of this Specification. Previously completed test reports will be acceptable if current and indicative of products used on this Project. Test reports required are: a. Flame Spread and Smoke Development (UL 723). b. Burn Extent (ASTM D635). c. Color Difference (ASTM D2244). d. Impact Strength (Falling Ball Method). e. Bond Strength (ASTM C297 and ASTM D1002). ' f. Accelerated Aging (ASTM D1037). g. Beam Bending Strength (ASTM E72). h. Insulation U- Factor (NFRC 100). ' i. Abrasion/Erosion Resistance (ASTM D4060). 2. Qualifications: Translucent panel manufacturer and panel erector shall show, upon request, proof of their ability to perform Work. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE ' A. Panel System Manufacturer: Listed by recognized building code authority including International Conference, of Building Officials that requires quality control inspections for sandwich panel construction. Current ICC -ES Evaluation Report for specific system shall affirm that system can be installed in compliance with IBC. 1 CVO/391538A TRANSLUCENT PANEL JUNE 2010 SKYLIGHT ASSEMBLIES 08950 - 1 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 1 B. Installer: Approved by manufacturer. 1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 1 A. Store translucent panels on long edge, several inches above ground, blocked and under cover to prevent warping. 1 B. Ship units assembled and ready for erection. 1.04 SPECIAL GUARANTEE A. Manufacturer's extended guarantee or warranty, with Owner named as 1 beneficiary, in writing, as Special Guarantee. Special Guarantee shall provide for correction, or at option of Owner, removal and replacement of Work specified in this Specification section found defective during period of 5 years after date of Final Acceptance. Duties and obligations for correction or removal and replacement of defective Work shall be as specified in General Conditions. 1 B. Conditions: 1. Joint guarantee signed by Contractor, installer, and manufacturer. 2. No leakage of water to interior. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Materials and products specified in this section shall be products of Kalwall Corp., Manchester, NH. 2.02 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS A. Translucent Fiberglass Face Sheets: 1 1. Exterior: Crystal, 0.070 inch thick. 2. Interior: White, 0.045 inch thick. 3. Interior flamespread rating no greater than 50 and smoke developed no greater than 250, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. Burn extent by ASTM D635 shall be no greater than 1 inch. 4. Exterior faces shall not change color more than 3.0 units (DELTA -E by ASTM D2244) after 5 years outdoor weathering South Florida at 5 degrees facing south, determined by average of at least three white samples. 5. Exterior faces shall have permanent glass veil erosion barrier embedded 1 beneath the surface to provide long -term resistance to reinforced fiber TRANSLUCENT PANEL CVO/391538A 1 SKYLIGHT ASSEMBLIES JUNE 2010 08950 - 2 DURHAM PHASE 5B 1 1 exposure. Exterior face surface loss shall not exceed 0 -7 -mil -and- 40 mgs ' when tested in accordance with ASTM D4060, employing CS 17 abrasive wheels at a head load of 500 grams for 1,000 cycles. Surface - applied films or coatings are not acceptable erosion barriers. ' 6. Uniform in color. 7. Faces shall be completely free of ridges and wrinkles, which prevent proper surface contact in bonding to aluminum grid core. Clusters of air bubbles /pinholes that collect moisture and dirt will not be acceptable. 8. Strength: Exterior face sheet shall be uniform in strength and repel impact equal to 70- foot - pounds without fracture or tear. B. Grid Core: Noncombustible aluminum I- beams; 6063 -T6; mechanical interlocking of muntin- mullion and perimeter; 7/16 inch width. 111 C. Adhesive: 1. Heat and pressure resin type. 2. ICBO approved for use in sandwich panel construction. 3. Minimum Strength: ' a. Tensile: After 2 exposures to 6 cycles each of aging conditions in accordance with ASTM D1037: 750 psi by ASTM C297. b. Shear: After 5 separate aging conditions in accordance with ASTM D1002: 1) 50 percent relative humidity at 73 degrees F: 540 psi. 2) 182 degrees F: 100 psi. ' 3) Accelerated aging by ASTM D1037 at room temperature: 800 psi. 4) Accelerated aging by ASTM D1037 at 182 degrees F: ' 250 psi. 5) 500 -hour oxygen bomb, by ASTM D572: 1400 psi. D. Battens and Perimeter Closure Systems: 1. Battens and Closures: Extruded 6063 -T6 and 6063 -T5 aluminum screw ' clamp -tite closure system using 2 -inch battens. 2. Fasteners: Stainless steel screws. E. Flexible Sealing Tape: Manufacturer's standard; preapplied to closure system at factory under controlled conditions. F. Corrosion- Resistant Finish: Fluoropolymer fortified thermoset acrylic /urethane system that meets performance requirements of AAMA 605.2. 1 1. Uniform in appearance. 1 CVO/391538A TRANSLUCENT PANEL JUNE 2010 SKYLIGHT ASSEMBLIES 08950 - 3 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 2. Factory applied under controlled conditions: a. All aluminum to be wash -primed in accordance with MIL DOD- P- 15328D. b. Even over entire exposed aluminum surface. c. Minimum dry thickness of 2 mils (0.002 inch). 3. Shall remain adhered to aluminum substrate with no blistering or peeling, and color change shall be no greater than 3 DELTA -E Adams Units after 10 years' outdoor exposure at 5 degrees from vertical, facing south in South Florida. 4. Resistant to most chemicals, including acids, alkalies, gases, salt solutions, and water. 5. Color as selected from manufacturer's standard color range. 2.03 TRANSLUCENT PANEL SKYLIGHT FABRICATION A. Translucent Roof Panels (TRP): True structural composite flat sandwich panels of face sheets bonded to grid core of mechanically interlocking aluminum I- beams. Laminate faces to grid under controlled process of heat and pressure. Tape bond systems are not allowed. 1. Uniform Thickness: 2 -3/4 inches. 2. "U" Value: 0.29. 3. Light Transmission: 20 percent. 4. Shading Coefficient: 0.27. B. Grid Pattern: Nominal 12 inches by 24 inches for flat panels. C. Design: Self - supporting 27- degree ridge with gable ends as shown on Drawings. ' D. Assemble and seal panels at factory when practical for shipment. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A.. Prepare openings, including isolating aluminum system, from dissimilar materials that may cause damage by electrolysis. 3.02 ERECTION OF TRANSLUCENT PANEL SKYLIGHTS A. Erect insulated translucent panel systems in strict accordance with 1 manufacturer's instructions. Fasten and seal in strict accordance with manufacturer's shop drawings. Clean aluminum before applying sealants. TRANSLUCENT PANEL CVO/391538A i SKYLIGHT ASSEMBLIES JUNE 2010 08950 - 4 1 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 B. After other trades have completed work on adjacent-material, carefully inspect - ' translucent panel unit installation and make adjustments necessary to ensure proper installation and weathertight conditions. ' 3.03 CLEANING A. Leave translucent panels in undamaged condition and ready for final cleaning. ' On completion: No shifting or rattling of panels. B. Clean both faces of panels in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.04 PROTECTION OF COMPLETED WORK A. Install marker tape across panels secured to frames or structure. No tape or 1 marking allowed on panels after final cleaning. END OF SECTION 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 CVO/391538A TRANSLUCENT PANEL JUNE 2010 SKYLIGHT ASSEMBLIES 08950 - 5 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 09000 - - - SECTION SCHEDULES FOR FINISHES PART 1 GENERAL 1 1.01 SUBMITTALS 1 A. Submittal requirements are specified in appropriate product sections. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL ' A. Products and materials referred to in this section are specified in appropriate product sections. 1 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Requirements for incorporation of scheduled products into the Work are specified in appropriate product sections. 3.02 SUPPLEMENT ' A. The supplement listed below, following "End of Section," is a part of this Specification. 1. Interior Finish Schedule: A tabulation of surface materials, finishes, and colors for each interior space numbered on the Drawings. END OF SECTION 1 1 1 1 CVO/391538A SCHEDULES FOR FINISHES JUNE 2010 09000 - 1 1.11 i - M • M - - - IIIIII 11.11 EMI IIIIIIII DURHAM PHASE 5B1 INTERIOR FINISH SCHEDULE ABBREVIATIONS: NOTES: AL Aluminum FCTY Factory PLWD Plywood No. 1 Numbers in FNSH column refer to paint systems in Specification AS As Selected FNSH Finish SLR Clear Sealer • Section 09900. CLR Clear GLZ Glazing TCTG Traffic Coating No. 2 For door and frame finishes, see Door and Hardware Schedule in CMU Concrete Masonry Units HGT Height WRB Water Resistant GWB Specification Section 08001. COL Color HDNR Hardener X Open No. 3 Refer to Specification Section 03300 for schedule of concrete CONC Concrete MATL Material finishes. EXP Exposed Structure MET Metal No. 4 For window and trim fmishes, see schedule in Specification Section 08002. No. 5 See Structural Drawings for location and extent of hardener (HDNR) specified in Specification Section 03355. All other floor locations to receive sealer (SLR) specified in Specification Section 03370. No. 6 Broom finish where (HDNR) hardener is used. Space Floor Base & Wainscot T ical Wall Other Wall Ceiling Miscellaneous Other g l I I I I I g I I I I I Req'ments No. Name Sub Fl Fnsh Col Hgt Matl Fnsh Col -Wa Ma tl Fnsh Col Wall Matl Fnsh Col H t Matl Fnsh Col Item Matl Fnsh Col HEAD W ORKS 312 Compactor CONC SLR / CLR 5' -0" CONC - - ALL CONC FCT - N CMU 110 CLR 20' -0" CONC FCTY - - - - - Note 3 Room HDNR Y (Note 6 313 Electrical CONC SLR CLR 3' -0" CONC - - ALL CONC FCT - S CMU 110 CLR 12' -0" CONC FCTY - - - - - Note 3 Room Y CVO/391538A SCHEDULES FOR FINISHES JUNE 2010 09000 SUPPLEMENT - 1 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 SECTION 09900 - ' PAINTING AND COATING PART 1 GENERAL ' 1.01 DEFINITIONS A. Terms used in this section: 1. Coverage: Total minimum dry film thickness in mils or square feet per 1 gallon. 2. FRP: Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic. 3. HC1: Hydrochloric Acid. 1 4. MDFT: Minimum Dry Film Thickness, mils. 5. MDFTPC: Minimum Dry Film Thickness per Coat, mils. ' 6. Mil: Thousandth of an inch. 7. PDS: Product Data Sheet. 8. PSDS: Paint System Data Sheet. 9. PVC: Polyvinyl Chloride. 10. SFPG: Square Feet per Gallon. 11. SFPGPC: Square Feet per Gallon per Coat. 12. SP: Surface Preparation. 1.02 SUBMITTALS ' A. Action Submittals: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Data Sheets: 1) For each product, furnish a Product Data Sheet (PDS), the manufacturer's technical data sheets, and paint colors available (where applicable). The PDS form is appended to the end of this section. 2) For each paint system, furnish a Paint System Data Sheet (PSDS). The PSDS form is appended to the end of this section. 3) Technical and performance information that demonstrates compliance with Specification. 4) Furnish copies of paint system submittals to the coating ' applicator. 5) Indiscriminate submittal of only manufacturer's literature is not acceptable. b. Detailed chemical and gradation analysis for each proposed abrasive material. CVO/391538A PAINTING AND COATING JUNE 2010 09900 - 1 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 1 2. Samples: a. Proposed Abrasive Materials: Minimum 0.5 -pound sample for each type. b. Reference Panel: 1) Surface Preparation: a) Prior to start of surface preparation, furnish a 4 -inch by 4 -inch steel panel for each grade of sandblast specified herein, prepared to specified requirements. b) Provide panel representative of the steel used; prevent deterioration of surface quality. c) Panel to be reference source for inspection upon approval by Engineer. 2) Paint: a) Unless otherwise specified, before painting work is started, prepare minimum 8 -inch by 10 -inch sample with type of paint and application specified on similar substrate to which paint is to be applied. 1 b) Furnish additional samples as required until colors, finishes, and textures are approved. c) Approved samples to be the quality standard for final 1 finishes. B. Informational Submittals: 1. Applicator's Qualification: List of references substantiating experience. 2. Coating manufacturer's Certificate of Compliance, in accordance with 1 Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers' Field Services. 3. Factory Applied Coatings: Manufacturer's certification stating factory applied coating system meets or exceeds requirements specified. 1 4. Manufacturer's written verification that, submitted material is suitable for the intended use. 5. If the manufacturer of finish coating differs from that of shop primer, 1 provide finish coating manufacturer's written confirmation that materials are compatible. 6. Manufacturer's written instructions and special details for applying each type of paint. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1 A. Applicator Qualifications: Minimum 5 years' experience in application of specified products. 1 B. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Meet federal, state, and local requirements limiting the emission of volatile organic compounds. PAINTING AND COATING CVO/391538A 09900 - 2 JUNE 2010 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 .2. Perform surface preparation and - painting - in - accordance - with ' recommendations of the following: a. Paint manufacturer's instructions. b. SSPC PA 3, Guide to Safety in Paint Applications. ' c. Federal, state, and local agencies having jurisdiction. C. Mockup: 1. Before proceeding with Work under this section, finish one complete space or item of each color scheme required showing selected colors, ' finish texture, materials, quality of work, and special details. 2. After Engineer approval, sample spaces or items shall serve as a standard for similar work throughout the Project. ' 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Shipping: 1. Where recoated items are to be shipped to the Site, protect coating PP � p g 1 from damage. Batten coated items to prevent abrasion. 2. Protect shop painted surfaces during shipment and handling by suitable provisions including padding, blocking, and use of canvas or nylon slings. B. Storage: ' 1. Store products in a protected area that is heated or cooled to maintain temperatures within the range recommended by paint manufacturer. 2. Primed surfaces shall not be exposed to weather for more than 2 months before being topcoated, or less time if recommended by coating manufacturer. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: ' 1. Do not apply paint in temperatures or moisture conditions outside of manufacturer's recommended maximum or minimum allowable. ' 2. Do not perform final abrasive blast cleaning whenever relative humidity exceeds 85 percent, or whenever surface temperature is less than 5 degrees F above dew point of ambient air. CVO/391538A PAINTING AND COATING JUNE 2010 09900 - 3 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 1 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS ' A. Nationally recognized manufacturers of paints and protective coatings who are regularly engaged in the production of such materials for essentially identical service conditions. B. Minimum of 5 years' verifiable experience in manufacture of specified 1 product. C. Each of the following manufacturers is capable of supplying most of the products specified herein: 1. Carboline, St. Louis, MO. 1 2. ICI Devoe /International Paint, Houston, TX. 3. Sherwin Williams, Cleveland, OH. 4. Tnemec, Kansas City, MO. ' • 2.02 ABRASIVE MATERIALS A. Select abrasive type and size to produce surface profile that meets coating manufacturer's recommendations for specific primer and coating system to be applied. 2.03 PAINT MATERIALS A. General: 1. Manufacturer's highest quality products suitable for intended service. 1 2. Compatibility: Only compatible materials from a single manufacturer shall be used in the Work. Particular attention shall be directed to compatibility of primers and finish coats. 3. Thinners, Cleaners, Driers, and Other Additives: As recommended by coating manufacturer. • B. Products: Product Definition ' Acrylic Latex Single- component, finish as required Acrylic Sealer Clear acrylic ' Alkyd Enamel Optimum quality, gloss or semigloss finish as re s uired, medium lon' oil Bituminous Paint Single- component, coal -tar pitch based 1 PAINTING AND COATING CVO/391538A 09900 - 4 JUNE 2010 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 1 Product Definition ' Epoxy Primer — Anticorrosive, converted epoxy primer containing Ferrous Metal rust- inhibitive pigments 1 Epoxy Primer— Epoxy primer, high - build, as recommended by Other coating manufacturer for specific galvanized metal, copper, or nonferrous metal alloy to be coated 1 High Build Epoxy Polyamidoamine epoxy, minimum 69% volume solids, capability of 4 to 8 MDFT per coat 1 Polyurethane Enamel . Two - component, aliphatic or acrylic based polyurethane; high gloss finish 2.04 MIXING ' A. Multiple- Component Coatings: 1. Prepare using each component as packaged by paint manufacturer. 2. No partial batches will be permitted. 1 3. Do not use multiple- component coatings that have been mixed beyond their pot life. 4. Furnish small quantity kits for touchup painting and for painting other small areas. 5. Mix only components specified and furnished by paint manufacturer. 6. Do not intermix additional components for reasons of color or 1 . otherwise, even within the same generic type of coating. ' B. Colors: Formulate paints with colorants free of lead, lead compounds, or other materials that might be affected by presence of hydrogen sulfide or other gas likely to be present at Site. 1 2.05 SHOP FINISHES A. Shop Blast Cleaning: Reference Paragraph, Shop Coating Requirements. ' B. Surface Preparation: Provide Engineer minimum 7 days' advance notice to start of shop surface preparation work and coating application work. ' C. Shop Coating Requirements: ' 1. When required by equipment Specifications, such equipment shall be primed and finish coated in shop by manufacturer and touched up in field with identical material after installation. 1 2. Where manufacturer's standard coating is not suitable for intended service condition, Engineer may approve use of a tie -coat to be used between manufacturer's standard coating and specified field finish. In CVO/391538A PAINTING AND COATING JUNE 2010 09900 - 5 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 1 such cases, tie -coat shall be surface tolerant epoxy as recommended by manufacturer of specified field finish coat. Coordinate details of equipment manufacturer's standard coating with field coating manufacturer. D. Pipe: 1 1. Ductile Iron Pipe: a. Use SSPC standards as a guide for desired prepared surface. Follow recommendations of pipe and coating manufacturers for means and methods to achieve SSPC - equivalent surface. b. The surface preparation and application of the primer shall be performed by pipe manufacturer. c. For high performance (epoxy) coatings, follow additional recommendations of pipe and coating manufacturers. d. Prior to blast cleaning, grind smooth surface imperfections, including, but not limited to delaminating metal or oxide layers. ' PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL 1 A. Provide Engineer minimum 7 days' advance notice to start of field surface preparation work and coating application work. B. Perform the Work only in presence of Engineer, unless Engineer grants prior approval to perform the Work in Engineer's absence. C. Schedule inspection of cleaned surfaces and all coats prior to succeeding coat in advance with Engineer. 3.02 EXAMINATION A. Factory Finished Items: 1. Schedule inspection with Engineer before repairing damaged factory- , finished items delivered to Site. 2. Repair abraded or otherwise damaged areas on factory- finished items as recommended by coating manufacturer. Carefully blend repaired areas into original finish. If required to match colors, provide full finish coat in field. B. Surface Preparation Verification: Inspect and provide substrate surfaces prepared in accordance with these Specifications and printed directions and recommendations of paint manufacturer whose product is to be applied. The more stringent requirements shall apply. 1 PAINTING AND COATING CVO/391538A 09900 - 6 JUNE 2010 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 3.03 PROTECTION OF ITEMS NOT TO BE PAINTED 1 A. Remove, mask, or otherwise protect hardware, lighting fixtures, switchplates, aluminum surfaces, machined surfaces, couplings, shafts, bearings, ' nameplates on machinery, and other surfaces not specified elsewhere to be painted. 1 B. Provide drop cloths to prevent paint materials from falling on or marring adjacent surfaces. C. Protect working parts of mechanical and electrical equipment from damage. during surface preparation and painting process. ' D. Mask openings in motors to prevent paint and other materials from entering. E. Protect surfaces adjacent to or downwind of Work area from overspray. 1 3.04 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Field Abrasive Blasting: ' 1. Perform blasting for items and equipment where specified and as required to restore damaged surfaces previously shop or field blasted and primed or coated. 2. Refer to coating systems for degree of abrasive blasting required. 3. Where the specified degree of surface preparation differs from manufacturer's recommendations, the more stringent shall apply. B. Metal Surface Preparation: ' 1. Where indicated, meet requirements of SSPC Specifications summarized below: 1 a. SP 1, Solvent Cleaning: Removal of visible oil, grease, soil, drawing and cutting compounds, and other soluble contaminants by cleaning with solvent. 1 b. SP 2, Hand Tool Cleaning: Removal of loose rust, loose mill scale, loose paint, and other loose detrimental foreign matter, using nonpower hand tools. ' c. SP 3, Power Tool Cleaning: Removal of loose rust, loose mill scale, loose paint, and other loose detrimental foreign matter, using power- assisted hand tools. I d. SP 5, White Metal Blast Cleaning: Removal of visible oil, grease, dust, dirt, mill scale, rust, coatings, oxides, corrosion products, ' and other foreign matter by blast cleaning. e. SP 6, Commercial Blast Cleaning: Removal of visible oil, grease, dust, dirt, mill scale, rust, coatings, oxides, corrosion products, 1 CVO/391538A PAINTING AND COATING JUNE 2010 09900 - 7 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 1 1 and other foreign matter, except for random staining limited to no more than 33 percent of each unit area of surface which may consist of light shadows, slight streaks, or minor discolorations caused by stains of rust, stains of mill scale, or stains of previously applied coatings. f. SP 7, Brush -Off Blast Cleaning: Removal of visible rust, oil, grease, soil, dust, loose mill scale, loose rust, and loose coatings. Tightly adherent mill scale, rust, and coating may remain on surface. g. SP 10, Near -White Blast Cleaning: Removal of visible oil, grease, dust, dirt, mill scale, rust, coatings, oxides, corrosion products, and other foreign matter, except for random staining limited to no more than 5 percent of each unit area of surface which may consist of light shadows, slight streaks, or minor discolorations 1 caused by stains of rust, stains of mill scale, or stains of previously applied coatings. h. SP 11, Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal: Removal of visible 1 oil, grease, dirt, dust, mill scale, rust, paint, oxide, corrosion products, and other foreign matter using power- assisted hand tools capable of producing suitable surface profile. Slight residues of 1 rust and paint may be left in lower portion of pits if original surface is pitted. 2. The words "solvent cleaning ", "hand tool cleaning ", "wire brushing ", and "blast cleaning ", or similar words of equal intent in these Specifications or in paint manufacturer's specification refer to the applicable SSPC Specification. 3. Where OSHA or EPA regulations preclude standard abrasive blast cleaning, wet or vacu -blast methods may be required. Coating manufacturers' recommendations for wet blast additives and first coat application shall apply. 4. Hand tool clean areas that cannot be cleaned by power tool cleaning. 5. Round or chamfer sharp edges and grind smooth burrs, jagged edges, and surface defects. 6. Welds and Adjacent Areas: a. Prepare such that there is: 1) No undercutting or reverse ridges on weld bead. 2) No weld spatter on or adjacent to weld or any area to be painted. 3) No sharp peaks or ridges along weld bead. b. Grind embedded pieces of electrode or wire flush with adjacent surface of weld bead. 7. Preblast Cleaning Requirements: a. Remove oil, grease, welding fluxes, and other surface contaminants prior to blast cleaning. 1 PAINTING AND COATING CVO/391538A 09900 - 8 JUNE 2010 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 b. Cleaning Methods: Steam - open flame —ho , - g pe t water, or cold water ' with appropriate detergent additives followed with clean water rinsing. c. Clean small isolated areas as above or solvent clean with suitable ' solvent and clean cloth. 8. Blast Cleaning Requirements: a. Type of Equipment and Speed of Travel: Design to obtain ' specified degree of cleanliness. Minimum surface preparation is as specified herein and takes precedence over coating manufacturer's recommendations. ' b. Select type and size of abrasive to produce surface profile that meets coating manufacturer's recommendations for particular primer to be used. 1 c. Use only dry blast cleaning methods. d. Do not reuse abrasive, except for designed recyclable systems. e. Meet applicable federal, state, and local air pollution and ' environmental control regulations for blast cleaning, confined space entry (if required), and disposition of spent aggregate and debris. ' 9. Post -Blast Cleaning and Other Cleaning Requirements: a. Clean surfaces of dust and residual particles from cleaning operations by dry (no oil or water vapor) air blast cleaning or other method prior to painting. Vacuum clean enclosed areas and other areas where dust settling is a problem and wipe with a tack cloth. 1 b. Paint surfaces the same day they are blasted. Reblast surfaces that have started to rust before they are painted. 1 C. Galvanized Metal, Copper, and Nonferrous Metal Alloy Surface Preparation: 1. Remove soil, cement spatter, and other surface dirt with appropriate 1 hand or power tools. 2. Remove oil and grease by wiping or scrubbing surface with suitable solvent, rag, and brush. Use clean solvent and clean rag for final wiping to avoid contaminating surface. 3. Obtain and follow coating manufacturer's recommendations for 1 additional preparation that may be required. D. Concrete Surface Preparation: 1 1. Do not begin until 30 days after concrete has been placed. 2. Meet requirements of SSPC SP 13. 3. Remove grease, oil, dirt, salts or other chemicals, loose materials, or 1 other foreign matter by solvent, detergent, or other suitable cleaning methods. 1 CVO /39 538A PAINTING AND COATING 1 JUNE 2010 09900 - 9 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 1 4. Brush -off blast clean to remove loose concrete and laitance, and provide a tooth for binding. Upon approval by Engineer, surface may be cleaned by acid etching method. Approval is subject to producing desired profile equivalent to No. 80 grit flint sandpaper. Acid etching of vertical or overhead surfaces shall not be allowed. 5. Secure coating manufacturer's recommendations for additional preparation, if required, for excessive bug holes exposed after blasting. 6. Unless otherwise required for proper adhesion, ensure surfaces are dry prior to painting. E. Plastic and FRP Surface Preparation: 1 1. Hand sand plastic surfaces to be coated with medium grit sandpaper to provide tooth for coating system. 2. Large areas may be power sanded or brush -off blasted, provided sufficient controls are employed so surface is roughened without removing excess material. 1 F. Masonry Surface Preparation: 1. Complete and cure masonry construction for 14 days or more before starting surface preparation work. 2. Remove oil, grease, dirt, salts or other chemicals, loose materials, or other foreign matter by solvent, detergent washing, or other suitable cleaning methods. 3. Clean masonry surfaces of mortar and grout spillage and other surface deposits using one of the following: a. Nonmetallic fiber brushes and commercial muriatic acid followed by rinsing with clean water. b. Brush -off blasting. c. Water blasting. 4. Do not damage masonry mortar joints or adjacent surfaces. 5. Leave surfaces clean and, unless otherwise required for proper adhesion, dry prior to painting. 6. Masonry Surfaces to be Painted: Uniform texture and free of surface 1 imperfections that would impair intended finished appearance. 7. Masonry Surfaces to be Clear Coated: Free of discolorations and uniform in texture after cleaning. G. Existing Painted Surfaces to be Repainted Surface Preparation: 1. Detergent wash and freshwater rinse. 2. Clean loose, abraded, or damaged coatings to substrate by hand or power tool, SP 2 or SP 3. 3. Feather surrounding intact coating. • 1 PAINTING AND COATING CVO/391538A 09900 - 10 JUNE 2010 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 4. Apply one spot coat of -s specified rimer to -bare- areas— over-la in pP Y p P p � overlapping ' prepared existing coating. 5. Apply one full finish coat of specified primer to entire surface. 6. If an aged, plural- component material is to be topcoated, contact coating manufacturer for additional surface preparation requirements. ' 7. Application of Cosmetic Coat: a. It is assumed that existing coatings have oxidized sufficiently to ' prevent lifting or peeling when overcoated with paints specified. b. Check compatibility by application to a small area prior to starting painting. ' c. If lifting or other problems occur, request disposition from Engineer. 8. Perform blasting as required to restore damaged surfaces. Materials, 1 equipment, procedures shall meet requirements of SSPC. 3.05 SURFACE CLEANING 1 A. Brush -off Blast Cleaning: 1. Equipment, procedure, and degree of cleaning shall meet requirements of SSPC SP 7. 2. Abrasive: Either wet or dry blasting sand, grit, or nutshell. 3. Select various surface preparation parameters, such as size and hardness of abrasive, nozzle size, air pressure, and nozzle distance from surface such that surface is cleaned without pitting, chipping, or other damage. ' 4. Verify parameter selection by blast cleaning a trial area that will not be exposed to view. 5. Engineer will review acceptable trial blast cleaned area and use area as ' a representative sample of surface preparation. 6. Repair or replace surface damaged by blast cleaning. 1 B. Solvent Cleaning: 1. Consists of removal of foreign matter such as oil, grease, soil, drawing ' and cutting compounds, and any other surface contaminants by using solvents, emulsions, cleaning compounds, steam cleaning, or similar materials and methods that involve a solvent or cleaning action. 2. Meet requirements of SSPC SP 1. 3.06 APPLICATION 1 A. General: ' 1. The intention of these Specifications is for new, interior and exterior metal, and submerged metal surfaces to be painted, whether specifically CVO/391538A PAINTING AND COATING JUNE 2010 09900 - 11 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 1 mentioned or not, except as specified otherwise. Do not paint exterior concrete surfaces, unless specifically indicated. 2. Extent of Coating (Immersion): Coatings shall be applied to internal vessel and pipe surfaces, nozzle bores, flange gasket sealing surfaces, carbon steel internals, and stainless steel internals, unless otherwise specified. 3. For coatings subject to immersion, obtain full cure for completed system. Consult coatings manufacturer's written instructions for these requirements. Do not immerse coating until completion of curing cycle. 4. Apply coatings in accordance with these Specifications and paint manufacturers' printed recommendations and special details. The more stringent requirements shall apply. Allow sufficient time between coats to assure thorough drying of previously applied paint. 5. Sand wood lightly between coats to achieve required finish. 6. Vacuum clean surfaces free of loose particles. Use tack cloth just prior to applying next coat. 7. Coat units or surfaces to be bolted together or joined closely to 1 structures or to one another prior to assembly or installation. 8. Water- Resistant Gypsum Board: Use only solvent type paints and coatings. 9. On pipelines, terminate coatings along pipe runs to 1 inch inside pipe penetrations. 10. Keep paint materials sealed when not in use. 11. Where more than one coat is applied within a given system, alternate colors to provide a visual reference showing required number of coats have been applied. 1 B. Galvanized Metal, Copper, and Nonferrous Metal Alloys: 1. Concealed galvanized, copper, and nonferrous metal alloy surfaces (behind building panels or walls) do not require painting, unless specifically indicated herein. 2. Prepare surface and apply primer in accordance with System No. 10 specification. 3. Apply intermediate and finish coats of the coating system appropriate for the exposure. C. Film Thickness and Coverage: 1 1. Number of Coats: a. Minimum required without regard to coating thickness. 1 b. Additional coats may be required to obtain minimum required paint thickness, depending on method of application, differences in manufacturers' products, and atmospheric conditions. 1 1 PAINTING AND COATING CVO/391538A 09900 - 12 JUNE 2010 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 2. Application Thickness: a. Do not exceed coating manufacturer's recommendations. b. Measure using a wet film thickness gauge to ensure proper coating thickness during application. ' 3. Film Thickness Measurements and Electrical Inspection of Coated Surfaces: a. Perform with properly calibrated instruments. b. Recoat and repair as necessary for compliance with Specification. c. Coats are subject to inspection by Engineer and coating manufacturer's representative. ' 4. Visually inspect concrete, masonry, nonferrous metal, plastic, and wood surfaces to ensure proper and complete coverage has been attained. 5. Give particular attention to edges, angles, flanges, and other similar areas, where insufficient film thicknesses are likely to be present, and ensure proper millage in these areas. 6. Apply additional coats as required to achieve complete hiding of ' underlying coats. Hiding shall be so complete that additional coats would not increase the hiding. 1 3.07 PROTECTIVE COATINGS SYSTEMS AND APPLICATION SCHEDULE A. Unless otherwise shown or specified, paint surfaces in accordance with the following application schedule. In the event of discrepancies or omissions in the following, request clarification from Engineer before starting work in question. B. As shown in Section 09000, Schedules for Finishes. Additional requirements are included in the Piping Schedule. 1 C. System No. 2 Submerged Metal— Domestic Sewage: 1 Surface Prep. Paint Material Min. Coats, Cover SP 5, White Metal Prime in accordance t Blast Cleaning with manufacturer's recommendations ' High Build Epoxy 2 coats, 16 MDFT 1. Use on the following items or areas: ' a. Metal surfaces new and below a plane 1 foot above maximum liquid surface, metal surfaces above maximum liquid surface that are a part of immersed equipment, structural steel. 1 CVO/391538A PAINTING AND COATING JUNE 2010 09900 - 13 DURHAM PHASE 5B 1 i D. System No. 4 Exposed Metal— Highly Corrosive: Surface Prep. Paint Material Min. Coats, Cover SP 10, Near -White Epoxy Primer— 1 coat, 3 MDFT Blast Cleaning Ferrous Metal High Build Epoxy 1 coat, 4 MDFT Polyurethane Enamel 1 coat, 3 MDFT 1 1. Use on the following items or areas: a. Exposed metal surfaces, new and located inside or outside of 1 structures and exposed to weather or in a highly humid atmosphere, such as pipe galleries and similar areas, and the following specific surfaces: 1) Exposed ferrous metal items of mechanical equipment, including but not limited to, pipe, valves, fittings, and miscellaneous appurtenances, and structural steel associated with equipment. 2) All exposed ferrous metal surfaces not specified to be painted with other paint systems herein. E. System No. 7 Concrete Encased Metal: Surface Prep. Paint Material Min. Coats, Cover SP 6, Commercial High Build Epoxy 2 or 3 coats, 16 MDFT 1 Blast Cleaning 1. Use on the following items or areas: 1 a. Use on concrete encased ferrous metals including wall pipes, pipe sleeves, access manholes, gate guides, and thimbles. F. System No. 10 Galvanized Metal, Copper, and Nonferrous Metal Alloy Conditioning: Surface Prep. Paint Material Min. Coats, Cover In accordance with Epoxy Primer Other As recommended by Paragraph Galvanized coating manufacturer Metal, Copper, and Nonferrous Metal Remaining coats as Alloy Surface required for exposure Preparation 1 PAINTING AND COATING CVO /391538A 09900 - 14 JUNE 2010 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 1. Use 011 the following items or areas: - -- I a. Galvanized surfaces requiring painting , and the following specific surfaces: 1) All galvanized steel in the screen room and compactor I room. Finish coat with System No. 4. 2) Copper surfaces requiring painting. b. After application of System No. 10, apply finish coats as required I for exposure. G. System No. 21 Skid - Resistant - Concrete: I 1 Surface Prep. Paint Material Min. Coats, Cover I In accordance with Epoxy Nonskid 1 coat, 160 SFPG Paragraph Concrete (Nonaggregated) Surface Preparation 1 1. Use on the following items or areas: a. 4 -inch wide stripe continuous along top edge of 3 -inch high curb I either side of loading bay and see Drawings. b. Color: OSHA - safety yellow. H. System No. 25 Exposed FRP, PVC: Surface Prep. Paint Material Min. Coats, Cover 1 In accordance with Acrylic Latex 2 coats, 320 SFPGPC Paragraph Plastic and Semigloss 1 FRP Surface Preparation 1. Use on the following items or areas: 1 a. All surfaces of PVC and CPVC, and FRP without integral UV- resistant gel coat located outdoors. 1 I. System No. 27 Aluminum and Dissimilar Metal Insulation: I Surface Prep. Paint Material Min. Coats, Cover Solvent Clean (SP 1) Prime in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations I Bituminous Paint 1 coat, 10 MDFT I 1. Use on aluminum surfaces embedded or in contact with concrete. 1 CVO/391538A PAINTING AND COATING I JUNE 2010 09900 - 15 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 1 3.08 ARCHITECTURAL PAINT SYSTEMS AND APPLICATION SCHEDULE • A. As shown in Section 09000, Schedules for Finishes. B. System No. 106 Galvanized Metal: Surface Prep. Paint Material Min. Coats, Cover In accordance with Manufacturer' s 1 coat, as recommended 1 Paragraph Galvanized Recommended Primer by manufacturer Metal, Copper, and Nonferrous Metal Alloy Surface Preparation Alkyd Enamel 2 coats, 4 MDFT Semi loss) 1. Use on the following items or areas: 1 a. Hollow metal frames and doors. C. System No. 110 Concrete and Masonry, Seal: Surface Prep. Paint Material Min. Coats, Cover Concrete: In Acrylic Sealer 2 coats, 100 SFPGPC accordance with Paragraph Concrete Surface Preparation -OR- Masonry: In accordance with Paragraph Masonry Surface Preparation 3.09 COLORS A. Provide as shown in Section 09000, Schedules for Finishes or as selected by Owner or Engineer. B. Proprietary identification of colors is for identification only. Selected manufacturer may supply matches. 1 PAINTING AND COATING CVO/391538A 09900 - 16 JUNE 2010 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 C. Equipment Colors: -- 1 1. Equipment includes the machinery or vessel itself plus the structural supports and fasteners and attached electrical conduits. ' 2. Paint equipment and piping one color as selected. 3. Paint nonsubmerged portions of equipment the same color as the piping it serves, except as itemized below: a. Dangerous Parts of Equipment and Machinery: OSHA Orange. b. Fire Protection Equipment and Apparatus: OSHA Red. c. Radiation Hazards: OSHA Purple. d. Physical hazards in normal operating area and energy lockout devices, including, but not limited to, electrical disconnects for equipment and equipment isolation valves in air and liquid lines ' under pressure: OSHA Yellow. D. Pipe Identification Painting: 1 1. Color code to the requirements shown on Pipe Schedule located on Drawings for nonsubmerged metal piping, except electrical conduit. Paint fittings and valves the same color as pipe, except equipment isolation valves. 2. On exposed stainless steel piping, apply color 24 inches in length along pipe axis at connections to equipment, valves, or branch fittings, at wall boundaries, and at intervals along piping not greater than 9 feet on center. 3. Pipe Supports: Painted light gray, as approved by Owner. 4. Fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) pipe, polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF), and polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pipe located inside of buildings ' and enclosed structures will not require painting, except as noted or scheduled. 1 3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Equipment: 1 1. Provide magnetic type dry film thickness gauge to test coating thickness specified in mils, as manufactured by Nordson Corp., Anaheim, CA, Mikrotest. 2. Provide low- voltage wet sponge electrical holiday detector to test completed coating systems, 20 mils dry film thickness or less, except zinc primer, high -build elastomeric coatings, and galvanizing, for pinholes, holidays, and discontinuities, as manufactured by Tinker and Rasor, San Gabriel, CA, Model M -1. 3. Provide high - voltage spark tester to test completed coating systems in excess of 20 mils dry film thickness. Unit as recommended by coating manufacturer. CVO/391538A PAINTING AND COATING JUNE 2010 09900 - 17 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 B. Testing: 1 1. Thickness and Continuity Testing: 1 a. Measure coating thickness specified in mils with a magnetic type, dry film thickness gauge, in accordance with SSPC PA 2. Check each coat for correct millage. Do not make measurement before a minimum of 8 hours after application of coating. b. Holiday detect coatings 20 mils thick or less, except zinc primer and galvanizing, with low voltage wet sponge electrical holiday detector in accordance with NACE RP0188. c. Holiday detect coatings in excess of 20 mils dry with high voltage spark tester as recommended by coating manufacturer and in accordance with NACE RP0188. d. After repaired and recoated areas have dried sufficiently, retest 111 each repaired area. Final tests may also be conducted by Engineer. C. Inspection: Leave staging and lighting in place until Engineer has inspected surface or coating. Replace staging removed prior to approval by Engineer. Provide additional staging and lighting as requested by Engineer. D. Unsatisfactory. Application: 1 1. If item has an improper finish color or insufficient film thickness, clean surface and topcoat with specified paint material to obtain specified color and coverage. Obtain.specific surface preparation information from coating manufacturer. 2. Evidence of runs, bridges, shiners, laps, or other imperfections is cause for rejection. 3. Repair defects in accordance with written recommendations of coating manufacturer. E. Damaged Coatings, Pinholes, and Holidays: 1 1. Feather edges and repair in accordance with recommendations of paint manufacturer. 2. Hand or power sand visible areas of chipped, peeled, or abraded paint, and feather the edges. Follow with primer and finish coat. Depending on extent of repair and appearance, a finish sanding and topcoat may be required. 3. Apply finish coats, including touchup and damage- repair coats in a manner that will present a uniform texture and color - matched appearance. 1 1 PAINTING AND COATING CVO/391538A 09900 - 18 JUNE 2010 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 3.11 MANUFACTURER' S SERVICES — -- 1 A. In accordance with Section 01 43 33, Manufacturers' Field Services, coating manufacturer's representative shall be present at Site as follows: 1 1. On first day of application of any coating system. 2. A minimum of two additional Site inspection visits, each for a minimum of 4 hours, in order to provide Manufacturer's Certificate of Proper ' Installation. 3. As required to resolve field problems attributable to or associated with manufacturer's product. 4. To verify full cure of coating prior to coated surfaces being placed into immersion service. 3.12 CLEANUP A. Place cloths and waste that might constitute a fire hazard in closed metal containers or destroy at end of each day. B. Upon completion of the Work, remove staging, scaffolding, and containers ' from Site or destroy in a legal manner. C. Remove paint spots, oil, or stains upon adjacent surfaces and floors and leave entire job clean. 3.13 SUPPLEMENTS A. The supplements listed below, following "End of Section," are a part of this Specification: ' 1. Paint System Data Sheet (PSDS). 2. Paint Product Data Sheet (PPDS). ' END OF SECTION 1 1 i - CVO/391538A PAINTING AND COATING JUNE 2010 09900 - 19 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 PAINT SYSTEM DATA SHEET- Complete this PSDS for each coating system, include all components of the system (surface preparation, primer, intermediate coats, and finish coats). Include all components of a given coating system on a single PSDS. Paint System Number (from Spec.): Paint System Title (from Spec.): Coating Supplier: 1 Representative: Surface Preparation: 1 Paint Material Product Name/Number (Generic) (Proprietary) Min. Coats, Coverage 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 CVO/391538A PAINTING AND COATING JUNE 2010 09900 SUPPLEMENT - 1 DURHAM PHASE 5B 1 PAINT PRODUCT DATA S HEET Complete and attach manufacturer's Technical Data Sheet to this PPDS for each product submitted. Provide manufacturer's recommendations for the following parameters at temperature (F) /relative humidity: Temperature/RH 50/50 70/30 90/25 Induction Time Pot Life Shelf Life Drying Time Curing Time Min. Recoat Time 1 Max. Recoat Time ' Provide manufacturer's recommendations for the following: Mixing Ratio: Maximum Permissible Thinning: Ambient Temperature Limitations: min.: max.: 1 Surface Temperature Limitations: min.: max.: Surface Profile Requirements: min.: max.: 1 Attach additional sheets detailing manufacturer's recommended storage requirements and 1 holiday testing procedures. 1 1 1 CVO/391538A PAINTING AND COATING 1 JUNE 2010 09900 SUPPLEMENT - 1 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 SECTION 10400 - - -- SIGNAGE ' PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUBMITTALS ' A. Action Submittals: 1. Shop Drawings: ' a. Drawings showing layouts, actual letter sizes and styles, and Project - specific mounting details. b. Manufacturer's literature showing letter sizes and styles, sign materials, and standard mounting details. 2. Samples: One full size for each type of nameplate, sign, and label specified. ' B. Informational Submittals: Manufacturer's installation instructions. 1 • PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 DOOR NAMEPLATES A. Material: Plastic with square corners. B. Thickness: 1/8 inch. C. Height: 2 inches. 1 D. Finish: Nondirectional matte. • ' E. Background: Brown. F. Letters: Engraved. 1. Size: 1 inch high. 2. Color: White. ' 3. Style: Helvetica medium upper case. 4. Message Text: As shown on Door and Hardware Schedule. ' G. Manufacturers and Products: 1. Best Manufacturing Co., Kansas City, MO; System A -101. 2. Andco Industries Corp., Greensboro, NC; 1400 series. CVO/391538A SIGNAGE JUNE 2010 10400 - 1 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 2.02 SIGNS A. Metal Signs (Type B): 1. Material: Baked enamel finished 20 -gauge (minimum) steel or 18 -gauge (minimum) aluminum signs. 2. Manufacturers: a. Seton Identification Products. b. Nutheme Illustrated Safety Co. B. Fiberglass Signs (Type C): 1. Material: Three -ply laminated fiberglass, minimum 1/8 inch thick, with contrasting color core message layer between two clear weather- resistant surface layers. 2. Manufacturers: a. Best Manufacturing Co. b. Brady Signmark. 2.03 IDENTIFICATION LABELS A. Pipe Labels: 1. Labels: Self - adhesive tape, with separate directional flow arrow banding tape. 2. Material: Pressure sensitive vinyl. 3. Label Size: a. 3/4 -Inch to 1 -1/4- InchPipe: 1/2 -inch label. b. 1 -1/2 -Inch to 2 -Inch Pipe: 3/4 -inch label. c. 2 -1/2 -Inch to 6 -Inch Pipe: 1 -1/4 -inch label. d. 8 -Inch to 10 -Inch Pipe: 2 -1/2 -inch label. e. Over 10 -Inch Pipe: 3 -1/2 -inch label. 4. Letters and Arrows: Black on OSHA safety yellow background. 5. Color Field and Letter Height: ASME A13.1. 6. Message: Piping system name as indicated on Piping Schedule. 7. Manufacturers and Products: a. Brady Signmark. b. Seton Identification Products. B. Field Instrument Identification: 1. Nametags: Attach instrument tags to all field instrument devices such as 1 pressure switch, flow switch, instrument elements /sensors /transducers, etc. 2. Materials: 12 -gauge stainless steel. 1 SIGNAGE CVO/391538A 10400 - 2 JUNE 2010 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 3. Fastening: Neatly secure to instrument with stainless steel ' wire. 4. Size: Minimum 3/4 -inch high plate by 2 inches wide. 5. Test: Laser etch text on face of nametag. ' a. Descriptive Tag: Minimum 3/4 -inch high lettering. C. Equipment Labels: 1 1. Refer to Section 16015, Electrical Identification, for labeling requirements for electrical equipment including control panels, local ' control stations, instruments, and motors. 2. Provide identifying nameplate and nametag on new and reused panels and equipment as shown in Supplement Signage for Existing Panels and Equipment, or as listed elsewhere. Enclosure identification shall be located on the enclosure surface of PLC control panel, motors, pumps, local control stations, instrument transmitters, analytical controllers, etc. ' 3. Equipment Nameplates and Nametags: a. Pumps, valves, gates, and equipment shall be labeled as follows: 1) Nameplates: Enclosure identification located on the enclosure face with rectangular screw -on nameplates. 2) Materials: Laminated phenolic plastic nameplates with white letters on black backgrounds. 3) Fastening: Secure with self - tapping Type 316 stainless steel screws. 4) Size: 2 -1/4 -inch high plate. ' 5) Text: a) Descriptive Name: 1 -inch high lettering. b) Descriptive Tag: 1/2 -inch high lettering. 6) For the same piece of equipment, descriptive nameplate shall be consistently provided at various locations for all associated equipment with that piece. 2.04 ANCILLARY MATERIALS 1 A. Fasteners: Stainless steel screws or bolts of appropriate sizes. B. Pipe Posts: 2 -1/2 -inch galvanized steel pipe meeting ASTM A53, Type S, .� Grade B. C. Chain: Type 304 stainless steel, No. 16 single jack chain or No. 2 double loop 1 coil chain. D. Manufacturer's standard brackets for wall mounting of two -sided exit signs. 1 CVO/391538A SIGNAGE JUNE 2010 10400 - 3 • DURHAM PHASE 5B1 1 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION— GENERAL 1 A. In accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Mount securely, plumb, and level. 3.02 DOOR NAMEPLATES AND PICTORIAL SYMBOLS 1 A. Attach to doors with permanent adhesive. See Door and Hardware Schedule for locations and messages. 1 B. Mount with bottom of nameplate at 5 feet 6 inches above floor. 3.03 SIGNS 1 A. Fasten to walls or posts or hang as scheduled. Anchor in place for easy removal and reinstallation with ordinary hand tools. B. Information, Exit, and Safety Signs: 1. Install facing traffic. Locate for high visibility with minimum restriction of working area around walkways and equipment. 2. Removable with ordinary hand tools without leaving scars on structure or equipment. 3.04 IDENTIFICATION LABELS A. Pipe Labels: 1. Locate at connections to equipment, valves, or branching fittings at wall boundaries. 2. At intervals along piping not greater than 18 feet on center with at least one label applied to each exposed horizontal and vertical run of pipe. 3. At exposed piping not normally in view, such as above suspended ceilings and in closets and cabinets. 4. Supplementary Labels: Provide to Owner those listed on Piping Schedule that do not receive arrows. 5. Application: To pipe only after painting in vicinity is complete or as approved by Engineer. 6. Installation: In accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1 1 1 SIGNAGE CVO/391538A 10400 - 4 JUNE 2010 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 B. Equipment Labels: • 1. Locate and install on equipment or concrete equipment base. 2. Anchor to equipment or base for easy removal and replacement with ' ordinary hand tools. 3.05 SUPPLEMENT A. The supplement listed below, following "End of Section," is a part of this Specification. 1. Signage for Existing Panels and Equipment. 2. Sign Schedule: A tabulation of characteristics and mounting information for each sign on the Project. Provide items as scheduled. Meet requirements of Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA). END OF SECTION 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 CVO/391538A SIGNAGE 1 JUNE 2010 10400 - 5 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 1 SIGNAGE FOR EXISTING PANELS AND EQUIPMENT ' Descriptive Name Descriptive Tag P g 1 CHANNEL 1 GATES LOCAL CS 200G0501/05 -LCS 1 CHANNEL 1 INLET GATE 200G0501 CHANNEL 1 INLET GATE ACTUATOR 200ACT0501 1 CHANNEL 1 OUTLET GATE 200G0505 CHANNEL 1 OUTLET GATE ACTUATOR 200ACT0505 1 CHANNEL 2 GATES LOCAL CS 200G0502/06 -LCS CHANNEL 2 INLET GATE 200G0502 1 CHANNEL 2 INLET GATE ACTUATOR 200ACT0502 CHANNEL 2 OUTLET GATE 200G0506 CHANNEL 2 OUTLET GATE ACTUATOR 200ACT0506 CHANNEL 3 GATES LOCAL CS 200G0503/07 -LCS 1 CHANNEL 3 INLET GATE 200G0503 1 CHANNEL 3 INLET GATE ACTUATOR 200ACT0503 CHANNEL 3 OUTLET GATE 200G0507 ' CHANNEL 3 OUTLET GATE ACTUATOR 200ACT0507 CHANNEL 4 GATES LOCAL CS 200G0504/08 -LCS CHANNEL 4 INLET GATE 200G0504 CHANNEL 4 INLET GATE ACTUATOR 200ACT0504 1 CHANNEL 4 OUTLET GATE 200G0508 CVO/391538A SIGNAGE JUNE 2010 10400 SUPPLEMENT - 1 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 1 SIGNAGE FOR EXISTING PANELS AND EQUIPMENT Descriptive Name Descriptive Tag P P .. g CHANNEL 4 OUTLET GATE ACTUATOR 200ACT0508 GRIT CLASSIFIER 1 LOCAL CS 200GRT0601 -LCS 1 GRIT CLASSIFIER 2 LOCAL CS 200GRT0602 -LCS ODOR SCRUBBER 2000S4101 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SIGNAGE CVO/391538A 10400 SUPPLEMENT - 2 JUNE 2010 OM OM w OM — M. w — - -- NM — NM ® MN DURHAM PHASE 5B1 SIGN SCHEDULE Sign Size Mounting Lettering Height Other QTY Type Format Width Height Color Location Method to Top Height Style Color Message Faces Requirements 4 C 10402 20" 14" Yellow Hanging Chain 5' -6" 1" min. Helvetica Black CAUTION 1 Compactor Room Equipment Starts Screen Room . Automatically 2 C 10401 20" 14" White Door Screws or 5' -6" 1" min. Helvetica Black DANGER 1 Electrical Room Bolts High Voltage 12 C 10401 20" 14" White Wall Bolts 3' -6" 1" min. Helvetica Black DANGER 1 Provide at interior Nonpotable Water NPW hose valves Not for Drinking 2 B 10401 20" 14" White Pipe Post Bolts 3' -6" 1" min. Helvetica Black DANGER 1 Provide at exterior Nonpotable Water NPW hose valves Not for Drinking 4 C 10403 20" 14" Orange Wall Bolts 5' -6" 1" min. Helvetica Black WARNING 1 Compactor Room Eye Protection Doors Required in this Area 3 C 10401 20" 14" White Wall Bolts 3' -6" 1" min. Helvetica Black DANGER 1 Compactor Room Hot Water Screen Room Letters refer to sign types specified in this section. 2 Numbers refer to Design Details that show sign layout. CVO/391538A SIGNAGE JUNE 2010 10400 SUPPLEMENT - 1 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 SECTION 10520 - -- ' PORTABLE FIRE AND SAFETY EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL ' 1.01 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 1 A. Conform to NFPA 10 and applicable municipal code. B. Provide extinguishers classified and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. for purpose specified and indicated. C. Provide fire rated fire extinguisher cabinets classified and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. for purpose specified and indicated. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Fire Extinguishers: Submit manufacturer's product data for each item, including sizes, ratings, UL listings, or other certifications, and mounting information. 2. Product Data: Submit extinguisher operational features, color and finish, and anchorage details. ' B. Informational Submittals: 1. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify Products meet or exceed specified ' requirements. C. Technical Operation and Maintenance Information: ' 1. Operation and Maintenance Data: As specified in Section 01782, Operation and Maintenance Data. ' 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE ' A. Perform Work in accordance with State of Oregon Public Work's standard. 1.04 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS 1 A. Section 01600, Product Requirements: Environmental conditions affecting products onsite. B. Do not install extinguishers when ambient temperatures are capable of freezing extinguisher ingredients. CVO/391538A PORTABLE FIRE AND JUNE 2010 SAFETY EQUIPMENT 10520 - 1 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 1 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 1 A. Manufacturers: • 1. JL Industries. 2. Larsen's Manufacturing Co. 3. Nystrom Products Co. 4. Potter Roemer. B. General: 1 1. Conform to NFPA 10 for fire extinguishers. 2. Furnish fire extinguishers from one manufacturer. ' 3. UL listed, charged and ready for service. C. Multipurpose Hand Extinguisher (F. Ext -1): 1 1. Tri-class dry chemical extinguishing agent. 2. Pressurized, red enameled steel shell cylinder. 3. Activated by top squeeze handle. 4. Agent propelled through hose or opening at top of unit. 5. For use on A, B, and C class fires. 6. Minimum UL Rating: 4A- 60B:C, 10 -pound capacity. D. Carbon Dioxide Hand Extinguisher (F. Ext -2): 1. Carbon dioxide. 2. Pressurized, red enameled steel shell cylinder. 1 3. Activated by top squeeze handle. 4. Agent propelled through hose and spreader nozzle. 5. For use on B and C class fires. 6. Minimum UL Rating: 10B:C, 15 -pound capacity. 2.02 ACCESSORIES ' A. Extinguisher Brackets: For hand extinguishers not located in cabinets, furnish heavy -duty brackets with clip- together strap for wall mounting formed steel, chromed finish. B. Fasteners: Furnish necessary screws, bolts, brackets, and other fastenings of suitable type and size to secure items of fire and safety equipment in position. 1. Metal expansion shields for machine screws at concrete and masonry. 2. Interior: Rust - resistant. PORTABLE FIRE AND CVO/391538A 1 SAFETY EQUIPMENT JUNE 2010 10520 - 2 1 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 PART 3 EXECUTION 1 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install where indicated or directed and following manufacturer's 1 recommendations. B. Provide adequate backing for mounting surfaces. ' C. Place extinguishers on wall brackets. 1 3.02 PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS A. Provide at locations shown or as directed by Engineer. B. Mount hangers securely in position, following manufacturer's recommendations. C. Top of Extinguisher: No more than 54 inches above floor. D. Install wall brackets, maximum 48 inches from finished floor to top of extinguisher handle. END OF SECTION 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 CVO/391538A PORTABLE FIRE AND JUNE 2010 SAFETY EQUIPMENT 1 10520 -3 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 SECTION 10999 MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES ' PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY 1 A. Section Includes: Dock bumpers. 1.02 SUBMITTALS 1 A. Action Submittals: Manufacturers' descriptions, installation data, and service instructions. PART 2 PRODUCTS 1 2.01 DOCK BUMPERS A. Materials: Fabric - reinforced rubber truck tires; 3/4 -inch diameter galvanized 1 steel rods; minimum 1/4 -inch thick galvanized structural steel angles. B. Composition: Fabricated from multiple plies cut from rubber truck tires to a uniform thickness of 4 -1/2 inches. Laminated under pressure on steel supporting rods that are welded and bolted to structural steel angle closures with predrilled anchor holes. Size angles to provide not less than 1 inch of 1 tread plies extending beyond the face of the closure angles. C. Manufacturers and Products: 1 1. Horizontal Units: a. Durable Corporation; Dura -Dock, Model B4510 -36. 1 b. Pawling Corporation; Model H -1038. PART 3 EXECUTION 1 3.01 INSTALLATION OF SPECIALTIES A. Follow manufacturer's recommendations and printed instructions. Consult with Engineer so that minor adjustments in the locations can be decided if necessary. 1 1. Install materials plumb or level as applicable and attach securely to adjacent materials with suitable fasteners. 2. Prevent scratching or damaging adjacent materials during installation. CVO/391538A MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES JUNE 2010 10999 - 1 DURHAM PHASE 5B1 1 1 B. Dock Bumpers: Securely anchor in -place following manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. END OF SECTION 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1` MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES CVO/391538A 10999 - 2 JUNE 2010 1